WM 'A I UNIVERSITY OF N.C. AT CHAPEL HILL 00022245982 i v I? 4 ^ hi \ Nj PETER PAULEY'S COMMON SCHOOL HISTORY CroC ILLUSTRATED BY ENGRAVINGS. A NEW EDITION, REVISED AND BROUGHT DOWN TO THE PRESENT TIME. PHILADELPHIA: PUBLISHED BY E. H. BUTLER & CO. 1857. ADVERTISEMENT. Tho design of this work is to furnish a clear outline of Universal His- tory, suited to common schools. It is intended for beginners, and is therefore written in a simple style, and, to render it convenient both for the pupil and teacher, it is divided into brief paragraphs and short chapters. Ample questions for examination are appended to the work. The teacher will doubtless find it better, in many cases, to substitute questions of his own, adapting them to the various capacities of his pupils. The publishers believe that the manner in which the work is prepared, together with its cheapness, will render it fit to be introduced into the Common Schools throughout our country. It will be seen that a pupil may commit the whole volume to memory during a winter's schooling ; and if, in this brief space, a clear outline of Universal History may be established in the memory, it is obvious that the subject is worthy the attention of every person interested in education. Entered according to the Act of Congress, in the year 1837, by S. G. GOODRICH, in the Clerk's Office of the District Court of Massachusetts. NOTE TO THE REVISED EDITION. In this revised edition, the Author has corrected a few errors, introduced recent events, and attempted certain emendations, where criticism had suggested their propriety. For the sake of greater convenience, the questions are arranged at the bottom of the pages. The chapters, however, are the same as before, and no change has been made which will render it inconvenient to use this edition in the same classes with previous editions. Entered according to the Act of Congress, in the year 1854, by S. G. GOODRICH, in the Clerk's Office of the District Court for the Southern District of New-York. CONTENTS. INTRODUCTION. CHAPTER pica I. Parley begins by telling about History, Geography, and other matters, , 9 H. Parley begins by telling how the 'World is divided into Land and Water, 10 HI. About the inhabitants of Asia, Africa, and other Countries, . . .13 IV. About the different Kinds of People in the World, 13 ASIA. V. About the Climate, Productions, Mountains, People, and Animals, of Asia, and other things, 14 VI. About the Creation. The Deluge, 17 VII. IIow Xbah and his Family came out of the Ark. How the People settled in the Land of Shinar. About Babel, 18 VIIT. More about Babel, 20 IX. About the great Assyrian Empire, and Reign of Queen Semiramis, . . 21 X. Queen Semiramis sets forth to conquer the World, but is defeated by the King of the Indies, 22 XI. About Xinias. Reign of Sardanapalus, and Ruin of the Assyrian Empire, 23 XII. About the Hebrews or Jews. Origin of the Hebrews. The Removal of Jacob and his Children to Egypt, 25 XILI. The Bondage in Egypt. Flight of the Hebrews, and Destruction of Pharaoh and his Host, 26 XIV. About the Wanderings of the Israelites in the 'Wilderness, . . .28 XV. Overthrow of the Midianites, Samson, Judge of Israel, . . . .30 XVI. Samson's Exploits and Death, 32 XVII. Beginning of the Reign of Saul, 34 XVIII. Combat of David and Goliath, So XIX. The Reign of David. Wisdom of Solomon 36 XX. The Building of the Temple. Visit of the Queen of Sheba, ... 37 XXI. The Decline of the Jewish Xation, 39 XXII. The Hebrew Prophets, 40 XXIII. Crucifixion of the Saviour. Destruction of Jerusalem, . . . .42 XXIV. Cyrus conquers Babylon. His Death, 44 XXV. Reign of Cambyses, . 45 XXVI. Expedition of Xerxes into Greece, 46 XXVII. Affairs of Persia till the Saracen Conquest, 48 XXVIII. Modern History of Persia, 49 XXIX. Early History of China, 51 XXX. Anecdotes of the Chinese Emperors, 52 XXXI. Cities of China. Manners of the Chinese, 54 XXXII. Origin of the Arabs. Rise of Mahomet, 55 XXXIII. Sequel of the History of the Saracens, 57 XXXIV. About Syria, Phoenicia, and Asia Minor, 59 XXXV. A Brief View of several Nations, 61 XXXVI. Review of the History of Asia, 62 XXXVII. Chronology of Asia, 65 AFRICA. XXXVTTT. About the Geography of Africa. The Lnhabitants, 69 XXXIX. Early Sovereigns of Egypt, 71 XL. Egyptian Architecture aud Sculpture, 73 XLI. The Ptolemies and Queen Cleopatra, 76 1* (5) 6 SCHOOL HISTORY. CHAPTER PAGB XLII. Sequel of the Egyptian History, 78 XLIII. Summary of ..Ethiopian Matters, 79 XLIV. Origin of the Barbary States, and their Piracies on the Christians, . 80 XLV. Fables and Facts about Africa, 81 XLVI. History of the Slave-Trade, 82 XL VII. Chronology of Africa, 83 EUROPE. XL YIIT. Introductory Remarks on its Geography, and other Matters, . . 84 XLIX. About Greece; where it is situated. Appearance of the Country ; Cli- mate, 88 L. The Extent of Greece. First Settlement of the Country, ... 90 LI. The Grecian Lawgivers, 91 LIE War with Persia, 92 LIII. Affairs of Athens, 93 LIV. Beginning of the Theban War, 95 LV. Sequel of the Theban War, 96 LVI. Grecian Religion or Mythology, 97 LVII. The Grecian Philosophers, 101 LVIII. The Grecian Philosophers continued, 102 LIX. Something more about Philosophers. About the Greek Poets, . . 103 LX. About the Mode of Life among the Ancient Greeks, .... 104 LXI. Philip of Macedon conquers Greece, 106 LXII. Conquests of Alexander the Great 108 LXIII. Sequel to Alexander's Career, 110 LXIV. Greece invaded by the Gauls, Ill LXV. End of Grecian Independence, 112 LXVI. Modern History of Greece, 113 LXVII. About Italy as it now is, 114 I1XVHX Founding of Rome by Romulus. Its early State, .... 117 LXIX. Battle of thelloratii and Curiatii, 120 LXX. From the reign of Ancus Martius till the Expulsion of the Kings, . 121 LXXI. The Story of Coriolanus, 123 LXXII. Rome invaded by the Gauls. The first Punic War, .... 124 LXXIII. Second and third Punic Wars, 126 LXXIV. Scipio's Triumph, 127 LXXV. Sylla and Marius, 128 LXXVI. Cneius Pompey and Julius Casar, 129 LXXVII. Caesar usurps the Supreme Power, 130 LXXVIII. Assassination of Julius Caesar, 131 LXXIX. Consequences of Caesar's Death, ' 132 LXXX. About the great Power and Extent of the Roman Empire in the Time of Augustus, 134 LXXXI. The Means by which Rome acquired its Power, 135 LXXXII. Rome under the Emperors, 186 LXXXIII. Fall of the Western Empire of the Romans, 138 LXXXIV. Progress of the Decline of Rome 139 LXXXV. Manners and Customs of the Aucicnt Romans, 141 LXXXVI. About Religion. Deities. Temples. Marriage, 142 LXXXVII. About Funeral Rites and Ceremonies, 144 LXXXVIII. Roman Farms. Mode of Ploughing. Farm Houses. Grain. Cattle. Superstitions of the Farmers. Gardens. Vines, .... 146 LXXXIX. Country Houses. Description of Pliny's Villa. Aqueducts, . . 147 XC. Military Affairs of the Romans. Division of the Army. The Imperial Eagle. Music. Arms. Dress. Military Rewards. Crowns. The Triumph 149 XCI. About Naval Affairs. The War Galley. Commerce. Shows of Wild Beasts. Exhibitions of Gladiators, 151 XCII. Sports^ Chariot Racing. The Circus. Carriages. Private Entertain- ments. Supper Rooms. Convivial Parties. Luxuries, . . . 152 XCIII. About Theatres. Clocks and Watches. The Fine Arts. Books and Writing. Costume. Conclusion, 154 XCIV. Rome under the Popes, 155 XCV. About several other Italian States, 158 XCVI. About the Ottoman Empire. Turkey in Europe. Turkey in Asia. About the Climate, People, and other Things, 159 J N T E X T S. 7 CHAPTER PAOa XCYII. About the Saracens. now the Turks overturned the Saracen Empire. How the Ottoman Turks founded the Ottoman Empire. About Bajazet, Timour. and others, 161 XCYTn. Sequel of the Turkish History, 162 XCIX. Early History of Spain. The Moorish Conquest, 163 C. Wars between the Moors and the Spaniards, 165 CI. The Spanish Inquisition, 166 CII. The Invincible Armada. Curious Death of a Spanish King. Recent Affairs of Spain, 168 CHI. A short Story about Portugal, 169 CIV. Description of France. Its Climate. Cities. Manufactures. Manners and Customs of the People, 170 CV. About the Gauls and other Tribes of Barbarians. How the Southern Parts of Europe were first settled, and how the Northern Parts were settled afterwards, 172 (J VI. Story of the Barbarians continued, 173 CVII. The Gauls. Origin of the French Nation. Little King Pepin, . . 175 CVIII. About Clovis and little King Pepin, 176 CIX. The Reign of Charlemagne, 178 CX. About the Crusades or Holy Wars, 179 CXI. About the Feudal System, 182 CX1I. About Chivalry, or Knight-Errantry, 184 CXIII. More about Chivalry 186 CXIV. King Philip and Pope Boniface. Wars of the French and English, . 1S8 CXV. The Reigns of several French Kings, 191 CXVI. The Reigns of Louis the Grand and his Successor, .... 192 CXVII. The French Revolution, 194 CXVIII. The Rise of Napoleon Bonaparte, 196 CXIX. The Fall of Bonaparte, 198 CXX. Recent Affairs of France, 200 CXXI. About Germany, 201 CXX1I. About the Ancient Tribes of Germany, Charlemagne, &<:., . . 202 CXX1II. Affairs of Switzerland, 203 CXXIV. Sequel of German History, 205 CXXV. About Austria, Hungary, &c, 267 CXXVI. About Hungary, Bohemia, the Tyrol, &c, 208 CXXVII. About Prussia, 210 CXXVIII. History of Prussia, 211 CXXIX. Description of Russia, 212 CXXX. Description of Russia continued, ........ 214 CXXXI. The Reign of Peter the Great, 216 CXXXII. The Successors of Peter the Great, 217 CXXXI1I. About Sweden, 219 CXXXIV. Charles the Twelfth and his Successors, 221 CXXXV. About Lapland, Norway, and Denmark, 222 CXXXVI. Brief Notices of several Kingdoms and States, 224 CXXXVII. Kingdom of Great Britain and Ireland, 223 CXXXVIII. About London and other Cities of England, Wales, Scotland, and Ireland, 226 CXXXIX. Origin of the British Nation. The Druids, 229 CXL. Saxon and Danish Kings of England, 231 CXLI. Norman Kings of England, 232 CXLI I. English Wars and Rebellions 234 CXLIII. The Lancastrian Kings of England, 235 CXLIV. Wars of the Roses, 237 CXLV. Reigns of the Tudor Princes, 239 CXLVI. The Reign of Elizabeth, 240 CXL VI I. Accession of the House of Stuart, 242 CXLVIII. Wars of the King and Parliament, 244 CXLI X. The Protectorate and the Restoration, 246 CL. The Revolution of 1688, and other Matters, 247 CLI. The Hanoverian Kings of Great Britain, 249 CL1I. The Story of Wales 251 CL1II. The Stnry of Scotland, 252 CLIV. About Ireland, 254 CLV. Matters and Things, 255 CLVI. Review. The Dark Ages. Important Inventions, &c. ... 257 CL VII. Chronology of Europe, 200 SCHOOLHISTORY. AMERICA. CHAPTER Paoi CLVin. About America, 267 CLIX. The first inhabitants of America, . 269 CLX. Discovery of America by Columbus, 271 CLXI. A few Words about Iceland and Greenland. Settlements of the French in America, 272 CLXII. The French Colonies conquered by the English, 274 CLXIII. Description of the United States, 276 CLXIV. Settlement and Colonial History of New England, .... 278 CLXV. Affairs of New England continued, 279 CLXVI. Early History of Virginia, 280 CLXVII. Braddock's Defeat, and other Matters, 281 CLXVIII. Causes which led to the Revolution, 282 CLXIX. Account of the Battle of Lexington, 283 \JLXX. The Battle of Bunker Hill, 284 CLXXI. Progress of the War. Capture of Burgoyne, 285 CLXXII. The Story of the Traitor Arnold and Major Andre, . . . . 2S7 CLXXIII. War in the South. Surrender of Cornwallis, 288 CLXXIV. Affairs of the United States since the Revolution, .... 289 CLXXV. General Remarks upon the History of the United States, . . . 290 CLXXVI. General Remarks upon the History of the United States continued, 291 CLXXVII. About South America. El Dorado, and the Fountain of Youth, . 293 CLXXVIII. History of the Mexican Territories. Guatimala, 295 CLXXIX. Spanish Peruvian Territories, 297 CLXXX. Account of the Brazilian Territories, 298 CLXXXI. The West Indies, 299 CLXXXII. The West Indies continued, 310 CLXXXIII. The West Indies continued, I ......... 802 CLXXXIV. Chronology of America, . . ... 304 OCEANIA. CLXXXV. About Oceania. The Malaysian Islands, ...... 305 CLXXXVI. The Australian Division of Oceania, . 306 CLXXXVII. Polynesia. The Sandwich Islands, ... ... 307 CLXXXVIII. Polynesia continued. The Society Islands, 309 CLXXXIX. Story of the Bounty concluded, . . . . . 310 CXC. Chronology of Oceania, - . . . 311 CXCI. General Views, • ... 318 COMMON SCHOOL HISTORY. CHAPTER I.— INTRODUCTION. The Author begins by telling about History, Geography, and other Hatters. 1. I suppose you have often met with the words History and Ge- ography. History tells the story of mankind since the world was created, and may he compared to an old man who has lived for thousands of years, and who has seen cities built and fall into decay; who has seen nations rise, flourish, and disappear; and who, with a memory full of wonderful things, sits down to tell you of all that has happened during so many ages. 2. Geography is a description of towns, rivers, mountains, and countries; the things which a traveller sees in going from one place to another. Geography, then, may be compared to some roving fel- low who has been all over the world in ships, stages, and steamboats, and who has come back to give us an account of all he has seen. 3. You will see, then, that History is a record of events that have happened, and that Geography tells you of the places where they happened. In order to understand the former, you must know some- thing of the latter. Now, in this little book I propose to recount the history of the world ; I shall therefore sometimes seem to put on the old grey -beard of history, who has lived for thousands of years, and tell you of what has come to pass; and sometimes I shall make you fancy yourself in a balloon or vessel, and carry you with me to the places where the events I am to relate, have occurred. 4. I shall, in the progress of my story, tell you about the creation of the first man and woman ; of the large family they had ; and how these increased and spread themselves throughout different countries. I shall tell you of the great nations that have existed, of the great battles that have been fought, and of the deeds of celebrated persons. 5. But, before I proceed, I must remind you that the world is round, and that men and animals live upon the surface; that the face of the Questions for examination. Chap. I. — 1. What i9 history? To what may it be com pared? 2. What is geography ? To what may it be compared? 5. What is the shape of the earth? Where oo men and animal., live ? How is the face of the land divided? V. i.ai ;:rr.w upon the land? What live upon Uie land? What are buill upon the land? (0 INTRODUCTION. earth is divided into land and water ; that on the land, trees, grass, herbs, and flowers grow ; that on the land men and animals dwell that on the land, towns, cities, and villages are built. 6. A high piece of land, you know, is called a mountain or hill ; a low piece of land is called a valley. You often see water running in a stream through a valley, which is called a river; and you some- times see a still piece of water surrounded by hills, which is called a lake. 7. About one third of the face of the earth is land, and tavo thirds are water. The land is divided into two great continents; the western continent consists of North and South America; the eastern continent consists of Europe, Africa, and Asia. CHAPTER II.— INTRODUCTION CONTINUED. The Author tells how the World is divided into Land and Water. 1. I have just told my readers, that about two thirds of the face of the earth are covered with water. This water is one vast salt sea, hut to different parts of it we give different names. 2. That part which lies between America and Europe is called the Atlantic Ocean, and is about three thousand miles wide ; that part which lies between America and Asia is called the Pacific Ocean, and is about ten thousand miles Avide. There are many other names given to other parts of the great salt sea. 3. Ships, as you Avell know, sail from one country to another upon the water, and in this way a great deal of trade or commerce is car- ried on. But, as mankind live on the land, my stories will chiefly re- late to what has happened on the land. 4. I suppose you have heard people speak of the four quarters of the world. By this they mean America, Europe, Africa, and Asia. Besides these, there are a great many pieces of land encircled by water, called islands. 5. In the Pacific Ocean there are many of these, the inhabitants of which are very numerous. These islands are considered a fifth di- vision of the world, and are called Oceania. 6. Now what I am going to tell you has happened in these differ- ent parts of the world. In order to understand my stories, it is ne- cessary you should look over the maps which are here given. These will show you where the different countries are, about which I am going to speak. 6. AVliat is a mountain or Mil? A valley ? A river? Lake? 7. What part of the face of the earth is land? What portion is water? How is the land divided? What of the western continent ? The eastern ? Ch. II. — 1. What of the great mass of water that covers two thirds of the earth? 2. What of the Atlantic Ocean ? The Pacific? 3. What of ships? What of the laud ? 4. What are the four quarters of the world ? What is an island ? 5. What, of Oceania ? INTRODUCTION. 11 Map of the Western Hemisphere, including North and South America. Questions nations. . 2. The principal of these nations are the Tartars, who wander from 'place to place, and dwell chiefly in tents; the Arabs, who have large flocks of camels and fine horses, with which they roam over the des- ert; the Hindoos, or inhabitants of India, who travel about on ele- phants, and worship idols ; the Persians, who are very fond of poetry and have splendid palaces; the Chinese, from whom we get tea; and the Turks, who sit on cushions instead of chairs. 3. The whole population of Asia is about four hundred millions, which is'about half the inhabitants of the whole globe. It has ten times as many people as the whole of North and South America put together. 4. Africa, you know, is the native land of the negroes. It has a few large cities, but the whole number of people is but sixty millions. 5. Europe is divided into several nations, such as the English, French, Italians, Spaniards, Germans, Russians, and others. It has many fine cities, and about three hundred millions of inhabitants. 6. America is the country where we live. It has some large cities, and many pleasant towns and villages, but more than half the country is uninhabited. The whole population is about forty millions. 7. Oceania, as I have before said, consists of many islands in the Pacific Ocean. Some of these, as Java, Sumatra, Borneo, and New Holland, are very large, the latter being the largest island on the globe. From these countries we get pepper, cloves, coffee, and other nice things. The whole population of Oceania is about twenty millions. CHAPTER IV.-INTRODUCTION CONTINUED. About the different Kinds of People in the World. 1. Thus you see that the whole number of the inhabitants upon lhe globe is about ten hundred millions. All these are descended from Adam and Eve, whom the Bible tells us lived in the garden of Eden ! Ch. HI.— 1. What of Asia? 2. What are the principal nations of Asia ? 8. Popula- tion of Asia? 4. What of Africa? Population? 5. What of Europe ? Population? 6 What of America? Population? 7. What of Oceania? In which direction are the Oceanic islands from New York ? Whatdo we get from Oceanai? Population? When ere the Oceanic islands? Ch. IV.— 1. What is the whole population of the globe r When did Adam and Eve live ? 2 14 INTRODUCTION. 2. What an immense family to have proceeded from one pair ! You may well believe that it has taken many years for the human family to increase to this extent. 3. If you were to travel in different countries, you would observe that the inhabitants differ very much in their color, dress, and mode of living. 4. Some have dark skins, like the color of a dead leaf, as the American Indians; some have a yellowish or olive color, like the Chinese; some are of a deep, sooty brown, like the Hindoos; some are black, like the negroes, and some are white, like the English, and the people of the United States. 5. In some countries the people live in huts huilt of mud or sticks, and subsist by hunting with the bow and arrow. These are said to be in the savage state. Our American Indians, soma of the negroes of Africa, some of the inhabitants of Asia, and most of the Oceanians, are savages. 6. In some countries the people live in houses partly of stone and mud. They have few books, no churches or meetinghouses, and worship idols. Such are most of the negroes of Africa, and many tribes in Asia. These are said to be in the barbarous state, and are often called barbarians. Many of their customs are very cruel. 7. In some countries the inhabitants live in tolerable houses, and the rich have fine palaces. The people have many ingenious arts, but the schools are poor, and but a small portion are taught to read and write. The Chinese, the Hindoos, the Turks, and some other nations of Asia, with some of the inhabitants of Africa and Europe, are in this condition, which may be called a civilized state. 8. In many parts of Europe, and in the United States, the people live in good houses, they have good furniture, many books, good schools, churches, meetinghouses, steamboats, and railroads. These are in the highest state of civilization. 9. Thus you observe that mankind may be divided into four class- es; — those who are in the savage state, those who are in a barbarous state, those who are merely civilized, and those who are in the high- est state of civilization. CHAPTER V.-ASIA. About the Climate, Productions, Mountains, People, and Animals, of Asia, and other Things. 1. I have already said that Asia is a vast country, containing a great many cities, and a multitude of inhabitants. It lies on the op- 3. What would you observe in travelling through different countries ? 5. What of peo- ple in the savage state ? 6. What of people in the barbarous state? 7. What of people in the civilized state ? S. What of people in the highest state of civilization ? 9. Into What four classes may mankind be divided ? Ch. V. — 1. What of Asia ? Where is Asia ASIA. 15 posite side of the earth from us, and you may go to it by crossing ihe Pacific Ocean on the west, or crossing the Atlantic and Europe on the east, i > z2^ 2. In the southern portion of Asia the climate is warm, as in our southern states. These parts are chiefly inhabited by the Chinese, Hindoos, Persians, Arabians, and Turks. In many places the country is fertile ; and in the valleys, beautiful flowers, spicy shrubs, and fra- grant trees are found. 3. Wild birds of the most brilliant colors are often seen in the for- ests. Peacocks, pheasants, and our domestic fowls are natives of these sunny regions. Oranges grow wild in some parts, and many of our most splendid garden flowers are to be found growing on the hills and in the valleys of Southern Asia. 4. In the centre of Asia, there are some mountains whose tops are covered with everlasting snow. These are the loftiest peaks in the world, and are nearly six miles in height. To the north of these is a cold region, where there are vast plains with scattered tribes of Tar- tars roaming over them for the scanty pastures they afford for their camels and horses. 5. In these gloomy tracts, there are few towns or cities. The in- habitants are for the most part wanderers, who build no houses, but dwell in tents, and live upon the milk and flesh of their flocks. They also hunt the wild deer, antelopes, and other animals that are found in these regions. 6. The native animals of Asia are many of them very remarkable The elephant is found in the thickets, the rhinoceros along the banks of rivers, the lion in the plains, the roy&l tiger in the forests, monkeys and apes of many kinds abound in the hot parts, and serpents thirty feet in length are sometimes met with. How can you go lo it? Point your finder towards Asia. 2. Climate of Southern Alia? What nationf Ihe in Southern Asia i Productions? 3. Birds? Fruits? Flowers > 4. Moun- tains? What of Northern Asia? 5. Inhabitants ? 6. Animals of Asia ? 16 CHOOL HISTORY. Map of Asia. ft 5« INte^s^^^ y :■■■ -■•<, Questions cm the Map. — How is Asia bounded on the north? East? South? West? Which ■way is Asia from Europe? In what part of Asia is Persia? In which direction from Persia is Arabia? Hindostan? China? Tartary? Siberia? Red Sea? Egypt? Mediterranean Sea? In what part of Asia is the river Euphrates? ASIA. 17 7. In the southern portions of Asia, hurricanes are common ; and these sometimes are so violent as to overturn the houses, rend the for- ests in pieces, and scatter ruin and desolation over the land. The countrv is often parched with drought, and destructive famine follows. Sometimes millions of locusts come borne upon the wind, and devour every green thing, so that nothing is left for man or beast. Pestilence often visits the people, aud sweeps away thousands upon thousands. 8. Such is Asia, a land of wonders both in its geography and his- tory. It is the largest of the four quarters of the globe; it contains the loftiest mountains, it affords the greatest variety of animal aud vegetable productions, and the seasons here display at once their most beautiful and their most fearful works. 9. Asia, too, is the most populous quarter of the globe; it contain- ed the first human inhabitants, and from this quarter, all the rest of the globe has been peopled. Here, too, the most remarkable events took place that belong to the history of man. Here the most won- derful personages were born that have ever trod this earth ; and here, too, the mighty miracles of Jehovah were wrought. CHAPTER VI.— ASIA CONTINUED. About the Creation. The Deluge. 1. The first portion of the world inhabited by mankind, was Asia ; the next was Africa ; the next was Europe, and the last was America. How long it is since this last country was first peopled by the Indians, we do not know ; but the first white people came here not quite three hundred and fifty years since. "^2. Let us now go back to the creation of the world. This wonder- ful event took place about six thousand years ago. The story of it is beautifully told in the first chapter of Genesis. 3. Adam and Eve were created in Asia, and were placed in the garden of Eden, not far from the river Euphrates. This river is in the western part of Asia, and is about six thousand miles in an east- erly direction from New York and Boston.^. 4. Adam and Eve were for a time the only human beings on this vast globe. Yet they did not feel alone, for God was with them. At length they had children, and in the course of "ears thoir descendants were very numerous. 7. Southern parts of Asia? 8. For what is Asia very remarkable as to its geography? 9. For what is Asia reiy remarkable as to its history? Ch. VI. — 1. Which quarter of the globe was first inhabited? Which quarter was next inhabited ? Which next? Which quarter was inhabited last? When was America first peopled by the Indians? Wlien by white people ? i. How lone is it since the world was created ? Tell the story of Ihe cre- ation, as related in the first chanter of Genesis. 3. Where did Adam and Eve live ? Where it ill- river Euphrates? How far is it from New York? Which >yay (Yum Boston? What oc'in viuld voucroM in going to the river Ennliratcj? 2* 18 SCHOOL HISTORY, 5. These dwelt m tne neighborhood of the Euphrates, and hers they built towns, cities, and villages. But they became very wicked. They forgot to worship God, and Avere unjust and cruel. 6. The Creator therefore determined to cut off the whole human family, with the exception of Noah and his children, both as a pun- ishment to the disobedient, and as a warning to all future nations that evil must follow sin. 7. Noah was told of the coming destruction, and therefore built an ark, into Avhich he gathered his family, and a single pair of the vari- ous kinds of land animals. It then began to rain, until all the coun- tries of the earth were covered with a deluge of water. S. Thus all the nations were cut off, and the world once more had but a single human family upon it. This event occurred sixteen hun- dred and fifty-six years after the creation. CHAPTER VII.-ASIA CONTINUED. Flow Noah and his family came out of the Ark. How the People settled in the Land of Shinar. About Babel. 1. The people who lived before the flood are called antediluvians. We know nothing about them except Avhat is told in the Bible. It is probable that they extended over but a small part of Asia, and that no human beings dwelt either in Africa, Europe, or America, before the flood. 2. The deluge is supposed to have commenced in November, and the rain is thought to have ceased in March. After a Avhile the Avaters subsided, and Noah's ark rested upon the top of a tall moun- tain in Armenia, called Ararat, Avhich is still to be seen. 'A. The people and animals noAV came out of the ark, and from them the world Avas again stocked Avith inhabitants. The animals spread themselves abroad, and after many centuries they Avere ex- tended into all countries. 4. Noah had three sons, Shem, Ham, and Japheth. These, with their families, proceeded to the country of Shinar, Avh : ch lies to the south of Mount Ararat. 5. Here they settled themselves on the borders of the river Eu- phrates, probably the same country that had been inhabited by the antediluvians. It is in this region that the first nations Avere formed. 5. Where did the descendants of Adam and Eve dwell ? What did they do ? 6. Wha< did God determine to do? Why did God determine to destroy mankind? 7. What ol' Noah? Describe the deluge. 8. What was the effect of the deluge? When' did the deluge take place? Ch. VII. — 1. AVhat of those who lived before tire flood? When did the deluge begin and end? What of Mount Ararat? 3 AVhat of the people that came out jf the ark? The animals? 4. AVhat three sons had Noah ? AVhat did the descendant! of Noah do? 5. Where did they settle ? Where was the land of Shinar? 20 SCHOOL HISTORY. 6. The people increased very rapidly, and, at the end of a hundretl years from the deluge, they were quite numerous. Most of Noahs family were at this time alive. They had told their descendants how the world had been overflowed wiih water, which destroyed all the land animals, and all the people, except those that were in the ark. 7. All who remembered the deluge, or had heard of it, were afraid that the wickedness of mankind would again be punished in a stmi- ar way. They therefore resolved to build a tower, that they might mount upon it, and save themselves from destruction. S. Accordingly they laid the foundation of the edifice on the eastern bank of the river Euphrates. Perhaps they expected to rear the tower so high, that its top would touch the blue sky, and enable them to climb into heaven. 9. Their building materials were bricks that had been baked in the sun. Instead of mortar, they cemented the bricks together with a sort of slime or pitch. 10. The workmen labored very diligently, and piled one layer of bricks upon another, till the earth was a considerable distance be- neath them. But the blue sky, and the sun, and the stars seemed as far off as when they first began. CHAPTER VIIL— ASIA CONTINUED. More about Babel. 1. One day, while these foolish people were at their labor, a very wonderful thing took place. They were talking together as usual, but, all of a sudden, they found it impossible to understand what each other said. 2. If any of the workmen called for bricks, their companions at the bottom of the tower might mistake their meaning, and bring them pitch. If they asked for one sort of tool, another sort was given them. Their words appeared to be mere sounds without any sense, like the babble of a little child, before it has been taught to speak. 3. This event caused such confusion that they could not go on building the tower. They therefore gave up the idea of climbing to heaven, and resolved to wander to different parts of the earth. 4. It is likely that they formed themselves into several parties, consisting of all who could talk intelligibly together. They set forth on their journey in various directions. 5. As each company departed, they probably threw a sad glance d. What of the people? 7. Why did they resolve to build the tower of Babel? f. Describe the building of the tower. Ch. VIII. — 1. Describe the confusion of liiu guages, 3, What was the consequence of this confusion of languages ? ASIA. o J behind them at the tower of Babel. The sun was perhaps shining on its lofty summit, as it seemed to rise into the very midst of the sky; and we may believe that it was long remembered by these exiles from their country. 6. The descendants of Shem are supposed to have distributed themselves over the country near to the Euphrates. The descend- ants of' Ham took a westerly direction, and proceeded to Africa. They settled in Egvpt, and laid the foundation of a great nation there. The descendants of Japheth proceeded to Greece, and thus laid the foundation of several European nations. 7. Some travellers in modern times have discovered a large hillock on the shore of the Euphrates. It is composed of sun-burnt bricks, cemented together with pitch. They believe this hillock to be the-- ruins of the tower of Babel, which was built more than four thousand j r ears ago. CHAPTER IX.— ASIA CONTINUED. About the great Assyrian Empire, and the Reign of Queen, Semiramis. 1. When the rest of mankind were scattered into different, parts of the earth, there were a number of people who remained near the tower of Babel. They continued to inhabit the land of Shinar, Avhich was a warm country, and very fertile. In the course of time they extended over a much larger tract of country, and built towns and cities. 2. This region received the name of Assyria. It was the first of the nations of the earth. Its boundaries varied at different times, but its place on the map may be seen in the vicinity of the two rivers Tigris and Euphrates, northward of the Persian Gulf. [i. Ashur, the grandson of Noah, was t lie first ruler of Assyria In the year 2229, B. C., he built the city of Nineveh, and surrounded it with walls a hundred feet high. It was likewise defended by fifteen hundred towers, each two hundred feet in height. The city was so lar^e, that a person would have travelled a hundred miles merely in walking round it. 4. But the city of Babylon, which was built a short time afterwards, was superior to Nineveh, both in size and beauty. It was situaud on the river Euphrates. The walls were so very thick that six 6. What of the descendants of Shem .' Of Ham ? Of Japheth ? 7. What have some travellers discovered ? What is the hillock supposed to be? Ch. IX. — 1. Did all the people leave the land of Shinar -.Hut the confusion of languages? Did the people of the land of Shinar increase? What did they do ? i. What name did the country around Shinar receive ? What was the first empire or great nation of the earth ■ fn which direc- tion was Assyria from the Fenian Gulf? Which way from the Mediterranean Sea? Which way from Egypt? 3. Who was the first ruler of Assyria ? What city did he kuild? Describe the city of Nineveh. 4. Where was the city of liabyVn .' 22 SCHOOL HISTORY. chariots drawn by horses could be driven abreast upon the top, with- out danger of falling off on either side. In this country we do not surround our cities with walls ; but in ancient times walls were necessary to protect the people from their enemies. 5. In this city there were magnificent gardens, belonging to the royal palace. They were constructed in such a manner that they appeared to be hanging in the air without resting on the earth. They contained large trees, and all kinds of fruits and flowers. 6. There was also a splendid temple dedicated to Belus, or Baal, who was the chief idol of the Assyrians. This temple was six hun- dred and sixty feet high, and it contained a golden image of Belus forty feet in height. 7. The city of Babylon, which I have been describing, was first built by Nimrod, that mighty hunter, of whom the Bible tells us. But the person who made the beautiful gardens and palaces, and who set up the golden image of Belus, was a woman, named Semiramis. 8. She had been the wife of Ninus, king of Assyria ; but, when king Ninus died, queen Semiramis became sole ruler of the empire. She was an ambitious woman, and could not content herself to live quietly in Babylon, although she had taken so much pains to make it a beautiful city. 9. She was tormented with a wicked desire to conquer all the nations of the earth. So she collected an immense army, and marched against the rich and powerful king of the Indies, who lived in what we now call Hindostan, a country lying to the southeast of Assyria. CHAPTER X.— ASIA CONTINUED. Queen Semiramis sets forth to conquer the world, but is defeated by the King of the Indies. ' 1. When the king of the Indies, who was very rich and powerful, heard that queen Semiramis was coming to invade his dominions, he mustered a vast number of men to defend them. Besides his soldiers, he had a great many elephants. 2. Each of these enormous beasts was worth a Avhole regiment of soldiers. They were taught to rush into the battle, and toss the enemy about with their trunks, and trample them down with their hu a s syria. 23 3. Now queen Semiramis had no elephants, and therefore she was afraid that the king of the Indies would overcome her. She endea- vored to prevent this misfortune by a very curious contrivance. In the first place, she ordered three thousand brown oxen to be killed. 4. The hides of the dead oxen were stripped off, and sewed to- gether in the shape of elephants. These were placed upon camels, and when the camels were drawn up in battle array, they looked pretty much like a troop of great brown elephants. Doubtless the king of the Indies Avondered where queen Semiramis had caught them. 5. When the battle was to be fought, the king of the Indies with his real elephants marched forward on one side, and queen Semira- mis, with her camels and ox-hides, came boldly against him on the other. 6. But when the Assyrian army had marched close to the host of the Indians, the latter perceived that there was no such thing as an elephant among them. They therefore laid aside all fear, and rushed furiously upon queen Semiramis and her soldiers. 7. The real elephants .put the camels to flight; and then, in a great rage, they ran about, tossing the Assyrians into the air, and trampling them down by hundreds. Thus the Assyrian army was routed, and the king of the Indies gained a complete victory. 8. Queen Semiramis was sorely wounded; but she got into a chariot, and drove away at full speed from the battle-field. She finally escaped to her own kingdom, but in a very sad condition. 9. She then took up her residence in the palace at Babylon. But she did not long enjoy herself in the beautiful gardens which she had suspended in the air. It is said that her own son, whose name was Ninias, put his mother to death, that he might get possession of the throne, and reign over the people. 10. Such was the melancholy end of the mighty queen Semiramis. How foolish and wicked it was for her to spend her life in trying to conquer other nations, instead of making her own people happy. But she had not learned that golden rule, "Do to another as you would have another do to you." CHAPTER XI.— ASIA CONTINUED. About Ninias. Reign of Sardanapalus, and Ruin of the Assyrian Empire. 1. After Ninias had wickedly murdered his mother, he became kinj of Assyria. His reign began about the year 2000, B. C, or about three hundred and fifty years after the deluge. 3. By what contrivance did Semiramis endeavor to match the elephants of the king of India ? 5. Describe the buttle. 7. What was the result of the baUle? 8. What of Sen i- ra.r.u: 0. What was her fate. ? Ch. XI.— I.Whatof Ninias? When did his .reign b« S i„? 24 SCHOOL HISTORY. 2. Ninias was not only a very wicked man, but a very slothful one He did not set out to conquer kingdoms like his mother, but shut himself up in his palace, and thought of nothing but how to enjoy himself. 3. He knew that his people hated him ; and therefore he kept guards in his palace ; but he was afraid to trust even his guards. Whether he was murdered at last, or whether he died quietly in his bed, is more than I can tell, for history does not inform us. 4. After the reign of Ninias, there was an interval of eight hundred years, during which it is impossible to say what happened in the kingdom of Assyria. It is probable that most of the kings were like Ninias, that they wasted their time in idle pleasures, and never did anything worthy of remembrance. 5. Some years afterwards, there was a king upon the throne of Assyria whose name was Sardanapalus. He is said to have been a beautiful young man ; but he was slothful, and took no care of his kingdom, and made no attempt to promote the welfare of his people. 6. He never went outside of his palace, but lived all the time among the women. And in order to make himself more fit for their company, he painted his face, and sometimes put on a woman's dress. In this ridiculous guise, the great king Sardanapalus used to sit down with the women, and help them to spin. 7. But while Sardanapalus was feasting, and dancing, and painting his face, and dressing himself like a woman, and helping the women to spin, a terrible destruction was impending over his head. 8. Arbaces, governor of the Medes, made war against this unworthy monarch, and besieged him in the city of Babylon. Sardanapalus saw that he could not escape, and that, if he lived any longer, he should probably become a slave. 9. So, rather than be a slave, he resolved to die. He therefore collected his treasures, and heaped them into one great pile in a splendid hall of his palace, and then set fire to the pile. The palace was speedily in a blaze, and Sardanapalus, with his favorite officers, and a multitude of beautiful women, were burnt to death in the flames. 10. Thus ended the First Assyrian Empire, the first that makes a figure in history. After a time, a new empire arose of which Nineveh was the capital. This is called the Second Assyrian Empire. The kings of this, made war on the Jews, and are often mentioned in the Bible. This was destroyed in the year 606, B. C. 2. What was his character ? What did he do ? 3. What else of Ninias ? i. What of Assyria for eight hundred years after Ninias? 5. What of Sardanapalus? 6. How did ho live? 8. What of Arbaces? 9. What did Sardanapalus do? 10. What was the end of the Assyrian empire ? Do you think it was right for Sardanapalus to live only for his own pleasure, and not try to make his people happy? Does not his story show that even a king •anjiot be idle without bringing destruction upon his people, and misery upon khnaelf ? THE HEBREWS. 25 CHAPTER XII.-ASIA CONTINUED. About the Hebrews or Jews. Origin of the Hebrews. The Removal of Jacob and his Children to Egypt. 1. The founder of the Hebrew nation was Abraham, the son o. Terah. He was born about two hundred years after the deluge. The country of his birth was Chaldea, which formed the southern part of the Assyrian empire. 2. The rest of the inhabitants of Chaldea were idolaters, and wor- shipped the sun, moon, and stars; but Abraham worshipped the true God whom we worship. In the early part of his liie he was a shepherd on the Chaldean plains. When his father was dead, God commanded him to leave his native country, and travel westward to the land of Canaan. 3. This region Avas afterwards called Palestine. It lies north of Arabia, is on the eastern border of the Mediterranean sea, and is nearly six thousand miles southeasterly from New York. It Avas a rich and fertile country ; and God promised Abraham, that his de- scendants should dwell there. 4. Many years of Abraham's life were spent in wandering to and fro. His wife Sarah went with him, and they were followed by a large number of male and female servants, and by numerous Hocks and herds. They dwelt in tents, and had no settled home. 5. Abraham and Sarah had one son, named Isaac. His father loved him fondly; but, when God commanded him to sacrifice the child, he prepared to obey. But an angel came down from heaven, and told him not to slay his son. 6. The life of Abraham was full of interesting events, but I have not room to relate them all here. He lived to be a hundred and seventy-five years old, and then died at Hebron, in Canaan. His burial-place was in a cave at Machpelah where Sarah had been buried, many years before. 7. The Jews and the Arabians are descended from this ancient pa- triarch. They have always called him Father Abraham. It is said, that to this day, they show the place where Abraham and Sarah lie buried, and that they consider it a holy spot. Many travellers at the present day go to see it. 8. Isaac, the son of Abraham, left two children, Esau and Jacob. Ch. XII. — 1 What of Abraham ? When was he born? How long ago? Ans. Nearly four thousand years. What was the native country of Abraham? '-i. What of the worship of the Chaldeans? Of Abraham? What of the early life of Abraham? What did God command Abraham to do ? Which way was Canaan from Chaldea? How far was Chal- dea fp'iu I naan? Ani. About five hundred miles. U. Where is the laud of Canaan? What is it new called ? Which way is it from where you live ? How would you go to the land of Canaan or Paleatine ? Ans. In a ship across the Atlantic Ocean and the Mediter- ranean Sea. 4. What of the life of Abraham ? Who went with him from Chaldea to Ca- naan ? 5. What of Isaac? 6. What else of Abraham : 7. What of the Jew* ' 3 What ol Isaac .' 26 SCHOOL HISTORY The younger, Jacob, persuaded his brother to sell his birthright for a mess of pottage. He likewise obtained a blessing, which his father intended to bestow on Esau. 9. Jacob had twelve sons, whose names were Reuben, Simeon, Levi, Dan, Juda, Naphthali, Gad, Ashur, Issachar, Zebulon, Joseph, ftnd Benjamin. The posterity of each of these twelve afterwards be- came a separate tribe among the Hebrews. 10. My young reader must look into the Bible for the beautiful sto- ry of Joseph and his brethren. I can merely tell him that Joseph was sold into captivity and carried into the land of Egypt, and that there he was the means of preserving his aged father and all his brothers from death by famine. He died 16o'5 B. C. 11. Jacob and his twelve children removed to Egypt, and took up their residence there. It was in that country, that the Hebrews first began to be a nation; so that their history may be said to commence from this period. Jacob died 1689 B. C. CHAPTER XIII.— ASIA CONTINUED. The Bondage in Egypt. Flight of the Hebrews, and Destruction of Pharaoh and his Host. The Pyramids, and a great Stone Head, called the Sphynx. 2. Egypt, you know, is in Africa. It has many cities, and a famous iiver called the Nile runs through the country. But this land is less S. What did Esau do? What is meant by birthright? Ans. The eldest son in ancient times enjoyed many privileges over his younger brothers. These Esau sold to Jacob for a single meal of victuals. Thus .Jacob became the head of the Jewish people. 9. Who were the twelve sons of Jacob ? What of the descendants of these twelve sons of Jacob ? 10. Can you tell the story of Joseph as related in Genesis, chap. .T7, &c? 11. When- did Jacob go wkh hij family? Which way was Egypt from Canaan? How for? Ans. About (wo hundred miles. THE HEBREWS. 07 populous now than in the time of Joseph. It was then lull of people, and they were the most learned and civilized of all the nations of the earth. There are many ruins to be seen in Egypt, which show that the palaces and cities of ancient times were very splendid. 2. But I must tell you of the Hebrews. Pharaoh, the good king of E?ypt, died, and Joseph likewise. Another king then ascended the throne, who hated the Hebrews, and did all in his power to oppress them. 3. The Egyptians treated them like slaves. All the hardest labor was performed by the Hebrews. It is thought by some writers, that .:he immense piles of stone, called the Pyramids, were built by them. These vast edifices are still standing on the banks of the Nile. 4. The cruel king of Egypt was named Pharaoh, like his predeces- sor. One of the most wicked injuries that he inliicted on the Hebrews was the following: — 5. He commanded that every male child should be thrown into the river jN'ile the instant he was born. The reason of this horrible cru- elty was, that the Hebrews might not become more numerous than the Egyptians, and conquer the whole country. 6. One of the Hebrew women, however, could not make up her mind to throw her son into the Kile. If she had positively disobeyed the kind's order, she would have been put to death. She therefore very privately made a little ark or boat of bulrushes, placed the child in it, and laid it among the flags that grew by the river's side. 7. In a little while the king's daughter came down to the river to bathe. Perceiving the ark of bulrushes, she went with her maids to fetch it. When they looked into it, they found a little Hebrew boy there ! 8. The heart of the princess was moved with compassion, and she resolved to save his life. She hired his own mother to nurse him. She gave him the name of Moses, and, when he grew old enough to be put to school, she caused him to be instructed in all the learning of the Egyptians. At that period they were the most learned people on earth. 9. But, though he himself was so well treated, Moses did not for- get the sufferings of the other Hebrews. He remembered that they were his brethren, and he resolved to rescue them from their oppres- sors. 10. He and his brother Aaron received power from God to perform many wonderful things, in order to induce Pharaoh to let the He- brews depart out of Egypt. Ten great plagues were inflicted on the Egyptians; and these were so terrible, that at last Pharaoh gave the Hebrews leave to go. Cm. XIII. — 1. What of Egypt? Which way docs it lie from you? How far is it from New-York to .Egypt? Am Nearly six thousand miles. Which way doe; the Nile (low? In which ■•! the lour quarter* of the globe i> Egypt .' In which part of Africa is Egypt ? What of Egypt in the time of Joseph ? 2. How were the Hebrews treated after the death of Joseph r What of the pyramids? How high i« the tallest of the Egyptian pyramids? Ads. About five hundred feet? 4. What cruelty 'li'l Pharaoh iuflicl upi n the Hebrews' G. What did one of the Hebrew women do ? 7. What of 1'haroah's daughter ? 8. What of Moses: 9. What did he resolve to do ? 10. What of Moses aud Aaron ? To what did Pharaoh consent? 28 SCHOOL HISTORY. 11. But scarcely were they gone, when the King was sorry that he had not still kept them in Egypt, that he might oppress them, and compel them to labor for him as before. He therefore mustered his warriors, and rode swiftly after the fugitives. 12. When he came in sight of them, they were crossing the Red Sea, which lies between Egypt and Arabia. The Lord had caused the waters to roll back, and form a wall on each side. Thus there was a path of glistening sand for the Hebrews through the very depths of the sea. 13. Pharaoh and his army rode onward, and by the time that the fugitives had reached the opposite shore, the Egyptians were in the midst of this wonderful passage. 14. As the Hebrews fled, they looked behind them. There was the proud array of the Egyptian king, with his chariots and horse- men, and all his innumerable army, and Pharaoh himself riding haughtily in the midst. 15. The affrighted Hebrews looked behind them again, and, lo ! the two walls of water had rolled together. They were dashing against the chariots, and sweeping the soldiers off their feet. The waves were crested with foam, and came roaring against the proud and wicked king. In a little time the sea rolled calmly over Pharaoh and his host, and thus they all perished, leaving the Jews to proceed on their journey. 16. This was a terrible event, but Pharaoh had been very cruel ; he therefore deserved his fate. This story may teach us, that not only wicked rulers, but those who follow them, have reason to fear the judgments of. Heaven* CHAPTER XIV.— ASIA CONTINUED. About the Wanderings of the Israelites in the Wilder- ness. 1. It was now two hundred and fifteen years since Jacob had come to settle in Egypt. His descendants had multiplied so rapidly, that, at the time of their departure, the Hebrew nation are supposed to have amounted to at least two millions of people. Moses, their lea- i der, was eighty years old, but his step was steady ; and, though of meek and humble manners, he was a man of great wisdom and firm- ness of character. 11. Did he change his mind? What did he do ? WTiieh way was the Red Sea from Egypt- 3 !-■ What miracle did God perform? How did the Hebrews cross the Red Sear 15. What became of Pharaoh and his army' 1 Ch. XIV. — 1. How long was it from the time Jacob settled in Egypt to the oepartu.'e of the Israelites? Wbat was the number of the Israelites at this time? How old wa9 Moses? What was his charac- ter! 1 THE HEBREWS. 29 2. The Hebrews intended to go directly from Egypt to the land of Canaan. This latter country is now called Palestine. Before reach- ing it the children of Israel were to pass through a part of Arabia. Killing Quails in the Wilderness. 3. In order that they might not go astray, a vast pillar of mist, or cloud, moved before them all day long; and at night the pillar of cloud was changed to a pillar of lire, which threw a radiance over the regions through which they journeyed. 4. The country was desolate and barren, and often destitute of wa- ter, but the Lord fed the people with manna and with quails; and when they were thirsty, Moses smote upon a rock, and the water gushed out abundantly. This was a great relief, for the climate there Avas exceedingly hot. Beside all this, the Hebrews received divine assistance against the Amalekites, and were enabled to conquer them in battle. 5. But, in spite of these various mercies, the Israelites were an un- grateful and rebellious people. They often turned from the worship of the true God, and became idolaters. 6. At the very time when the Lord was revealing himself to Moses on the summit of Mount Sinai, the people compelled Aaron to make a golden calf. They worshipped this poor image instead of Jehovah, who had brought them out of Egvpt. 7. On account of their numerous sins the Lord often inflicted severe punishments upon them. Many were slain by pestilence, and some 2. In which direction is Canaan from Egypt? What country lies between Canaan and Egvpt .' In what country did the Hebrews wander? 3. IIow were the Hebrews guided? 4. What jor t „f country did they travel through ? IIow were they fed ? When they could find no spring or river, how were they supplied with water ? Why was this supply of wa- ter necessary ' What other divine assistance was rendered to the Hebrews' 5. Were the Hebrews grateful for all the mercies bestowed upon them i G. What did they do when Moses was on Mount Sinai ' Were not the Hebrews very foolish and wicked to worship the iuiagu of a calf rather than to worship God? When children disobey their parents ind *cek their own pleasure, rather than do their duty, are they noi like the Hebrews iu tlis instance ? 7. What cviJ resulted from th" disobedience of the Hebrewa : JJo you not 30 SCHOOL HISTORY. were swallowed up in the earth. The remainder were compelled tc wander forty years in the deserts of Arabia, though the whole dis- tance in a direct line from Egypt to Canaan was but two hundred and fifty miles. 8. Before they came to the land of Canaan, most of those who had fled out of Egypt were dead. Their children inherited the promised land, but they themselves were buried in the sands of the desert. Even Moses was permitted merely to gaze at the land of Canaan from the top of Mount Pisgah. Here he died, at the age of one hun- dred and twenty years. 9. After the death of Moses, Joshua, the son of Nun, became lea- der of the Israelites. Under his guidance they entered the promised land, and subdued the people who inhabited it. The territory of Canaan was then divided among the twelve tribes of Israel. CHAPTER XV.-ASIA CONTINUED. Overthrow of the Midianites. Samson, Judge of Israel. 1. After their settlement in Canaan the Israelites lived under the authority of judges. These were their rulers in time of peace, and their generals in war. Some of them were very remarkable person- ages, and did many things worthy of remembrance. 2. The name of one of the judges was Gideon. While he ruled Israel, an army of Midianites invaded the country, and oppressed the people for seven years. But the Lord instructed Gideon how to res- cue the Israelites from their power. 3. Gideon chose three hundred men, and caused each of them to take an earthen pitcher, and put a lamp within it. With this small band he entered the camp of the Midianites by night. There was an immense army of them, sleeping in their tents, Avithout apprehend- ing any danger from the conquered Israelites. 4. But their destruction was at hand. Gideon gave a signal, and all his three hundred men broke their pitchers, at the same time blow- ing a loud blast upon trumpets Avhich they had brought. This terri- ble clamor startled the Midianites from their sleep. 5. Amid the clangor of the trumpets they heard the Israelites shouting, "The sword of the Lord and of Gideon." A great panic seized upon the Midianites. They doubtless imagined that all the Hebrew army had broken into their camp. 6. Each man mistook his neighbor for an enemy; so that more of know that evil always follows disobedience ? How long did the Hebrews wander ? What is the distance in a straight line from Egypt to Canaan ? S. Did most of the Hebrews ivlio left Egypt reach Canaan ? What of Moses ? Where is Mount Pisgah .' 9. Who became leader after the death of Moses : How was the land of Canaan divided? Ch. XV. — l. How were the Hebrews governed after their settlement in Canaan? What of the Judges ? 1. What of Gideon. 3. Tell how Gideon contrived to overcome the Midianites? THE HEBREWS. Map of Palestine. 31 3C ANCIENT PALESTINE sxiu-A- i? i\.or Jan. *& ?«*. v fr/i GATJXOXlTIiyftV 6 / siJ .lMolwnais^ ^=Uci, t V:, ,Wa „i- Galilee 2%j Ja^reeV •...-■ ■ S ALMA^l I_ 4 ( ^•--•^•^ ^i ^p1tr j»j^g gr: .. rii i, y « A.. : '::.?.- 1 .J.x../-^.j{cika-. "'t ^ Ariinathca Asc.;i\ 1W, I \ llelfl on ^^i^ JJetrsJicha ^ , " Z>e*« rV->; ^e- .'l T> r.im. K.ii.st from (iri-rnwirl flap The teacher will put such questions here as he deems necessary. 32 SCHOOL HISTORY, the Midianites were slain by their own swords, than by the swords of the men of Israel. Thus God wrought a great deliveiance for his people. 7. The most famous of all the judges of Israel was named Samson. He was the strongest man in the world ; and it was a wonderful cir- cumstance, that his great strength depended upon the hair of his head. 8. While he continued to wear his hair long, and curling down Lis neck, he had more strength than a hundred men put together. Hut if his hair were to be cut off, he would be no stronger than any single man. 9. In the days of Samson, the Philistines had conquered the Is- raelites. Samson disliked them on account of the injuries which they inflicted upon his countrymen. He made use of his great strength to do them all the harm in his power. CHAPTER XVI.— ASIA CONTINUED. Samson's Exploits and Death. 1. On one occasion Samson slew a thousand of the Philistines, although he had no better weapon than the jaw-bone of an ass. A another time, when they had shut him up in the city of Gaza, he took the gates of the city upon his shoulders, and carried them to the top of a distant hill. 7. What of Samson? In what did his strength lie ? 9. What of the Philistines ? Why did Samsou dislike them? Ch. XVI — 1. With what weapon did Samson kill a thousand Philistines ? What of the gates of Gaza > THE HEBREWS. 33 2. But, though Samson hated the Philistines, and was always doing them mischief, there was a woman among them whom he loved. Her name was,Delilah. She pretended to love Samson in return; but her only object was to ruin him. 3. This woman used many persuasioos to induce Samson to tell her what it was that made him so much stronger than other men. At first Samson deceived her. He said, that if he were bound with seven green withs, his strength would depart ; or that, if he were tied with new ropes, he should be as weak as an ordinary man. 4. So Delilah bound him first with seven green withs, and after- wards with new ropes. But Samson snapped the withs like burnt tow, and the ropes like thread. At length, however, Delilah pre- vailed upon him to tell her the real cause of his great strength. 5. When she had found out the secret, she cut off the hair of his head while he was sleeping, and then delivered him to her country- men, the Philistines. These put out his eyes, and bound him with fetters of brass, and he was forced to labor like a brute beast in the prison. 6. Samson was able to work very hard ; for pretty soon his hair began to grow, and so his wonderful vigor returned. Thus he became the strongest man in the world again. 7. One day the Philistines were offering a great sacrifice to their idol, whose name was Dagon. They feasted, and their hearts were merry. When their mirth was at its height, they sent for poor blind Samson, that he might amuse them by showing specimens of his wonderful strength. 8. Samson was accordingly brought from prison and led into Dagon's temple. His brazen fetters clanked at every step. He was a woful object with his blinded eyes. But his hair had grown again, and was curling upon his brawny shoulders. 9. When Samson had done many wonderful feats of strength, he asked leave to rest himself against the two main pillars of the tem- ple. The floor and galleries were all crowded with Philistines. They gazed upon this man of mighty strength, and they triumphed and rejoiced, because they imagined he could do them no more harm. 10. But while they gazed, the strong man threw his arms round the two pillars of the temple. The edifice trembled as with an earthquake. Then Samson bowed himself with all his might, and down came the temple with a crash like thunder, overwhelming the whole multitude of the Philistines in its ruins. 11. Samson was likewise crushed, but in his death it appears that he triumphed over his enemies, and lay buried beneath the dead bodies of lords and mighty men. 2. What o' Delilah? 3. How did Samson deceive heft? 5. How did Delilah deprive Simson of hi I strength? What did the Philistine! do to Samson? 6. What happened When Samson's hair grew again? 7. Tell how Samson destroyed the Philistine temple. 34 SCHOOL HISTORY. CHAPTER XVII.-ASIA CONTINUED. Beginning of the Meig?i of Saul. 1. Many other judges ruled over Israel, in the space of about foul hundred years from the time that Moses led the Hebrews out of Egypt. But at length they became dissatisfied with this mode of government, and demanded' that a king should be placed over them. 2. Samuel was then the judge of Israel. He was an old man, and a wise one; and, besides the wisdom that he had collected in the course of a long life, he" possessed wisdom from on high. 3. When the people demanded a king, Samuel endeavored to con- vince them, that they were much better off without one. He de- scribed the tyrannical acts which kings have always been in the habit of committing, whenever they have had the power to do so. 4. But the Israelites would not hearken to this wise and good old" man. They still wished for a king. They imagined that none but a king would govern them well hi time of peace, or fight success- fully against their enemies in war. 5. Samuel therefore consulted the Lord, and was directed to find out a king for the Israelites. The person who was fixed upon was a young man named Saul, the son of Kish. He possessed great beauty, and was a head taller than any other man among the Israel- ites. Samuel anointed his head with oil, and gave him to the Israelites as their king. 6. For a considerable time king Saul behaved like a wise and righteous monarch. But at length he began to disobey the Lord, and seldom took the advice of Samuel, although that good old priest would have been willing to direct him in every action of his life. 7. In the course of Saul's reign, the Israelites were often at war with the neighboring nations. At one time, when the Philistines had invaded the country, there was a great giant in their host, whose name Avas Goliath, of Gath. S. He was at least ten or twelve feet high, and was clothed from head to foot in brazen armor. He carried an enormous spear, the iron head of which weighed as many as thirty pounds. 9. Every day did this frightful giant stride forth from the camp of the Philistines, and defy the Israelites to produce a champion who would stand against him in single combat. But, instead of doing this, the whole host of Israel stood aloof from him, as a flock of shucp fr( m a lion. Ch. XVII. — 1. For how long a time were the Hebrews governed by judg«s ? 2. Whal of Samuel? 3. What did he do when the people demanded a king? 4. What did the Israelites think ? 5. What of Saul ? (j. What did Saul do? 7. What of Goliath ? THE HEBREWS. 35 CHAPTER XVIII.— ASIA CONTINUED. Combat of David and Goliath. 1. At last a young shepherd, by the name of David, happened to come to the camp of the Israelites, and heard the terrible voice of Goliath as he thundered forth his challenge. 2 Young as he was, David had already slain a lion and a hear; and, with the help of the Lord, he thougnt himself able to slay this gigantic Philistine. He therefore obtained # leave of king Saul to accept the challenge. 3. But, instead of wearing the king's armor, which Saul would willingly have lent him, David went to the battle in his shepherd's garb. He did not even buckle on a sword. 4. When the two combatants came into the field, there was the youthful David on the side of the Israelites, with a staff in one hand, and a sling in the other, carrying five smooth stones in a shepherd's scrip or pouch. ->. 5. On the side of the Philistines, forth strode the mighty Goliath. He glistened in his brazen armor, and brandished his great iron- headed spear till it quivered like a reed. When the giant spoke, his voice growled almost like thunder rolling overhead. 6. He looked scornfully at David, and hardly thought it worth his while to lift up his spear against him. " Come hither," quoth the giant, "and I will feed the fowls with your flesh !" 7. But little David was not at all abashed. He made a bold an- swer, and told Goliath that he would cut off his head, and give his enormous carcass to the beasts of the field. This threat so enraged the giant, that he put himself in motion to slay David. 8. The young man ran forward to meet Goliath, and, as he ran, he took a smooth stone from his scrip, and placed it in his sling. When at a proper distance, he whirled the sling, and let drive the stone. It went Avhizzing through the air, and hit Goliath right in the centre of the forehead. 9. The stone penetrated to the brain; and down the giant fell at full length upon the field, with his brazen armor clanging around him. David then cut off Goliath's head with his own sword. The Philistines were affrighted at their champion's overthrow, and fled. 10. The men of Israel pursued them, and made a prodigious slaugh- ter. David returned from the battle carrying the grim and grisly head of Goliath by the hair. The Hebrew women came forth to meet him, danced around him, and sung triumphant anthems in his praise. Ch. XVIII — 1. Who was David? What rth-west. PERSIA. 47 4. You may well believe, that a king, who could collect so large an army, had great wealth and power. At this time the Persian empire was of vast extent, but still Xerxes wished to conquer other nations. His capital was Persepolis, one of the most splendid cities that ever existed. 5. Here Xerxes had magnificent palaces ; he had gold and silver in abundance, he had precious stones more than he could count; he was indeed surrounded with pomp and magnificence ; but all these could not bring contentment. He was still desirous of conquering other nations; and for this purpose he collected the greatest army of which history gives us any account. 6. When Xerxes arrived in Greece, it so happened that a great mountain, called Mount Athos, stood directly in the way that he wished his ships to sail. He therefore wrote a letter to the moun- tain, commanding it to get out of his way; but Mount Athos would not stir one step. 7. In order to bring his land-forces from Asia into Greece, Xerxes built a bridge of boats across a part of the sea called the Hellespont. But the waves broke the bridge to pieces, and Xerxes commanded the sea to be whipped for its disrespectful conduct. 8. The greater part of the cities of Greece submitted to Xerxes; but Sparta and Athens made a stubborn resistance. Though they could muster but few soldiers, these were far more valiant than the Persians. 9. At Thermopylae, Xerxes wished to lead his army through a narrow passage between a mountain and the sea. Leonidas, king of Spana, opposed him with six thousand men. Seventy thousand Persians were slaiR in the attempt to break through the pass. 10. At last, Leonidas found that the Persians would not be kept back, any longer. He therefore sent away all but three hundred men, and with these he remained at the pass of Thermopylae. The im- mense host of the Persians came onward like a flood ; and only one suldier of the three hundred escaped to Sparta to tell that the rest were slain. 11. But Xerxes did not long continue to triumph in Greece. His fleet was defeated at Salamis, and his army at Platsoa. In escaping, he was forced to cross the Hellespont in a little fishing-vessel ; lor the sea, in spite of its being whipped, had again broken his bridge of boats. 12. Not long after his return to Persia, the proud Xerxes was murdered in his bed. This event happened about the year 465 before Christ. His son, Artaxerxes, made peace with the Greeks. 13. The story of Xerxes may teacli us the folly of ambition. Had he been content with staying at home and governing his people so 4. What of the Persian empire in the time of Xerxes? What of Persepolis ? In which direction was it from Babylon ? Jerusalem? 5. What of -the wealth and magnificence of Xerxes? What was the greatest army ever known ?, G. What of Mount Athos? 7. What of i hi; Hellespont ? 8. What of Greece ? 9. What of Thermopylae? 10. What of Leoni- das? 11. What of Salamis? Plalaea? How did Xerxes return ? 12. Death of Xerxes? When did this event happen ? Who succeeded Xerxes? 13. What may the story of Xi rxei teach us? How might he have been happy? 4S SCHOOL HISTORY. as to make them happy, he might have been happy himself. But, having too much, he still strove to acquire more, and thus brought misery upon himself and millions of his fellow-men. 14. Let us be content in more humble situations, for we see that happiness is not always associated with Avealth and power. Let us remember, too, that pride and vanity made even Xerxes ridiculous with all his magnificence. CHAPTER XXVIL— ASIA CONTINUED. Affairs of Persia till the Saracen Conquest. 1. Between one and two centuries after the death of Xerxes, that is, about 330 years before Christ, Persia was invaded by Alexander the Great, king of Macedon. Darius the Third was then king of Persia. Being defeated by Alexander, two of his own subjects bound him with golden chains, and put him in a covered cart. 2. They intended to murder Darius, and get possession of the king- dom. But Alexander came suddenly upon the conspirators, and forced them to take flight. As they rode away, they discharged their darts at Darius, and slew him. 3. After this time, Persia became subject to the Parthians, whose country had formerly been a province of the Persian empire. It con- tinued under the government of the Parthian kings nearly five hun- dred years. About the year 230 after the Christian era, a Persian, named Artaxerxes, excited a rebellion and made himself king. 4. His descendants occupied the throne for many generations. Cne of the most distinguished was Chosroes the Great, who lived about six hundred years after Christ. He made war against the Ro- mans, and ravaged their provinces in Asia. 5. One of his successors was likewise named Chosroes. This hateful monster caused his own father to be beaten to death. But Heaven punished him by the wickedness of his eldest son, whose name was Siroes. He dethroned his father, and murdered all his brothers in his presence. 6. Siroes then ordered his father to be thrown into a dungeon. Here, instead of killing the old king at once, he tormented him for a long time by pricking him with the points of arrows ! Chosroes died at last, in great agony. How did lie bring misery upon himself and others? 14. Why should we be content? What should we remember? Ch. XXVII. — 1. When was Persia invaded by Ale .ander the Great ? Who was then king of Persia ? What happened to Darius ? 2. How was he killed? 3. To whom did Persia become subject after the death of Darius? How long did it oontinue under the government of Parthia ? Which way is Parthia from Persia ? When did Artaxerxes make himself king? 4. What of his descendants? Chosroes the Great' When did he live? What did he do? 5. What of the successor of Chosroes the Great? Wliai wickedness did Siroes commit? PERSIA. 49 7. These things may seem too shocking to tell; but it is perhaps necessary, that my young readers should know how very cruel men may become when given up to the influence of passion. Let us be thankful that the religion of Christ has taught us to look upon such crimes as were often practised by the Persian kings with horror and disgust. S. Isdigertes, who ascended the throne in the year 630 of the Chris- tian era, was the last of this dynasty of Persian kings. During his ieign, the Saracens, a warlike people of Arabia, invaded Persia, and conquered it. Isdigertes Avas killed in battle. 9. Persia then became a "part of the Saracen empire. It was ruled by the caliphs who resided at Bagdad, a splendid city which they built on the river Tigris. 10. This celebrated place was founded in 672, and once contained 'two millions of inhabitants. It was then filled with costly buildings, but it is now in ruins. The modern city is poorly built, and compar- atively insignificant. CHAPTER XXVIII.— ASIA CONTINUED. Modem History of Persia. 1. In the year 1258 of the Christian era, the empire of the Sara- cens was subverted by the Tartars. Persia was governed by them for a considerable time. It was afterwards ruled by monarchs called Sophis, or Shahs. The first of these was named Ismael, a man of Saracen descent. He took possession of the throne by violence, and reigned twenty-three years. 2. The greatest of these monarchs was named Shah Abbas. He ascended the throne in 15S9. Abbas fought against the Turks, and gained many splendid victories. He also deprived the Portuguese of their possessions in the East. 3. But the best of all the kings of this family was Shah Husseyn; and he was also the last, and most unfortunate. He began to reign in the year 1694. Husseyn and his subjects met with many disasters; and he was, at length, compelled to surrender his throne to a rival. 4. But before he took off the crown from his head, Huyssen went on fuot through the principal streets of Ispahan, which was then the capital. The people thronged around him with tears and lamenta 7. How may men become very cruel ? For what should we he thankful ? 8. When i!i. I Isdigertes ascend the throne ? What of him? What did the Saracens do during his p-ign.' How was Isdigertes killed ? 9. Of what empire did Persia become a part? How was it ruled? Where did the caliphs live ? 10. What of Bagdad ? Cm. XXVIII.— 1. What of the empire of the Saracens in the year 1258 ? How was Persia, governed ? Whaf of Ismael ? '2. Who was Shah Abbas? When did he ascend the throne? What did he d.i? 3. What of Shah Husseyn? 4. Describe the manner in which he surrendered his crowu- 50 ' S C H- O'L HISTORY tions. The excellent and kind-hearted monarch endeavored to eoiw fort them. 5. He told them that the new king, whose name was Mahmoud, would not love them better than he himself had, but that he would know better how to govern them, and how to conquer their enemies. So the good Husseyn took off his crown, which had been only a a trouble to him, and bade his people farewell. 6. In 1730, Kouli Khan took possession of the throne of Persia. He called himself Nadir Shah. He was a famous' conqueror and tyrant, and was assassinated in his tent after a reign of about seventeen years. 7. Since his death, there has been much bloodshed id" Persia. Ambitious men have often aspired to the throne, and involved the country in civil war. The late sovereign was better than most of his predecessors; the present king is named Mohammed, and he bears the title of Shah. S. The king generally resides in the city of Teheran. But he has a beautiful palace at Ispahan, called the Palace of Forty Pillars. Each of the forty pillars is supported by four lions, of white marble. The whole edifice looks as if it were built of pearl, and silver, and gold, and precious stones. 9. I have now done with the story of Persia. Like that of most other eastern countries, it abounds in tales of cruelty, battle, and bloodshed. In ancient times, the people worshipped the sun, and bowed down to idols. But, for more than a thousand years, they have been believers in a false prophet, called Mahomet. 10. They have never become acquainted with the religion of Jesus Christ, which teaches us to be gentle and forgiving one to another; and thus cruelty has ever been common among them. 11. The climate of Persia is mild, and the country abounds in beau- tiful and fragrant trees, shrubs, and flowers. The people are less warlike than in former times. The rich live in splendid palaces, and the poor in mud huts. The kingdom is small, compared with the vast empire of Xerxes. Persepolis, the ancient capital, is now a heap of ruins. Teheran and Ispahan, the two principal cities, are of com- paratively modern date. 12. From what I have told you, you will not like the Persian char- acter; yet it is not altogether bad. The people are very fond of read- ing, and telling instructive stories ; many of these were written ages since, and are exceedingly beautiful. The people also have a taste for poetry, and they appear to be fond of the beauties of nature, and to have a love of virtue. 6; When did Kouli Khan come to the throne? What other name had he? What of him ? 7. What of Persia since the death of Kouli Khan ? What is said of the present ruler? 8. Where does he reside? Describe the palace of the emperor. 9. What of the story of Persia? What was the worship of the ancient Persians? What is now the re- ligion of the people? 10. What has always been common among them? II. What of the climate of Persia? The soil? People? Plow does the extent of the country can- pare with what it was in the time of Xerxes ' What of Persepolis? Teheran ? Ispahan ? 12. What of the Persian character? PERSIA. 51 CHAPTER XXIX.— ASIA CONTINUED. Early History of China. 1. The territory of the Chinese empire is nearly the same at the present day that it has been from the earliest records. It is bounded on he north by Asiatic Russia, on the east by the Pacific Ocean, and on the south by the Chinese Sea and Farther India. On the west, there are mountains and sandy deserts, which divide it from Thibet and Tartary. 2. This empire is very ancient, and has continued longer than any other that has ever existed. Its history goes back four thousand years from the present time. The name of its founder was Fohi, whom some writers suppose to have been the same as Noah. 3. There have been twenty- two dynasties, or separate familes of emperors, who have successively ruled over China. If their history were to be particularly related, it would fill at least twenty-two great books. Yet few of the emperors did any thing that was worthy of remembrance. 4. Before the time of Fohi, the Chinese believe that men liveo pretty much like brutes; that they had no settled homes, but wan- dered up and down in the forests, seeking for food; and when they caught anv animals or birds, that they drank the blood, and devoured even the hair and feathers. Ch. XXIX. — 1. What of the Chinese empire? Boundaries? What divides it from Thibet and Tartary? Which way is China from Persia? Hindustan? Siberia? The Uirman Empire ? 2. What of the antiquity and duration of the Chinese empire ? How far back does its history extend ? Who was its founder ? What do some writers suppose ? 3. What of the dynasties or families that have ruled over China? 4. What do the Lhintso •uppo«e was the state of China before the time of Fohi ? 52 SCHOOL HISTORY. 5. We find nothing very remarkable about the Chinese emperora till the reign of Chaus, who lived about a thousand years before the Christian era. He was extremely fond of hunting, and used to gal- lop into the midst of the rice-fields in pursuit of game. In this man- ner he did so much mischief, that his subjects resolved to destroy him. 6. There was a large river, which the emperor was often in the habit of crossing. On the shore of this river the people placed a boat, as if for the accommodation of Chaus. The next time that the emperor returned from hunting, he and his attendants got on board the boat, and set sail for the opposite shore. 7. But the boat had been contrived on purpose for his destruction. In the middle of the river it fell to pieces, and all on board were drowned. Thus to the great joy of his subjects, the emperoi 4 Chaus went down among the fishes, and never again came a-hunting in the rice-fields. 8. The emperor Ching, who reigned about two thousand years ago, built a great wall, in order to protect his dominions against the Tar- tars. It was forty-five feet high, and eighteen feet thick, and it ex- tended over mountains and valleys, a distance of fifteen hundred miles. This wall still remains. 9. When Chins: had completed the Avail, he thought himself so very great an emperor, that none of his predecessors were worth remembering. He therefore ordered all the historical writings and public records to be burnt. He also caused four hundred learned men, who were addicted to writing histories, to be buried alive. 10. If the emperor Ching could have caught poor old Peter Parley, he certainly would have buried him likewise, with his four hundred learned brethren; and so the world would have lost this Universal History ! CHAPTER XXX.— ASIA CONTINUED. Anecdotes of the Chinese Emperors. 1. The emperor Vati lived about the time of the Christian era. This emperor was desirous of reigning till the world should come to an end, and perhaps longer. He therefore spent his time in endeav- oring to brew a liquor that would make him immortal. But, unfor tunately, before the liquor was fit to drink, the emperor died. 2. Another emperor instead of attending to the affairs of the nation applied himself Avholly to study. His prime minister took advantage of his negligence, and raised a rebellion against him. When the 5. When did Chaus live ? What of him ? 6. Relate the manner in which the people destroyed him. 8. When did the emperor Ching live? Describe the great wall. Doea it still remain ? 9. What orders did he give respecting historical books, records, and learned men? Ch. XXX.— 1. What of the emperor Vati? How did he spend hu time? 2. Tell the story of a very learned emperor. CHINA 53 emperor heard the shouts of the rebels, he shut his hook, and put on his armor. But, on ascending the ramparts of the city, he saw that it was too late to resist. He then returned to his library, which con- tained one hundred and forty thousand volumes. 3. The emperor knew that these, books had been the means of his losing the vast empire of China, by withdrawing his attention from the government. He therefore set fire to them with his own hands, and the whole library was consumed. The rebels afterwards put him to death. 4. The emperor Si-given began to reign in the year 617 after the Christian era. He dwelt in a magnificent palace. After the empe- ror's death, his son came to the palace, and was astonished at its splendor and beauty. " Such a residence is good for nothing but to corrupt a monarch, and render him proud," exclaimed he. Accord- ingly he commanded this great and costly edifice to be burnt to the ground. 5. Chwang-tsong who had been a brave soldier, was made emperor about eight hundred years ago. He was a person of very frugal habits. It was one of his singularities, that he never slept in a bed, but always on the bare ground, with a bell fastened to his neck. If he turned over in his sleep, the ringing of the bell would awaken him ; and he then considered it time to get up. 6. In the year 1209, Genius Khan invaded China with an immense army of Tartars. He and his descendants conquered the whole em- pire, and governed it during many years. 7. The emperor Ching-tsa ascended the throne three or four cen- turies ago. A mine was discovered during his reign, and precious stones of great value were dug out of it. Some of them were brought to the emperor, but he looked scornfully at them. S. " Do you call these precious stones?" cried he. "What are ihey good for ? They can neither clothe the people, nor satisfy their hunger." So saying, he ordered the mine to be closed up, and the miners to be employed in some more useful kind of labor. 9. About a hundred years ago, in the reign of Yong-tch ; ng, there was the most terrible earthquake that had ever been known. It shook down nearly all the houses in the city of Pekin, and bured one hundred thousand people. A still greater number perished in the surrounding country. 10. Nothing very remarkable has lately happened in the histo-y of China, except that in ]84U the English government sent an expedition against them, which took Canton, and several other places. The war continued till LS42, when peace was made. We may also add that a revolution began in 1852, which threatens to overturn the present dynasty. •I. When did Si-given begin to reign ? Where «J i w is it bounded? 3. How hare tne Aral>« always lived! What of their early history? When and where was Mahomet born? 4. Of what profession was Mahomet? 56 SCHOOL HISTORY. dwelling was a lonesome cave, where he pretended to be employed in prayer and meditation. When he was forty years old, he set uj> for a prophet. Pilgrims of Arabia, going to the tomb of Mahomet. 5. He publicly proclaimed, that God had sent him to convert the world to a new religion. The people of Mecca would not at first believe Mahomet. He was bom among them, and they knew that he had been a camel-driver, and was no holier than themselves. Beside, he pretended that he had ridden up to heaven on an ass. in company with the angel Gabriel; and many of his stories were as ridiculous as this. 6. So the men of Mecca threatened to slay Mahomet, and he was therefore forced to flee to Medina, another city of Arabia. There, in the course of two or three years, he made a great number of con- verts. Pie told his disciples that they must compel others to adopt his religion by force, if they refused to do so by fair means. 7. This conduct brought on a war between the disciples of Ma- homet and all the other Arabians. Mahomet won many victories, and soon made himself master of the whole country, and of Syria besides. 8. Mahomet was now not only a pretended prophet, but a rea£ king. He was a very terrible man, even to his oavii followers ; for whenever he was angry, a vein between his eyebrows used to swell and turn black. This gave him a grim and frightful aspect. 9. His power continued to increase; but he died suddenly, at the How did he live before lie was forty years old? 5. Wliat did he then do ? What of the neoplo of Mecca ? What did Mahomet pretend ? 6. Why did Mahomet flee to Medina? What was the flight of Mahomet called by the Arabs? What means did he take to make converts in Medina ? 7. What was the effect of Ibis conduct? What victories did Maho ■net win ? &. Describe Mahomet. 0. When did he die ? SARACENS. 57 age of sixty-three. He was buried at Medina. It is said, that his cothn may be seen there in a mosque to this day,' and that it is sus- pended in the air by a loadstone. "Many pilgrims go every year to visit the place. The Flight of Mahomet, called the Hcgira. 10. The religion of Mahomet was diffused over nearly all Asia and Africa, and is still believed by many millions of people. Its precepts are contained in a book called the Koran. Mahomet affirmed that the angel Gabriel brought him the doctrines contained in this book from heaven. CHAPTER XXXIIL— ASIA CONTINUED. Sequel of the History of the Saracens. 1. Those of the Arabians who followed Mahomet were called Sar- acens. After their leader's death, they conquered the whole of Tur- key in Asia, and many other countries. The capital of their empire was the city of Bagdad, on the river Tigris, which I have already mentioned. 2. One of the successors of Mahomet was Ali, his son-in-law. He was opposed by Ayesha, Mahomet's widow. This woman was sus- pected of having murdered her husband. 3. She raised an army, and led them to battle against Ali. During the conflict, Ayesha sat in a sort of a cage or litter, on the back of a camel. The camel's rein was held by one of her soldiers; and it is said that seventy soldiers were killed, one after another, while hold- Where was he tinned? What is said of his coffin ? 10. Where is the the religion of Mahomet followed.' What is the Koran? What' did Mahomet affirm ? AVI, ere is Mec- ca ? Medina? Ch. XXXIII. — I . Who were the Saracens ? What of them? What was Hi'- capital of their empire ? Who was Ali? Who opposed him? Who was Ayesha? Describe the conllict between Ali and Ayesha ? Who was victorious ? 58 SCHOOL HISTORY. ing the rein. Finally, Ali was victorious, and confirmed his sway over all the disciples of Mahomet, and over the countries which they had won. , . 4. The Saracen empire was thus established. The kings were called Caliphs. They reigned at Bagdad for the space of six hundred and twenty years. One of the most distinguished of them was iVkih- mud Gazui. He was a great conqueror, and added a part of India to his dominions. 5. A poor man once complained to Mahmud Gazui that a p soldier had turned him and his family out of doors, and had kept possession of his house all night. When the caliph, Mahmud Gazui, heard this, he suspected that the soldier was his own son. "If he ill-treats you again, let me know," said he. 6. Accordingly, a few nights afterwards, the poor man told the ca- liph that the same soldier had turned him out of his house again. The caliph took his cimeter and went to the house; but before enter- ing, he caused all the lights to be extinguished, so that his heart might not be softened by the sight of the offender. 7. When all was darkness, he entered the house, and struck the soldier dead with his cimeter. " Now bring a light," cried the caliph. His attendants did so. Mahmud Gazui held a torch over the bloody corpse of the soldier, and iound that his suspicions were correct. He had killed his own son ! 8. The last of the caliphs was named Mostasem. He was so proud and vainglorious that he considered his subjects unworthy to behold his face. He therefore never appeared in public without wearing a veil of golden tissue. Whenever he rode through the streets, thou- sands would flock to get a glimpse of his golden veil. 9. But at length Hulaki, chief of the Tartars, took the city of Bag- dad. He stripped off the golden veil of the caliph Mostasem, and put him alive into a leathern bag. The bag, with the poor caliph in it, was dragged by horses through the same streets where he had for- merly ridden in triumph. 10. Thus perished the caliph Mostasem, being bruised to death on the pavements. With him ended the empire of the Saracens, in the year 1258 of the Christian era. 11. But the termination of this empire did not put an end to the religion of Mahomei. This continued to flourish, and finally extend- ed over nearly all the countries of Asia and Africa. 4. Who were the caliphs ? Where did they reign ? What of Mahmud Gazui ? 5. Re- late the story of the poor man and Mahmud Gazui. S. Who was Mostasem? What can you say of him ? 9. How did he die ? 10. When did the empire of the Saracen* end.' 11. What of the religion of Mahomet? THE SARACENS, 59 CHAPTER XXXIV.— ASIA CONTINUED. About Syria, Phce?iicia, and Asia Minor. Ruins of Balbcc. 1. I will now give you a short account of Syria, which lay to the north of Palestine. It was bounded north by Asia Minor, on the east by the river Euphrates and Arabia, on the south by' Palestine and a part of Arabia, and west by the Mediterranean Sea. 2. Syria is frequently mentioned in the Bible. The people were enirarred in almost constant wars with the Jews, from the time of David, nearly to the time of Christ, when it became a Roman prov- ince. 3. At this period its capital was Antioch, which was one of the most splendid cities in the world. This was the native place of St. Luke, and here both St. Peter and St. Paul lived for some time. Here, too, the followers of Christ were first called Christians. 4. Damascus, another city of Syria, one hundred and thirty-six miles northward of Jerusalem, appears to have been known ever since the time of Abraham. It is frequently mentioned in the Bible, and bere St. Paul was miraculously converted to the Christian faith. 5. This city was famous in later times fur making the best swords sabres, and other cutlery ; but the art which the people once possess- ed is now lost. The inhabitants of this city were also celebrated fur manufacturing beautiful silks, to which the name of damask was giv- en, from the place where they were made. Ch. XXXIV. — I. Where was Syrin situated? How was it bounded ? 2. What of the people of Syria ? 3. Capital of Syria? What gre at events took place at Antioch ? 4. What of Damascus? What took place there ? 5. What was Damascus celebrated for in ancieut times? (50 SCHOOL HISTORY 6. Another place in Syria mentioned in the Bible, was Tadinor, sometimes called " T/admor in the desert;" this was built by Solo- mon for the convenience of his traders; it'was ten miles in extent, but it is now in ruins. The splendid remains of this place, consisting of columns and other things beautifully sculptured in stone, show that, it must have been a rich and powerful city. In modern times it is called Palmyra. 7. At the distance of thirty-seven miles north-Avest of Damascus are the remains of Balbec, a very splendid city in the time of the apos- tlrs, : and then called Heliopolis. It is now in ruins, and contains scarcely more than a thousand inhabitants. S. I must not forget to mention Phcenice, or Phoenicia, which lay along the border of the Mediterranean Sea; it contained the cities of Tyre, Sidon, Ptolemais, and other celebrated places. In very early times, the Phoenicians were famous Tor taking the lead in commerce, navigation, and other arts. They-were then an independent nation, but in after limes their country became a province of Syria. 9. Syria is at the present day gdvemed by the Turks, and, like ev- ery other country under their sway, is stamped with an aspect of des- olation and decay. The term Syria is now applied, not- only to what anciently bore that name, but to PaLestiue also. 10. Asia Minor, or Natolia, as it is now called, lies at the north- eastern corner of the Mediterranean Sea; it is a kind of peninsula, bounded on the north by the Euxine or Black Sea; on the west by theiEgean Sea; and on the east by Syria, Mesopotamia, and Arme- nia. 11. It is about six hundred miles in length, from east to west, and four hundred in breadth. It is at present under the government of Turkey, and its inhabitants are mostly believers in Mahomet!- The chief city now is Smyrna, to which many vessels go from this country, and bring back figs, dates, and other things. 12. Asia Minor appears to have been settled in very early times. Several kingdoms have arisen and nourished here at different periods, but it has never been the seat of any great empire. The kingdom of Lydia, in Asia Minor, existed as early as eight hundred years before Christ. Ardysus, who reigned seven hundred and ninety-seven years B. C, appears to have been one of its earliest kings. 13. The last king of Lydia Avas Croesus, Avho was so famous for his great riches, that to this day Ave say, "As rich as Crcesus." But, in spite of his Avealth, he Avas conquered by Cyrus, king of Persia, 543 B. C. 14. From this period, Lydia, Avith a great part of Asia Minor, con- inued subject to the Persian empire till the time of Alexander, about SJU B. C, when it Avas conquered by that famous leader. 6. Whatof Tadmor? 7. What of the ruins of Balbcc ? 8. AVhat of Phoenicia ? What did it contain? What of the Phoenicians ? 9. What of Syria ? To what is this name now applied ? 10. Situation and boundaries of Asia Minor? 11. lis extent? Govern- ment? Inhabitants? What of Smyrna ? 12. What of Asia . Minor ? What of Lydia ? Ardysus? 13. What can you tell of Crcesus'? 14. What of Lydia ? By whom was it conquered ? THE SCYTHIANS. 6] ] 5. Three hundred years before Christ, Pontus, which had once been a part of Lydia, became an independent country. It continued to flourish for many years, and Mithridates VII. -successfully main- tained a war with the Romans for a long time. 16. By his skill and courage, he batHed the best generals of the em- pire. But at length, in the year 64 B. C, he was conquered, and his kingdom, with the rest of Asia Minor, was subjected to the Roman dominion. 17. Notwithstanding the wars in Asia Minor, the country became filled with people, and superb cities rose up in various parts of it. Ephesus, situated in Lydia, was a splendid place, and it had a temple so magnificent, that it was called one of the seven wonders of the world. . 18.' This temple was one hundred and twenty years in building; but a man named Erostratus, wishing to make himself remembered, set it on fire, and it was burnt to the ground. 19. There were also many other fine cities in Asia Minor, several of which are mentioned in the New Testament. Among these was Tarsus, the birth-place of Paul; also, Pergamos, Thyatira, Sardis, Philadelphia, and Laodicea, which are spoken of in the book of Rev- elation. 20. Through the labors of Paul, Barnabas, Silas, Timothy, Luke, and perhaps others, Christianity was early planted in nearly all the divisions of Asia Minor. CHAPTER XXXV.— ASIA CONTINUED. A Brief View of Several Nations. 1. I have now related the history of the most celebrated countries of Asia. But there are several other territories, and some of them very extensive, of which I can say only a few words in this little book. 2. In ancient times, the Scythians inhabited the northern parts of Asia. They were a warlike-and savage people, and very expert with the bow and arrow. Many of the Asiatic and European kings en- deavored to subdue them, but were generally defeated. 3. At different times, vast numbers of the Scythians used to over- run the more civilized countries that lay south of them. A tribe of Scythians founded the powerful empire of Parthia, which afterwards extended its sway over Persia and other countries. This empire be- gan in the year 250 B. C, and continued five hundred years. 4. In more modern limes, the regions inhabited by the Scythians 15. What of I'onius? Mithridatea VII. ? 1G. By whom wa= Mithridates conquered? 17. What of Epheras? 18. Temple of Diana? How was it destroyed ? 19. What other < itics were the e in Asia Minor.' 20. Win) planted Christianity in Asia Minoi .' L'h. XXXV.— 2. What el the Scythiam? Where did they lire ? J. Whatol Parthia ; 62 SCHOOL HISTORY. have been called Tartary, and the people Tartars. The people tire not much more civilized, than they formerly were. More than one celebrated conqueror has arisen among the Tartars. . ' 5. India, which we call the East Indies, was very little known to the people who lived westward of it in ancient times. Semiramis- invaded it, and likewise Alexander the Great, and several other con- querors. The Hindoos of the present day are an interesting people, but addicted to idolatry. i 6. India consists of Hindostan, and of an extensive region to the eastward of it. Within, the last hundred years, the English have gained great power in this part of the world. They made war against the native rulers, and reduced them to subjection. 7. The Turks, or Ottomans, are a people who had their origin in Asia. But, as they have been settled in Europe during several cen- turies, it will be more proper and convenient to speak of them in the history of that quarter of the globe. 8. Japan is an extensive empire containing twenty-six millions of inhabitants. These live to the east of China, upon several islands, of which Niphon is the largest. The people live crowded together in large cities, and resemble the Chinese in their religion, manners, and customs. 9. It is uncertain whether the ancient nations knew any thing of this empire, and its early history is quite unknown. It is probable it has remained with little change for thousands of years. Its exis- tence was first ascertained by the Europeans about the year 1400 ; but as strangers are not permitted to travel in the country, very little is found out concerning it. The people are idolaters. 10. There are several other kingdoms of Asia, of which the histo- ry is little known, or quite uninteresting. Among these are Siam, Cochin China, the Birman empire, Cabul, Beloochistan, and some others. Besides these, the northern portions of Asia are occupied by various tribes of Tartars, who appear to have wandered over these regions for ages, leaving no story behind them. The emperor of Rus- sia rules over these vast dominions. CHAPTER XXXVL— ASIA CONTINUED. Review of the History of Asia. 1. Let us now go back and review the history of Asia. In this quarter of the globe, the most wonderful events in the history of mankind have happened. Here Adam and Eve were created; and 4. What is the name given to the countries formerly inhabited by the Scythians, Par thians. Sic. ? Do the Tartars remain nearly the same as the ancient Scythians, Parthians. &.C.? G. What of India or Hindostan ? How is it bounded ? Which way is it from (J hi na? Prom Persia? From Palestine? What of the English in Hisdostan ? 7. What of the Turks or Ottomans:" S. What of Japan? Direction of 'the Japanese isles from Hin dostan? Persia? Palestine? 10. What other nations of Asia are there, of which the history is little known ? What of the northern portions of Asia? ASIA. 03 on the banks of the Euphrates all the people dwelt who lived before the flood. 2. It was in Asia, that the ark of Noah rested; and here again the people began to build cities, andestablish nations. Here the first great empire arose. Here the Jewish nation had its origin; and nearly ail the events related in the Old Testament took place here. 3. It was in Asia, that the religion which teaches us that there is one only living and true God, had its origin; and here Jesus Christ ppeared, to establish this religion, and seal the truth of revelation with his blood. 4. It was in Asia, that Mahomet commenced and established his religion, which is now believed by more than half the human race. Several other religions had their origin in Asia. 5. In Asia, some of the greatest empires have existed, of which history gives us any account. The Assyrian empire, as I have before said, is the first on record. This was followed by the Persian em- pire, which seemed to swallow up all the surrounding nations. Chi- na, the most populous empire on the globe, has endured longer than any other. 67 The Saracens, who extended their dominion over many coun- tries, had their origin in Asia. The Turks, who have reigned over Palestine, Mesopotamia, Syria, Asia Minor, a part of Europe, and a part of Africa, for nearly eight hundred years, had their origin in Asia. 7. There is one portion of Asia which is, perhaps, more full of his- torical interest than any other on the face of the globe. It is that which lies between the Mediterranean on the west, Armenia oh the north, Persia on the east, and Arabia on the south. Here is the spot on which the first inhabitants dwelt; here was the place where the first nations were formed; here the miracles recorded in the Bible took place; here the prophets dwelt; here Jesus Christ lived, preach- ed, and died. 8. But, although Asia was peopled before any other part of the world, and though the inhabitants have been favored by miracles, and the presence of a divine teacher, they are far behind the nations of Europe and America in the knowledge of religion, and the various arts which make life comfortable and happy. 9. In all parts of Asia, there are many people who are full of su- perstition, and there are very few who worship God in sincerity and truth. Jesus Christ is hardly known among the many millions of peo- ple in Asia; and though some of the rich men, kings, and princes live in gorgeous palaces, and are decked with gold and jewels, yet the mass of the people live as they have done for ages, ignorant, poor, and degraded. Cm. XXXVI. — 1. 2. 3. 4. What remarkable events have occurred in Asia? 5. What la the first empire recorded in history? What of the Persian empire? What of China? G. What of the Saracens? What of the Turks ? 7. What portion of Asia is the most inter- filing on the globe? Why u this portion of country thus interesting? 6. How has A?i» been particularly favored? fa what respects are the inhabitants of Asia behind those of Europe and America? 9. What is the state of the people in Asia? 04 SCHOOL HISTOR Y. 10. The most remarkable feature in the history of Asia is, that, while the country has seen many revolutions and changes, the con- dition of the people remains nearly the same. In our couutry and in Europe, t lie re is a constant improvement. Every year brings some new art, invention, or institution for the benefit of society, 11. But in Asia it is not so. Whoever is king, the people are but slaves. Education makes no progress, liberty is unknown, truth is little valued, virtue is not prized, and that thing which we call com- fort, and which makes our homes so dear to us, is not-to he found in this vast country, so favored by Providence, and so richly endowed by nature. 12. It would seem that the real difficulty in Asia is, that, while they are destitute of the knowledge of the Gospel, they have many false religions. Mahometanism prevails over a great part of this portion of the globe ; and it is remarkable that no country, the people of which believed in this false religion, has ever been happy or well- governed. 13. The Hindoos believe in Brahmanism, which teaches them that there is one principal deity, called Brahma, and several other in- ferior deities, called Vishnu, Siva, &c. They make strange • images of these, and worship them. The priests are called Brahmins, and instruct the people in many idle ceremonies and cruel superstitions. Brahma, Vishnu. 14. Beside these religions, there is the worship of the Grand Lama, to whom a temple is erected in Tartary. The Chinese believe in Boodh, and other nations believe in other deities. 10. What is remarkable in the history of Asia ? What is saiil of this country and of Europe ? 11. How does Asia, differ from Europe and America ? 12. What is the condi- tion of Asia ? What of Mahometanism ? What is a remarkable fact ? ID. In what re- tisjion do the Hindoos believe ? What does Brahmanism teach ? What of Ihc Brahmins ? 14. Where is the temple of the Grand Lama? In what deity do the Chinese beliere? ASIA. 65 15. Thus nearly the whole of Asia is involved in darkness as to the character of God, and the destiny of man ; and thus we see, that the conduct of mankind is such as might be expected, where such ignorance and such error prevail. CHAPTER XXXVII.— ASIA CONTINUED. Chronology of Asia. 1. Chronology is a record of the dates when historical events hap- pened. By studying chronology, you therefore learn the time at which the creation took place, when Abraham went from Chaldea to Canaan, when Christ was born, and other things. 2. Now in order to have a clear view of the progress of history, it is very important to place before us a table of chronology ; and if we wish to remember history for a long time, it is well to fix this table in the memory. 3. I will now give you a brief view of the chronology of Asia. By this you will notice some curious things. You will see that Solomon and Chaus of China lived at the same time; that Solomon began the temple exactly three thousand years after the creation, &c. Before Christ. Creation of the world 4004 Deluge 2348 Confusion of tongues 2247 Ashur founds the empire of Assyria 2229 Ninias, king of Assyria began to reign 2000 Abraham born 1996 Abraham sets out from Chaldea to go to Canaan 1921 Jacob removes with his family to Egypt 1705 Death of Jacob ' ]6S9 Death of Joseph 1635 Moses born • 1570 Departure of the Israelites from Egypt 1491 Death of Moses 1447 Death of Joshua 14Lo Saul proclaimed king of Israel 1100 King David born 1085 Solomon began to reign 1015 15. In what error is nearly the whole of Asia involved? What do we see as respec i the conduct of mankind ? |T_y It might be well for the teacher now to require the pvpil to go over the history of .isia a second time, or at least to so back arid see that he is able to answer the most material questions of the preceding chapters. Ch. XXXVII. — 1. What is chronology? Its use ? 2. What henefit can we gain by placing before us a chronological table '. What Is the advantage of fixing a chronological table in the memory ? 4. \V hut curious things do we learu from a chronological view of Aria ? «;• 66 SCHOOL HISTORY. Temple of Solomon built 100-1 Chaus, emperor of China, began to reign 1000 Death of Sarclanapalus, first Assyrian empire overthrown . . 888 Jonah the prophet sent to preach to the Ninevites 806 Ardysus, first king of Lydia, in Asia Minor 797 Shalmaneser conquered the kingdom of Israel, and carried the chief inhabitants into captivity 720 Isdigertes made king of Persia 630 Second Assyrian empire overthrown 606 Lydia conquered by Cyrus, king of Persia 548 Babylonian empire overthrown . 538 Jews return from Babylon 536 Persian empire established by Cyrus the Great 536 Death of Cyrus 529 Cambyses succeeds his father Cyrus 529 Darius began to reign 522 Xerxes defeats Leonidas at Thermopylae 4S0 Death of Xerxes 465 Alexander invades Persia 330 Kingdom of Syria founded by Seleucus 312 Pontus becomes independent under Mithridates II 300 Empire of Parthia founded 250 Artaxares made king of Persia 230 Judas Maccabseus drives the Syrians out of the Jewish kingdom 166 Chang, emperor of China 67 Pontus, with other parts of Asia Minor, conquered by the Ro- mans 64 Syria and Canaan conquered by the Romans 61 Herod, king of the Jews 37 Vati, emperor of China 33 Jesus Christ was born 4004 years after the creation : this period if called the Christian era. It is the custom in all Christian countries to date from the birth of Christ. B. C. means before Christ; A. C. means after Christ ; A. D. stands for Anno Domini, that is, in the year of our Lord. Thus we say A. D. 1S37, by which we mean in the year of our Lord, or from the birth of Christ, 1837 years. A. D. Jesus Christ born Christ crucified 33 Paul arrives at Piome 61 Destruction of Jerusalem by Titus 70 Birth of Mahomet 570 Mahomet obliged to fly from his enemies 622 This is called the Hegira, and is the era from which the Turks date, as we do from the birth of Christ. Death of Mahomet 632 Saracen empire established 638 68 AFRICA Map of Africa. p&" The teacher will here put such questions as he deems necessary. AFRICA 69 Bagdad, the seat of the caliphs, founded ........ 672 Chosroes the Great, king of Persia, began to reign .... 660 Si-g\ven, emperor of China, began to reign 617 Chwang-tsong " " " " 1037 Genghis Khan invaded China 1209 Saracen empire overturned by the Turks ... .... 1258 Japan discovered by Europeans 1400 Shah Abbas ascended the throne of Persia 1589 Shah Husseyn " " " 1694 Kouli Khan made king of Persia 1730 Yong-tching came to the throne of China 1737 Taou-kwang ascended the throne of China 1820 British Expedition against China 1S40 Canton taken . . ' 1841 N. B. — The teacher may now proceed to ask such questions as he deems proper, in re- gard to the several events noticed in the table ; it may be well to turn to the pages where the details are given respecting the events, and interrogate the pujnl upon them. Questions like the following may be useful : How long from the birth of Abraham to that of Moses 7 From that of Moses to thai of David 1 From the beginning to the end of the Saracen empire 1 Ifc. CHAPTER XXXVIII.— AFRICA. About the Geography of Africa. The Inhabitants. 1. Africa is one of the four quarters of the globe. It is an im- mense extent of country, and includes nearly one fourth of all the land on the earth. It is separated from America by the Atlantic Ch. XXXVIII. — 1. What of Afrioa? How i« it ieparated from America? 70 SCHOOL HISTORY. Ocean , the nearest part is about three thousand miles from New York or Boston. 2. It is separated from Europe by the Mediterranean Sea, and from Asia by the Red Sea. It is, however, attached to Asia by a narrow neck of land, called the Isthmus of Suez. 3. Africa is less known than any other portion of the globe. Many parts of the interior have never been visited by Europeans. The greater part of the inhabitants are negroes, of which there are many tribes. Some of these are intelligent, and live tolerably well, but tha greater part are either in a savage or a barbarous state. 4. The climate being warm, they need little shelter or clothing. Their houses are therefore poor mud huts, or slight tenements, made of leaves or branches of trees. Their dress is often but a single piece of cloth tied around the waist. They are however a cheerful race, and spend much of their time in various amusements. 5. Beside the negroes, there are several other races of Africans. The inhabitants from Egypt to Abyssinia appear to consist of the original Egyptian people, mixed with Turks, Arabs, and others. The people of the Barbary States are the descendants of the ancient Car- thaginians, mingled with the Saracens who conquered the country, together with Turks and Arabs. 6. The immense desert of Sahara, with all the adjacent regions, appears to be occupied by wandering tribes of Arabs, who move from place to place with their horses and camels, like the people of Arabia, for pasturage or plunder. 7. Africa may be considered as, on the whole, the least civilized portion of the earth. The people are mostly Mahometans, and one half of them are nearly in a savage state. The rest are in a bar- barous condition. 8. The central parts of Africa abound in wild animals, such as lions, panthers, leopards, elephants, rhinoceroses, zebras, and quaggas. The woods are filled with chattering monkeys, the thickets are in- fested with monstrous serpents, ostriches roam over the deserts, va- rious kinds of antelopes and deer, in vast herds, graze upon the plains, hippopotami are seen in the lakes and rivers, and crocodiles abound in the stagnant waters. Wild birds of every hue meet the eye of the traveller in nearly all parts of the country. How far is the nearest point from New-York or Boston? 2. How is it separated from Europe? Asia? What neck of land joins it to Asia? 3. Is Africa well known? WhaJ of the inhabitants ? 4. What of the climate ? Houses? Dress? What of the negroes A. What of other races ? Describe them. 7. How may Africa be considered ? State of the people i 8. What of animals in Central Africa? EGYPT. 71 CHAPTER XXXIX.— AFRICA CONTINUED. Early Sovereigns of Egypt. Jin Egyptian Temple, dedicated to the god Isis. 1. The natives of Africa are supposed to be descended from Noah's Bon Ham, who went thither and settled in Egypt after the building of the tower of Babel, this country being near the land of Shinar. The kingdom of Egypt is very ancient, and was founded by Menes, one of the children of Ham, 2188 B. C. In the Bible he is called Misraim. 2. Egypt is bounded north by the Mediterranean Sea, east by the Red Sea, south by Nubia, and west by the desert. The Nile runs through the midst of Egypt, from the south to the north. This river overflows once a year, and thus fertilizes the country, for it very seldom rains in Egypt. 3. Menes, or Misraim, the first king of Egypt, turned aside the Nile from its original channel, and built the city of Memphis where the river had formerly flowed. He was so great a monarch that the people worshipped him as a god after his death. 4. The history of Egypt is very obscure during a considerable time after the reign of Menes. From the year 2084 to the year 1825 be- fore the Christian era, it was governed by rulers Avho led the lives of shepherds, and were therefore called shepherd kings. These kings xere afterwards driven from Egypt. An Ethiopian woman, named Nitocris, became queen of this country, in the year 1678 before the Ch. XXXIX. — 1. From wliom are the natives of Africa descended? By whom and whur was Egypt founded? What of Menes ? Q. How is Egypt bounded? What of the Nile.' Does it often rain in Egypt ? 3. Where and by whom was Memphis built ? What was thought of Menei ? 4. What of the history of Egypt ? What of the shepherd king* ? What of Nitocrii? 72 SCHOOL HISTORY Christian era. Her brother had been murdered by the Egyptians, and she resolved to avenge him. 5. For this purpose queen Nitocris built a palace under ground, and invited the murderers of her brother to a banquet. The subter- ranean hall, where the banquet was prepared, was brilliantly illumi- nated with torches. The guests were the principal men in the kingdom. 6. The scene was magnificent, as they sat feasting along the table. But suddenly a rushing and roaring sound was heard overhead, and a deluge of water burst into the hall. Queen Nitocris had caused a river to flow through a^ecret passage, and it extinguished the torches, and drowned all the company at the banquet. 7. The most renowned monarch that ever reigned over Egypt was Sesostris. The date of his reign is not precisely known, but there is a carving in stone, lately found in Egypt among the ruins of an ancient city, which is more than three thousand years old, and supposed to be a portrait of him. It is doubtless the oldest portrait in existence. This king formed the design of conquering the world, and set out from Egypt with more than half a million of foot soldiers, twenty- four thousand horsemen, and twenty-seven thousand armed chariots. 8. His ambitious projects were partially successful. He made great conquests, and wherever he went he caused marble pillars to be erect- ed, and inscriptions to be engraved on them, so that future ages might not forsret his renown. 9. The following was the inscription on most of the pillars: — Se- sostris, KING OF KINGS, HAS CONQUERED THIS TERRITORY BY HIS ARMS. But the marble pillars have long ago crumbled into dust, or been bu- ried under the earth; and the history of Sesostris is so obscure, that some writers have even doubted whether he ever made any conquests at all. 10. But other writers assure us that he returned to Egypt after his 5. How (lid she revenge her brother's death? 7. What can you tell of Sesostris ? What of his army? 9. What inscription was engraved on the marble pillars raised by Sesostris Are the pillars still standing ? What do some writers doubt ' EGYPT. wars, brining with him a multitude of captives, and long trains oi camels, laden with treasure, and that he then built magnificent tem- ples, and constructed canals and causeways. 11. When Sesostris went to worship in the temple, he rode in a chariot which was drawn by captive kings. They were harnessed like horses, four abreast ; and their royal robes trailed in the dust as they tugged the heavy chariot along. But at length the proud Sesos- tris grew old and blind. He could no longer look around him, and ,see captive kings drawing his chariot, or kneeling at his footstool. He then became utterly miserable, and committed suicide. CHAPTER XL.— AFRICA CONTINUED. " Egyptian Architecture and Sculpture. 1. The ancient history of Egypt is so obscure, and yet so full of wonderful tales, that we might doubt it altogether, and believe it but the marvellous invention of fanciful story-tellers, were it not for the vast ruins and stupendous monuments still to be found in different parts of the country. These show that many ages since, between three and four thousand years ago, this country was filled with mil- lions of people, and that there were cities here of the most wonder- ful magnificence. Ruins of Thebes. 2. Thebes appears to have been more magnificent than any other city, either in ancient or modern times. It was called the city of a hundred gates; and such was the immense population, that through each of these gates, in time of war, marched two hundred armed chariots, and two thousand soldiers. 10. What do others say? II. How was the chariot of Sesostris drawn? What was the fate of this despotic king? Cii. XL. — 1. What of the ancient history of Egypt ? What of ruin? and monuments? What do they prove? 2. What of Thebes? 7 74 SCHOOL HISTORY. 3. Thebes was ruined in the time of Cambyses, kins: of Persia who lived about twenty-four hundred years ago. Yet the remains of the city are still visible, scattered over a space of twenty-seven miles on each side of the Nile. Some of the pillars of the temples are eleven feet in diameter. 4. One of the Egyptian kings caused his subjects to dig a great lake, forty-five miles in circumference, and almost as deep as the ocean. Another king constructed a labyrinth of marble, containing three thousand chambers, fifteen hundred of which were underground. 5. In the upper chambers of this labyrinth were kept the sacred crocodiles, and all the other animals which the Egyptians worship- ped. In the subterranean chambers lay the dead kings of Egypt. 6. The catacombs are likewise very wonderful. They are galleries hewn out of the rock, and extend a great way beneath the ground. The dead bodies of persons who died' thousands of years ago are found in these catacombs, and they are nearly as well preserved now as when they were first buried. These are called mummies ; and some, supposed to be three thousand years old, have been brought to this country. 7. Every body has heard of the pyramids of Egypt. These immense edifices are still standing on the banks of the Nile. The largest is five hundred feet high, and covers eleven acres of ground. 8. The pyramids are so old that it is impossible to tell when they were erected, or by whom. It is generally supposed that the ancient kings of Egypt intended them as^heir sepulchres, thinking that thus they should be famous for ever. But though the pyramids have not decayed, the names of those kings are forgotten. 9. On a plain near Thebes are two enormous stone statues, some- what about the population of Thebes? 3. Who destroyed Thebes? Remains? Pil- lars ? 4. Describe the works of some of the Icings. What of the labyrinth ? 5. What were kept in, the labyrinth ? 6. Describe the catacombs. What are mummies ? 8. What of the pyramids ? What was the probable cause of their erection ? EGYPT. 75 what like a man and woman. These are fifty feet high. No one can look upon them but with wonder. 10. The sphynx is one of the most curious among the Egyptian antiquities. It was originally the gigantic head of a woman, on the body of a lion ; but the lower part is now buried in the sand. The part which remains above ground is the head and neck. These are twen- ty-seven feet high, and are made of solid rock. At a distance, it looks as if a great flat-nosed woman were rising out of the sand. 11. The ruins of the temple of Luxor, and forming a part of an- cient Thebes, are so grand as to strike the beholder with awe. The remains of one of the temples are perhaps the most remarkable relics of antiquity. Image of Osirit. Image of Isit. 9. What of statuei near Thebei ? 10. Deicribe the sphyni. 11. What of the rotai of Luror? 76 SCHOOL HISTORY 12. At the time when they constructed these marvellous works, the ancient Egyptians possessed more learning and science than any other people. Their superior knowledge caused them to be looked upon as magicians by the people of other countries. 13. Still the Egyptians had many absurd superstitions. Their chief god was Isis, and another deity was Osiris. Of these they made strange images, and worshipped them. Isis was greatly rever- enced, and the people dedicated many splendid temples to its wor- ship. A picture of one of these temples may be seen at page 71. CHAPTER XLL— AFRICA CONTINUED. The Ptolemies and Queen Cleopatra. 1. In the history of the Jews I have told of their bondage in Egypt, and of their miraculous escape. A long while afterwards, an Egyp- tian king, named Shishak, took Jerusalem, and robbed Solomon's temple of its treasures. 2. A very famous king of Egypt was named Amenophis. He is supposed to be the same with Memnon, in honor of whom a temple with a gigantic statue was erected, of which some remains are still to be seen at Thebes. This statue was said to utter a joyful sound at sunrise, and a mournful sound when the sun set. Some modem travellers imagine that they have heard it. This, however, is absurd. 3. In the year 525 before the Christian era, Egypt was conquered by Cambyses, king of Persia. He compelled Psammenitus, who was then king of Egypt, to drink bulls' blood. It operated as a poison, and caused his death. 4. Three hundred and thirty-two years before the Christian era, Egypt was conquered by Alexander the Great, king of Macedon. Here he built a famous city, called Alexandria, which was for many centuries one of the most splendid places in the world. But the ancient city is in ruins, and modern Alexandria is far inferior to it. 5. Alexander was buried at Alexandria, in a tomb cut out of one vast stone ; this has been carried to London within a few years, and may now be seen there. 6. He appointed Ptolemy, one of his generals, to be ruler of the country. From Ptolemy were descended a race of kings, all of whom were likewise called Ptolemy. They reigned over Egypt two hundred and ninety-four years. The last of these kings was Ptolemy Dion- ysius, whose own wife made war against him. A battle was fought, 12. What of the Egyptians at the time we are speaking of? How were they looked upon by people of other countries ? 13. What of the superstitions of the Egyptians ? Isis and Osiris? Ch. XLI. — 1. Who was Shiskak ? What did he do ? 3. Who was Amencphis ? What of the statue of Memnon."' 3. When and by whom was Egypt conquered ? Fate of Psammenitus? 4. When did Alexander conquer Egypt? What of Alexandria? 6. What of Ptolemy and his descendants ? How long did they reign in Egypt ? Who was Ptolemy Dionysius : His wife ' EGYPT. 77 in which Ptolemy Dionysius was defeated. He attempted to escape, but was drowned in the Nile. His wife, whose name was Cleopatra, then became sole ruler of Egypt. 7. She was one of the most beautiful women that ever lived, and her talents and accomplishments were equal to her personal beauty. But she was very wicked. Among other horrid crimes, Cleopatra poisoned her brother, who was only eleven years old. Yet, though all the world knew what an abandoned wretch she was, the greatest heroes could not or would not resist the enticements of her beauty. 8. When Mark Antony, a Roman general, had defeated Brutus and Cassius, at Philippi, in Greece, he summoned Cleopatra to come to Cilicia, on the northeastern coast of the Mediterranean. He intended to punish her for having assisted Brutus. 9. As soon as Cleopatra received the summons, she hastened to obey. She went on board a splendid vessel, which was richly adorned with gold. The sails were made of the costliest silk. Instead oi rough, sunburnt sailors, the crew consisted of lovely girls, who rowed with silver oars ; and their strokes kept time to melodious music. 10. Queen Cleopatra reclined on the deck, beneath a silken awn- ing. In this manner she went sailing along the river Cydnus. Her vessel was so magnificent, and she herself so lovely, that the whole spectacle appeared like a vision. 1 1. Mark Antony was first warned of her approach by the smell of delicious perfumes, which the wind wafted from the silken sails of the vessel. He next heard the distant strains of music, aud saw the gleaming of the silver oars. 12. But when he beheld the beauty of the Egyptian queen, he thought of nothing else. Till Mark Antony met Cleopatra, he had been an ambitious man and a valiant warrior. But from that day forward, he was nothing but her slave. 13. Owing to Cleopatra's misconduct and his own, Antony was defeated by Octavius, another Roman general, at Actium, in Greece. He then killed himself, by falling on his sword. Cleopatra knew that if Octavius took her alive, he would carry her to Rome, and expose her to the derision of the populace. 14. She resolved not to endure this ignominy. Now in Egypt there is a venomous reptile, called an asp, the bite of which is mortal, but not painful. Cleopatra applied one of these reptiles to her bosom. In a little while her body grew benumbed, and her heart ceased to beat; and thus died the beautiful and wicked queen of Egypt. This event occurred thirty years before Christ. 15. The story of queen Cleopatra is very instructive. It shows that a person on whom Heaven has bestowed the richest gifts may use them to cause mischief and misery to all around, and to bring ruin on himself. 7. What of Cleopatra ? What cruelty did she commit? What made Cleopatra irresisti- ble? 8. Who was Mark Antony ? Why did he wish to punish Cleopatra ? Give an account of the arrival oi Cleopatra at Cilicia. 12. What was the character of Antony till he mat Cleopatra? 13 Where was Antony defeated ? Who was Octavius ? Fate of Antony ? Why did Cleopatra determine to kill herself ' 14. What caused aer death ' How long wa< thll before Chrisi ? 78 SCHOOL HISTORY. CHAPTER XLIL— AFRICA CONTINUED. Sequel of the Egyptian History. 1. After the death of Cleopatra, Egypt became a province of the Roman empire ; and it continued to belong to that, and the portion of it called the Eastern empire, till the year 640 after the Christian era. It was then conquered by the Saracens. It remained under their government upAvards of six centuries. 2. The Saracen sovereigns were dethroned by the Mamelukes, whom they had trained up to be their guards. The Mamelukes ruled Egypt till the year 1517, when they were conquered by the Turks. They kept possession of Egypt till the year 1798. It was then invaded by Napoleon Bonaparte, with an army of forty thousand Frenchmen. 3. The Turks, ever since their conquest of Egypt had kept a body of Mamelukes in their service ; these made a desperate resistance. A battle was fought near the pyramids, in which many of them were slain, and others were drowned in the Nile. Not long after this vic- tory, Bonaparte went back to France, and left general Kleber in com- mand of the French army. 4. General Kleber was a brave man, but a severe one, and his se- verity cost him his life. He had ordered an old Mussulman, named the Sheik Sada, to be bastinadoed on the soles of his feet. Shortly afterwards, when the general was in a mosque, a fierce Arab rushed upon him, and killed him with a dagger. 5. In 1801, the English sent Sir Ralph Abercrombie with an army to drive the French out of Egypt. General Menou was then the French commander. Sir Ralph Abercrombie beat him at the battle of Aboukir, but was himself mortally wounded. 6. In the course of the same year the French army sailed from Egypt back to France. The inhabitants lamented their departure, for the French generals had ruled them with more justice and mod- eration than their old masters, the Turks. Egypt is now governed by a successor of Mehernet Ali, who bears the title of pacha, but the country is no longer a part of the Turkish empire. 7. The present capital of Egypt is Grand Cairo. It is much infe- rior to what it was in former times, but still contains about three hundred thousand inhabitants. Alexandria, built by Alexander the Great, as I have before said, is now much reduced, but the ruins around it show that it was once a splendid city. There is no part of the world that seems more gloomy to a traveller than Egypt. The present aspect of the towns and cities is that of poverty in the midst of ruins, which speak of wealth and splendor that have long since departed. Ch. XLII. — 1. What was the state of Egypt from Cleopatra's death to its subjugation by the Mamelukes ? 2. How long did the Mamelukes govern Egypt ? When and how long did the Turks govern Egypt ? What happened in 179S ? 3. What battle was fought ? What of Bonaparte after the victory? 4. What of General Kleber? 5. What took place in 1S01 ? 6. What happened in the same year ? Why were the Egyptians sorry to have the French leave them? How is Egypt now governed ? How is the country considered? 7. What is the capital of Egypt? What of Grand Cairo ? Population? What of Alexandria ? How does Egypt appear to a traveller ? .ETHIOPIA. 79 CHAPTER XLIIL— AFRICA CONTINUED. Summary of ^Ethiopian Matters. 1. All the interior parts of Africa were anciently called iEthiopia. But, properly speaking, iEthiopia comprised only the countries now called Nubia and Abyssinia. This region lies south of Egypt, and extends along the shore of the Red Sea. The first inhabitants of iEthiopia are supposed to have emigrated from Arabia the Happy, a part of Arabia. Their early history is almost unknown. 2. iEthiopia, or at least a portion of it, was formerly called Sheba, and from thence it is supposed that the queen of Sheba went to visit Solomon. About thirty years ago, it is said that one of her descend- ants was king of Abyssinia. 3. It used to be the custom to confine the iEthiopian princes on a high mountain, which was named Geshen. It was very high and steep, and looked like an enormous castle of stone. No person could ascend this mountain, or come down from it, unless he were raised or lowered by means of ropes. 4. The princes lived on the summit of the mountain, in miserable huts. The greater part of them never came down till their dying day. But whenever the king died, one of the princes was summoned to the throne. Perhaps, however, he found himself no happier in the royal palace, than in his hut on the summit of Mount Geshen. 5. The ^Ethiopians were believers in the Jewish religion till the middle of the fourth century after the Christian era. Candace, the queen of the country, was then converted to Christianity, and her sub- jects followed her example. 6. The inhabitants of iEthiopia, or Abyssinia, are still called Chris- tians, but their mode of worship is mixed up with many Jewish prac- tices. They also worship the Virgin Mary and the saints, like the Roman Catholics. 7. The people of this part of Africa are not generally negroes. They are of an olive complexion, and have long hair and agreeable features. But in the northeastern part of Abyssinia, there is a race of negroes called Shangallas. 8. These negroes have been described as having faces resembling apes, and as being little more intelligent than the monkey tribe. They have no houses, but sleep under the trees, and sometimes bur- ow in caves. The Abyssinians hunt them as they would wild easts. Ch. XLIII. — 1. What was anciently called .Ethiopia ? In which direction is it from Egypt .' Where was .(Ethiopia properly speaking situated ? Who were the first inhabit- ants, of Ethiopia? 2. What was .Ethiopia formerly called? What of the queen of Sheba? 3. What was once the custom ? 4. How did the princes live? What happened when the king died ? 8. Till what time did the ^Ethiopians believe in the Jewish reli- gion ? What of Candace ? 6. What of the worship of the people of ^Ethiopia at the pre- senttime? 7. What of their personal appearance .' What of the Shangellas .' 8. Describa them. 80 SCHOOL HISTORY. CHAPTER XLIV.— AFRICA CONTINUED. Origin of the Barbary States and their Piracies on the Christians. 1. The Barbary states are Morocco, Algiers, Tunis, and Tripoli.. They are bounded north by the Mediterranean Sea, east and south by the desert, and west by tlie Atlantic Ocean. These countries were inhabited in the time of the Romans. Morocco was called Maurita- nia ; and Algiers Numidia. These regions were first settled by colo- nies from Phoenicia, Greece, and other countries. 2. In this region stood the celebrated city of Carthage in ancient times. Its site was about ten miles northeast of the city of Tunis. It was founded by some Phoenicians, eight hundred and sixty-nine years before the Christian era. The Phoenicians, as I have told you, were the first people who engaged in commerce, and founded colo- nies for the purpose of carrying on trade. 3. In the history of Rome I shall tell you how Carthage was de- stroyed. The Romans erected a new city where it had formerly stood. This was conquered and destroyed by the Saracens, who then built the city of Tunis. In the year 1574, Tunis was seized by the Turks. 4. The city of Algiers was built by the Saracens, in the year 944. The government, called the regency of Algiers, was founded in 1518, by two Turks, named Horuc and Hagradin. They were brothers, and both bore the name of Barbarossa, or Red-Beard. 5. The country now called Morocco was conquered by the Sara- cens about the same time with the other Barbary states. So also was Tripoli. All these states, except Morocco, afterwards fell into the hands of the Turks. 6. During a long period, the Barbary states were in the habit of fitting out vessels to cruise against the ships of every nation. Their prisoners were sold as slaves, and never returned to their own coun- try, unless a high ransom were paid for them. 7. The Americans were the first who made any considerable resis- tance to these outrages. In the year 1S03, commodore Preble sailed to the Mediterranean Sea with a small American fleet. He intended to attack Tripoli ; but one of his frigates, the Philadelphia, got aground in the harbor. 8. The Turks took possession of the Philadelphia. But one night, lieutenant Decatur entered the harbor of Tripoli, and rowed toward the captured vessel, with only twenty men. He leaped on board, Ch. XLIV.— 1. What are the Barbary states ? How are they bounded ? 2. Where did ancient Carthage stand ? Who founded it ? 3. Who erected a new city ? What did the Sa- racens do ? When was Tunis seized hy the Turks? 4. When and by whom was Algiers built? What was done in 1518? Who were called Barbarossa? 5. What of Morocco and Tripoli? Which of the Barbary stales fell afterwards into the hands of the Turks? 0, What were these states in the habit of doing ? 7. What was done in 1803 ? What of com- modore Preble ? 8. What of the Philadelphia f What did Decatur do ? BARBARYSTATES. 81 followed by his crew, and killed all the Turks, or drove them over- board. The Philadelphia was then set on fire. 9. After this exploit, commodore Preble obtained some gun-boats from the king of Naples, and with these and the American vessels, he made an attack on the fortifications of Tripoli. The bashaw of Tri- poli was forced to give up his prisoners. 10. In the year 1815, commodore Decatur (the same who had burnt the Philadelphia) was sent with a fleet against Algiers. He captured their largest vessels, and compelled the Algerines, and the Tripolitans also, to agree never more to make slaves of Americans. 11. In 1S16, Algiers was battered by an English fleet under the command of lord Exmouth. This was the severest chastisement that the Algerines had ever received at that period. But in 1830, the French sent a large naval and military force against Algiers, com- manded by Marshal Beaumont. The war continued for seventeen years. At length the country was conquered, and Algiers, under the name of Algeria, is now a province of France. CHAPTER XLV.-AFRICA CONTINUED. Fables and Facts about Africa. 1. Most of the other regions of Africa can hardly be said to have any history. The inhabitants possess no written records, and cannot tell what events have happened to their forefathers. 2. The ancie'nts had very curious notions about Africa ; for they had visited only the northern parts, and contented themselves with telling incredible stories about the remainder. ' They supposed that towards the eastern shore of the continent, there were people without noses, and others who had three or four eyes apiece. 3. In other parts of Africa there were said to be men without heads, but who had eyes in their breasts. Old writers speak also of a nation whose king had a head like a dog. There was likewise said to be a race of giants, twice as tall as common men and women. 4. But the prettiest of all these fables is the story of the Pigmies. These little people were said tc be about a foot high, and were be- lieved to dwell near the source of the river Nile. Their houses were built something like birds' nests, and their building materials were clay, feathers, and esrg-shells. 5. The-e Pigmies used to wage terrible wars with the cranes. An immense army of them would set out on an expedition, some mounted on rams and goats, and others on foot. 6. When an army of the Pigmies encountred an army of the cranes, 9. What attack was made upon Tripoli? What of the bashaw? 10. What was done in [lie year 1815? What agreement did the Tripolitans and Algerines make ? 11. When \u. Algiers battered .' What took place in 1830 ? What of Algiers now? Ch. XLV.— 1. What of the inhabitants of most parts of Africa ? 2. What were the ideas of the an- cients concerning Africa ? A. What is the prettiest of all these fabulous stories' Giy« tome accouut of the Pigmies. 82 SCHOOL HISTORY. great valor was displayed on both sides. The cranes would rush for* ward to the charge flapping their wings, and sometimes one of them would snatch up a Pigmy in his beak, and carry him away captive. 7. But the Pigmies brandished their little swords and spears, and generally succeeded in putting the enemy to flight. Whenever they had a chance, they would break the eggs of the cranes, and kill the unfledged young ones without mercy. S. Until within a few years, the moderns have not known much more about the interior of Africa than the ancients did. They have now acquired considerable knowledge respecting it; but the subject belongs rather to geography than history. Nearly the whole of the central part of Africa, through which the river Niger flows, is called Nigritia, or Negro-land. It is inhabited by several different nations 9. The principal city of Nigritia is called Timbuctoo. No white people have ever visited it, except one American, one Englishman, and one Frenchman. The name of the latter was M. Caillie. He was there in 1827, and describes the city as built in the shape of a triangle, and situated eight miles from the Niger. 10. The houses are only one story high, and are built of round bricks baked in the sun. The poor people and slaves dwell in huts of straw, shaped something like bee-hives. All around the city, there is an immense ^ilain of yellowish white sand. 11. There are English and French settlements on the western coast of Africa. There was formerly a Dutch settlement at the southern extremity of the continent, but the English have had possession of it since the year 1806. This is called Cape Town, and is situated at the cape of Good Hope. CHAPTER XLVI.-AFRICA CONTINUED. History of the Slave-Trade. 1. The most painful part of the history of Africa is that which be- longs to the slave-trade. From the earliest ages, when human soci- ety was yet in a rude state, it was the custom to make slaves of those who were taken in war. This practice was continued in after times, and thus, for thousands of years, slavery was established in nearly all the nations of the earth. 2. But in those countries where the Christian religion prevailed, slavery came into general disuse. In 14S2, however, the Portuguese began the horrid traffic of the slave-trade, and the English folioAved What M 8. What knowledge have the moderns of the interior of Africa ? Where is Nigritia ? 7 hat of the inhabitants? 9. What of Timbuctoo ? Who have visited it? What does j.vi. Caillie say of it ? Describe it. 11. What of settlements ? What of Cape Town? How long have the English had possession of it. Ch. XLVI. — 1. What is painful in the history of Africa ? What was the custom in the earliest ages ? How was slavery estab- lished? 2. What effect had the Christian religion upon slavery ? When did the Portuguesi engage in the slave trade ? The English ? What has hapoeued till the present time i A F R I CA . $3 in 1563. From that time, it has continued to the present day, though most nations have made laws against it, and it has now nearly ceased. 3. For at least two hundred years, this traffic was carried on to a great extent. The custom was for vessels to go to the western coast of Africa, and purchase of the African princes such prisoners as they had for sale. Sometimes, however, the captains of the vessels would rob the people of their children, or they would go on shore with a body of armed men, and carry away the inhabitants of a whole village. 4. The poor negroes thus taken from their homes, and separated forever from all they held dear, were crowded into the vessels, where they were often half-starved, and Avhere they sometimes suffered from disease, or unkind treatment. Such was frequently their distress, that they would jump into the sea, or beat out their own brains in despair. 5. Millions of these poor negroes have been taken from their homes, and probably more than half of those who entered the ships, from the beginning of the trade to this day, have perished before they reached the countries to which they were bound. It is by this cruel trade, that slavery has been introduced into various parts of America, and the West Indies. CHAPTER XLVII.-AFMCA CONTINUED. Chronology of Africa. 1. The following table exhibits the dates of the most remarkable events in the history of Africa. It may be well to compare this with the chronology of Asia, by which you may see what was doing in that quarter, while these events were happening in Africa. B. C. Egypt settled by Misraim 21 88 JNitocris reigned queen of Egypt 1678 Departure of the Israelites from Egypt 1491 Cambyses conquers Egypt 525 " destroys Thebes 520 Alexander conquers Egypt 332 Death of Cleopatra 30 A. D. Eivpt conquered by the Saracens 670 Algiers built 944 Mamelukes came into power 1250 The Portuguese besjin to traffic in slaves 1482 Egypt conquered by the Turks 1517 3. How long was the traffic carried on ? What was the custom ? What was done by captains of vessels? 4. Describe the state of the poor negroes. 6. How has slavery been introduced into America and the West Indies? 84 SCHOOL HISTORY. A government founded at Algiers, called the regency of Algiers 1518 The English begin to traffic in slaves 1563 Tunis seized by the Turks 1574 Napoleon invades Egypt 1798 Sir Ralph Abercrombie drives the French out of Egypt . . . 1801 Tripoli attacked by commodore Preble 1S03 The English take Cape Town from the Dutch 1806 Commodore Decatur batters Algiers 1815 Lord Exmouth attacks Algiers 1SI6 Caillie, a Frenchman, goes to Timbuctoo 1S27 Algiers taken by marshal Beaumont 1830 CHAPTER XLVIIL— EUROPE. Introductory Remarks on its Geography and other Matters. 1. Europe is considered the third quarter of the globe. It is the smallest in extent, being about one quarter as large as Asia, one third as large as Africa, and about one third larger than the whole United States. It is a part of the eastern continent, and is only sepa- rated from Asia by the Ural Mountains. It is separated from Africa by the Mediterranean Sea. At the straits of Gibraltar, the distance from Europe to Africa is but twenty-one miles. 2. But although Europe is the smallest of the four quarters of the globe, it has nearly three hundred millions of inhabitants, and is much superior to Asia, Africa, and most parts of America, in civilization. It abounds; in fine cities, fine roads, good houses, useful manufactures, Ch. XL VII. — The teacher will here put such questions on the Chronology as he deemi proper. Ch. XLVIIL — 1. Which is the third quarter of the globe? The smallest? EUROPE. 85 Map of Europe,. .60 pna STOUA" r *^5j^v^i --.'/., r'-^M '"/;\ii 3 -d. ■» y t">i..^'\\ ^^-^ U'M 30K "<£» Tripoli iflY-ELB' A II I Y jlongiti/cfr E.ft-om Crpeiiuicti Questions on the Map. — Tell the direction of the following places from London— France; Austria; Asia Minor; Moscow; Finland; Turkey; Ita- ly; Norway; Warsaw; Caspian Sea: Asia; Paris: Ireland. 86 SCHOOL HISTORY. and most other things that are necessary to the comfort and happi- ness of mankind. 3. In all parts of Europe except Turkey, the religion of Jesus Christ prevails. If you were to travel in Asia or Africa, you would meet Avith no churches, or only now and then one, where the true God is worshipped. But you would see a great many mosques dedi- cated to the false religion of Mahomet, and a great many temples where the people bow down to idols of wood, stone, or metal. 4. But in Europe, the traveller everywhere meets with churches and these show that the people are Christians. In Europe, also, there are many colleges, academies, and schools, which prove that the people set a high value upon education. It is a fact which I wish you to remember, that in all parts of the world where you find churches, you find that the people are more or less advanced in civi- lization and the arts which render mankind happy. 5. This may show to us that the Christian religion tends to make people wiser and happier ; and this is rendered still more clear by the fact that in all those countries where the Christian religion is un- known, the greater part of the people are ignorant, degraded, and miserable. All false religions tend to injure mankind ; the true reli- gion tends to the improvement of mankind. How important is it, then, that every individual should be a real Christian. 6. As Europe is the smallest of the four quarters of the earth, so it was behind Asia and Africa in being settled and civilized. Long after the Assyrian empire had risen to great power and splendor, long after Babylon and Nineveh had flourished on the banks of the Eu- phrates, long after Egypt had become a mighty kingdom, long after Thebes, Memphis, and other magnificent cities had risen upon the borders of the Nile, Europe continued to be inhabited only by wan- dering tribes of savages. 7. Greece was the first portion of Europe that was settled. About the time that Moses led the Israelites out of Egypt, the Greeks began to build houses, found cities, and emerge from the savage into a more civilized state. By degrees they advanced in knowledge and refine- ment, and at length became the most polished people in the world. S. Afterwards Rome, situated in Italy, became a mighty city, and the Roman people extended their empire over the greater part of Europe, and the most civilized portions of Asia and Africa. Carthage, Egypt, Greece, Asia Minor, Palestine, Svria and other Asiatic coun- tries, bowed to the Roman yoke. How Urge is Europe compared with Asia ? Africa ? The United States ? How is it scpa rated from Asia ? From Africa ? How far is the nearest point of Europe from Africa 2. What of Europe ? In what does it abound? 3. What of religion in Europe? What of Asia and Africa? What of churches? Mosques? Temples? 4. What does the tra- veller meet in Europe ? What do churches show ? What do colleges, schools, &c. show ? What do you find where there are churches? 5. What effect has the Christian religion? What of countries where the Christian religion is unknown ? What effect have false reli- gions? What of the true religion ? Why should every person be a real Christian ? 6. What of Europe ? W T hat was the condition of Europe until after the empires of Asia and Egypt had long flourished ? 7. What part of Europe was first inhabited ? About what lime did the Greeks begin to emerge from the savage to civilized state ? Progress of th« Greeks? 9. What of Rome ? What countries became subject to Rome ? EUROPE. 87 9. Rome was the most splendid empire that the world has ever seen. But as it crushed other kingdoms beneath its foot, so, iu turn, imperial Borne was itself trampled down by the northern nations of Europe. Great ignorance followed this event, and the different nations and tribes of Europe seemed like broken and crushed limbs and members of the great empire, almost without life. 10. But these separate fragments of the human family grew up in due time to be separate nations, and these advanced in knowledga until they reached the condition in which we now find them. 11. Europe may be divided into two parts, the northern and south- ern. In the former, the climate is about as cold as it is in our middle and eastern States. In the latter, it is about as warm as in the southern States. The principal kingdoms in the northern sec- tion of Europe are Russia, Norway, Sweden, Prussia, several German states, Denmark, Holland, Belgium, Switzerland, France, and Great Britain. 12. Among the southern kingdoms of Europe are Portugal, Spain, Italy, Gretce, and Turkey. In these latter countries the soil is gene- rally fertile, and here grapes, olives, oranges, lemons, melons, and other delicious fruits, are abundant. 13. Here, too, all the wants of man for food are easily supplied, and so warm and gentle is the climate, that the people do not lind it necessary to build tight houses, and put on thick clothing, and pro- vide stores against the winter ; yet it is remarkable, that where nature has done so much, the people think it hardly necessary to do anything, and consequently they are less industrious, less comfortable, and less happy, than in more cold and severe climates. 14. In the northern parts of Europe, the people find it necessary to cultivate the soil with care, and lay up in summer a store of provi- sions against the long, cold winter. They build themselves good houses, they furnish them with many convenient articles, and thus, by their industry and care, they live more happily than those who inha- bit the gentler climes of the south. 15. The wild animals of Europe resemble those of this country, though they are in some respects different. The trees, plants, shrubs, and flowers, are similar to those we find here, though not exactly the same. 16. If you were to go to Europe, you would everywhere feel that you were in a strange land, but still many things would remind you of your own dear home in America. But if you were to go to Asia or Africa, the houses, the fields, the dress of the people, and all their manners and customs, would impress you with the idea that you were in a strange land, far, very iar, from your native country. 9. What was Rome ? What happened to the empire ? What followed the destruction of the Roman empire ? 10. What of the several nations of Europe ? 11. How may Kw- rype be divided I Climate in northern Europe? Southern Europe? Principal nations a.uonhern Europe ? Direction of each of these from England ? 1:2. The southern king- doms of Enrope ? Direction of each of these from England? 13. Climate in southern Europe ? Ell'ect of the climate upon the people ? 14. What of the northern parts of Eu- rope .' Condition of the people ? 15. Wild animals of Europe? Vegetation? 16 W hat if you were to go to Europe ? Asia ? Africa ? 88 SCHOOL HISTORY. CHAPTER XLIX.— EUROPE CONTINUED. About Greece ; where it is situated ; Appearatice of the Country ; Climate. 1. Greece is a small strip of land extending into the Mediterra- nean Sea. It lies almost exactly east of New York, at the distance of about five thousand miles. It is nearly at an equal distance from Asia Minor on the east, and Italy on the west. 2. Greece is bounded on the north by Macedonia, which is now a part of Turkev ; on every other side it is bounded by the sea. To the south and east of it are a great number of islands, some of which are extremely beautiful. 3. Several of them have towns and cities upon them, and one, called Antiparos, is remarkable for a grotto beneath the earth, which appears like a beautiful palace. When lighted up with lamps, it seems a vast hall, with a thousand pillars and ornaments of silver. 4. Some of the islands of Greece have been thrown up from the sea, and others which formerly existed have disappeared. These strange things have been caused by volcanic fires under the sea. Nothing can be more wonderful than the scenes which have some- times been exhibited by these convulsions of nature. 5. In the southern part of Greece, and among the islands, the cli- mate is as mild as in Virginia, and here the country abounds in all sorts of delicious fruits. In the northern part, the climate is some- what colder. 6. If you were to travel through Greece, you would discover that it is naturally very beautiful. Along the shores, you would meet with many little bays and harbors, and you would easily believe that the people living there would be tempted by the placid water to become seamen. You would accordingly find a large portion of the inhabit- ants to be seafaring people. 7. In the interior of the country you would meet with lofty moun- tains, whose tops in winter are covered with snow. You would meet with smiling valleys, bright, rapid streams, and steep hill-sides cov- ered with olive-groves, vineyards, and fig-trees. S. You would discover that the people of the present day live in miserable villages or towns, all wearing an aspect of poverty and decay. But you would often meet with the ruins of temples and other edifices, built by the ancient Greeks two or three thousand years ago. 9. These would show you, that, though the modern Greeks appear to be a degraded people, yet the former inhabitants of this country were among the most remarkable people that ever lived. It is of these I am now going to tell you. Ch. XLIX. — 1. What is Greece ? Direction and distance from New York ? In what direction is it from Asia Minor? From Italy? 2, How is Greece bounded on the north? East? South? West? What of the islands ? 3 What of Antiparos ? 4. What of volca- nic islands ? 5. Climate in the southern part of Greece? Northern? 6. What of the shores of Greece ? To what pursuits are many of the present Greeks devoted? 7. What t>f the itileriur of Greece '. 8. What of the present inhabitants of Greece? What of ruiru of temples, Icel! 9. What would these ruins prove? 90 SCHOOL HISTORY. CHAPTER L.— EUROPE CONTINUED. The Extent of Greece. First Settlement of the Country. 1. Though Greece is one of the most famous countries on the face of the globe, it is not very extensive; its boundaries varied at differ- ent times, but it never exceeded four hundred miles in length, and about one hundred and fifty in width. That portion to which the name of Greece is properly applied, was not much larger than the State of New York. 2. I must now carry you back to the first settlement of this coun- try, which took place more than four thousand years ago. When the human race was scattered from the tower of Babel, it is supposed that the family of Japheth, Noah's youngest son, travelled from Asia into Europe. As Greece lay nearer to the land of Shinar than the other parts of Europe, it was probably settled first. 3. The Greeks themselves believed that their ancestors had sprung up out of the earth. The first inhabitants were mere savages. They dwelt in wretched huts, and fed on acorns. Their garments were the skins of wild beasts. 4. There are so many fables about the early history of Greece, that I shall pass very briefly over the first three or four centuries. Ce- crops, an Egyptian, seems to have been the first who introduced civilization among the Greeks. He came with a number of his coun- trymen, and founded the city of Athens. This event took place about fifteen hundred and fifty-six years before the Christian era. 5. Thirty or forty years afterwards, Cadmus came from Phoenicia and built the city of Thebes. He was one of the greatest benefac- tors of the Greeks, for he taught them the cultivation of the vine, the manufacture of metals, and the use of the alphabet. 6. Other parts of Greece were also settled by colonies from foreign nations. The country then consisted of a number of small kingdoms, which had little or no connection with one anothor. These were fre- quently at war among themselves. 7. Twelve of these little kingdoms, or states, soon united them- selves into a confederacy. Their deputies held a meeting twice a year, in order to consult respecting the welfare of the country. They were called the council of the Amphyctions. By means of this coun- cil, the different states were kept at peace with each other, and were united against foreign enemies. Ch. L. — 1. What of the extent of Greece ? Its greatest length? Width? 2. How long since Greece was first settled? Who are supposed to have been the first inhabitants of Greece ? In which direction was Greece from the land of Shinar ? From Egypt ? 3. What did the Greeks believe of Hieir ancestors? What of the first inhabitants of Greece ? 4. Who first introduced civilization among the Greeks ? What city was founded by Cecrops ? When did this take place ? In what part of Greece was Athens ? Doe* Alliens still exist? Ans. Yes ; but the modern town is very mean, compared with ancient Athens. The ruins around it are very splendid 5. What of Cadmus? In which directhi* u-as Thebes from Athens? N. li. You must remember that there was a famous city in Egypt named Thebes b'. How were other parts of Greece settled? What of Greece at this time ! 7. What did twelve of the Grecian states do ? What of the Ainpbyctionic coun oil ? What etfect had this council ? GREECE. 91 8. One of the famous events of Grecian history was the Argonautic expedition. It is said that a prince named Jason, with a compaay of his friends, sailed to Colchis, which lay eastward of the Black Sea. Their object was to find a wonderful ram with a fleece of gold; but the whole story is supposed by some to be a fable. 9. The Trojan war was still more famous than the expedition, in search of the golden fleece. Troy was a large city on the Asiatic side of the Hellespont, which is now called the Dardanelles. Paris, the son of the Trojan king, had stolen away the wife of Menelaus, a Greek prince. 10. All the Grecian kings combined together to punish this offence. They sailed to Troy in twelve hundred vessels, and took the city after a seige of ten years. This event is supposed to have occurred eleveii hundred and ninety-three years before the Christian era. 11. But most historians are of opinion that the Trojan war was a much less important affair than Homer has represented it to be. Poets do not always tell the truth; and Homer was the father and chief of poets. He was a blind old man and used to wander about the country, reciting his verses. CHAPTER LI.— EUROPE CONTINUED. The Grecian haw givers. 1 . One of the principal states of Greece was called Sparta or Lace- daemon. It was founded byLelex, 1516, B. C. It received a code of laws from Lycurgus, who lived nearly nine centuries before Christ. He was strict and severe, but wise and upright. 2. Lycurgus ordered that all the Spartans should eat together at public tables. The reason of this law was, that the rich citizens might not feast luxuriously at home, but that rich and poor should fare alike. As for the children, they were not allowed any thing to eat, unless they could steal it. This wicked custom was adopted with the idea that it would train up the young Spartans to be cun- ning in war. 3. In order that the people might not be avaricious, Lycurgus for- bade any gold or silver to be coined into money. AH the money was made of iron. It could not very easily be carried in the pocket, for a Spartan dollar weighed as much as fifty pounds. 4. The children were all brought up at the public expense. They were allowed to stand near the dinner-tables and listen to the wise conversation of their parents. The Spartans were very anxious that their children should abhor drunkenness. 8. What of the Argonautic expedition? 9. What of the Tmjnn war ? 11. WliatofHo- mer? Ch. LI. — 1. What of Sparta? Laws? When did Lycurgus live ? What was his charac- ter J 2. Why did Lycurgus wish the .Spartans to eat in public? What of the children ? Why were they encouraged to steal ? 3. What laws were mad* respecting ineney ? What of a Spartan dollar ? J. How were children brought up ? 92 SCHOOL HISTORY. 5. They showed them the disgusting- effects of this pernicious vice, by causing- their slaves to drink intoxicating liquors. When the chil- dren had witnessed the ridiculous conduct of the drunken slaves, they were careful never to reduce themselves to so degraded a condition. 6. When Lycurgus had completed his code of laws, he left Sparta. Previous to his departure, he made the people swear that they would violate none of the laws till he should return. But he was resolved never to return. 7. He committed suicide by starving himself to death ; and his ashes were thrown into the sea by his command, so that the Spar- tans might not bring back his dead body. Thus, as Lycurgus never could return, the Spartans were bound by their oath to keep his laws for ever. 8. They did keep them during five hundred years ; and, all that time, the Spartans were a brave, patriotic, and powerful people. Many of their customs, however, belonged rather to a savage than a civilized nation. 9. Athens, had two celebrated lawgivers, Draco and Solon. The laws of Draco were so extremely severe that they were said to be written with blood, instead of ink. He punished even the smallest offences with death. His code was soon abolished. 10. Solon's laws were much milder. Almost all of them were wise and good laws, and would have been advantageous to the people. But the Athenians had so much fickleness and levity, that they were continually proposing alterations in them. 11. Athens was at this time a republic; which is, you know, a government carried on by persons chosen by the people ; but soon after Solon had made his laws, the supreme power was usurped by Pisistratus, an ambitious citizen. He and his sons ruled Athens fifty years. CHAPTER LII.-EUROPE CONTINUED, War with Persia. 1. About five centuries before the Christian era, Darius, king of Persia, made war against Greece. His generals invaded the country with a fleet of six hundred vessels, and half a million of men. There were scarcely any troops to oppose them, except ten thousand Athe- nians. 2. Darius felt so certain of conquering Greece, that he had sent great quantities of marble with his army. He intended that it should 5. How were they taught to abhor drunkenness ? C. What did Lycurgus make the Spar- tans swear before he went away? 7. What was the fate of the Spartan lawgiver? 8. How long did the Spartans keep his laws ? 9. What of Draco and Solon ? The laws of Draco? 10. What of Solon's laws ? The Athenians ? 11. What was the government of Athens? Who usurped the supreme power? What of the government of Athens I'or fifty years? Ch. LIT. — 1. When did Darius make war against Greece? What of the Persian force ? The Athenian? '2. What of marble ? What did Darius command ? EUROPE. 93 be carved into pillars and triumphal arches, and other trophies of vic- tory. He had also commanded his generals to send all the Athenians to Persia in chains. 3. The Athenian general was named Miltiades. He led his little army against the immense host of the Persians, and encountered them at Marathon. This was a small town on the seashore, about fifteen miles northeast of Athens. 4. While their countrymen were fighting, the aged people, the women, and children remained at Athens in the utmost anxiety. If Miltiades were to lose the battle, they knew that the Persians would chase his routed army into the city, and burn it to ashes. 5. Suddenly a soldier, covered with blood, ran into the market- place of the city. He was sorely wounded ; but he had come all the way from the army to bring the news. He was ghastly pale, and the people feared that the Persians had won the day, and that the soldier was a fugitive. 6. They gathered round him, eagerly asking about Miltiades and the army. The soldier leaned heavily upon his spear. He seemed too much exhausted to give utterance to the news he had brought. 7. But, exerting all his strength, he cried out, " Rejoice my coun- trymen ! The victory is ours !" And, with that exulting shout, he fell down dead. S. The Athenians showed themselves ungrateful to the brave Mil- tiades. All that he demanded as a reward for rescuing his native land from slavery, was a crown of olive leaves, which was esteemed a mark of honor among the Greeks. But they refused to give him one; and he was afterwards condemned, on some frivolous pretence, to pay a fine of fifty talents. As Miltiades had not so much money in the world, he perished in prison. 9. After the battle of Marathon, the Persians were driven out of Greece, and Darius died while he was preparing to invade the coun- try again. His son Xerxes renewed the war. In the history of Per- sia, I have already told of the invasion of Greece by Xerxes with two millions of men, and of the misfortunes which befell him there. CHAPTER LIII.-EUROPE CONTINUED. Affairs of Athens. 1. After the Persian war, Cimon, Aristides, and Pericles were the three principal men of Athens. Pericles at length became the chief person in the republic. Athens was never more flourishing than while he was at the head of the government. 2. Who was the Athenian general ? Where was Marathon ? 4. What of those who re- mained at Athens? 5. What messenger was sent from Marathon ? Which way is Mara- thon from Athens ? From Sparta ? 7. What news did the messenger bring? 8. How did the Atheniaiu treat Miltiades? His fate ? 0. What of the Persians after the battle of Marathon? What of Darius? Xerxes? What may you read in the history of Persia? Ch. LIII. — 1. Who were the three principal men of Athens? What of Pericles? 94 SCHOOL HISTORY. 2. He adorned the city with magnificent edifices &vd rendered it famous for learning, poetry, and beautiful works of art, such as tem- ples, statues, and paintings. But the Athenians were fickle, and gen- erally ungrateful to their public benefactors; and they sometimes ill treated Pericles. 3. In the latter part of his administration, a terrible plague broke out in Athens. Many of the citizens fell down and died, while pass- ing through the streets. Dead bodies lay in heaps, one upon another 4. The illustrious Pericles was one of the victims of this pestilence "When he lay at the point of death, his friends- praised him for the glorious deeds which he had achieved. " It is my greatest glory," replied Pericles, " that none of my acts have caused a citizen of Athens to put on mourning." 5. Three years before the death of Pericles, a Avar had commenced between Athens and Sparta. These were now the two principal states of Greece, and they had become jealous of each other's great- ness. A fierce war followed, in which all the states of that part of Greece called Peloponnesus were engaged. This bloody strife lasted twenty-eight years. 6. In the course of this war, Alcibiades made a conspicuous figure among the Athenians. He was the handsomest and most agreeable man in Athens. At one period he was greatly beloved by the people, and possessed almost unlimited power. But he was ambitious and destitute of principle. 7. He was the cause of much trouble, not only in his native city, but all over Greece. At last, when he had lost the good-will of every-body, he retired to a small village in Phrygia, in Asia Minor, and dwelt there with a woman named Timandra. 8. His enemies sent a party of assassins to murder him. These set fire to the house in which he lived. Alcibiades was a brave man, and he rushed out, sword in hand, to fight the assassins. But they stood at a distance, and pierced him through with javelins. They then went away, leaving Timandra 'to bury him. 9. The Peloponnesian war brought great misfortunes upon the Athenians. The Spartans conquered them, and burnt the city ; and while this work of destruction was going forward, the victors caused gay tunes of music to be played. 10. The Athenians were now placed under the government of thirty Spartan captains. These were called the Thirty Tyrants of Athens ; but they held their power only three years. Thrasybulus, a patriotic Athenian, then incited his countrymen to regain their freedom. 11. The thirty tyrants were expelled; and Thrasybulus was re- 2. What did he do for Athene? What was the general character of the Athenians? 8. What of the plague ? 4. What did Pericles say on his death-bed ? 5. What was begun three years before the death of Pericles ? What of Athens and Sparta ? How long did the Peloponnesian war last ? What part of Greece was called Peloponnesus? What states were included in the Peloponnesian? Ans. Arcadia, Laconia, Messenia, Elis, Argolis, Achaia, Sicyon, and Corinth. 6. What of Alcibiades ? 7. What happened to him ? 8. How did he die ? 9. What of the Peloponnesian war ? Sparta ? 10. What of the thirty tyrants? Thrasybulus? 11. How was he rewarded for expelling the thirty tyrants' What took place 403 B. C. ? GREECE. 95 warded with a wreath made of two twigs of an olive tree, which, as I have before said, was esteemed a great mark of honor. Athens again became prosperous, and its former government was restored in the year 403 before the Christian era. CHAPTER LIV.-EUROPE CONTINUED. Beginning of the Theban War. Greek warriors, with spears, javelins, shields, slings, and bows and arrows. 1. Not long after this period, Thebes became the most distinguish- ed city of Greece. It was the capital of the kingdom of Bceoiia. A war between Thebes and Sparta originated in the following manner. Pheebidas, a Spartan general, had wrongfully taken possession of Cadmaca, a fortress belonging to Thebes. The Thebans demanded that it should be given up ; but the Spartans garrisoned it strongly, and resolved to hold it as their own. 2. A brave and patriotic younir man of Thebes, named Pelopidas, contrived a scheme to get back the fortress. He and eleven compan- ions put on their breastplates, and girded their swords around them, but clothed themselves in women's garments over their armor. In this garb, they went to the gate of Cadmsea, and were admitted. Ch. LIV. — 1. What of Thebes? In what part of Greece was Bceotia ? How sky. 8. You would not therefore expect in their poetry to find any useful information about geography or astronomy. Yet they lived in a beau- tiful country, and their mountains, streams, and valleys were often the subject of their songs. 9. Their religion, too, though full of absurdity, furnished materals for the poets. They described the gods and goddesses as dwelling upon the mountains, or skipping aleng the valleys, or gliding amidst the waters. Thus every object of nature derived a new interest from the vivid fancy of the poets. 10. To this day the verses of these poets are remembered, and the places mentioned by them are often visited by travellers, who look upon them with emotion, on account of the beautiful fictions they inspired more than two thousand years ago. CHAPTER LX.— EUROPE CONTINUED. About the Mode of Life among the Ancient Greeks. 1. But we must now leave poets and philosophers, and take a view of the private life of the ancient Greeks. The men wore an inner garment called a tunic, over which they threw a mantle; their shoes or sandals were bound under their feet with thongs or ropes. In an- cient times the Greeks went with their heads uncovered, but after- wards they used hats which were tied under the chin. • 2. The women always covered their heads with a veil, which came down upon the shoulders. They wore in their hair golden grasshop- pers, and ear-rings were suspended from their ears. The rest of their C. What of Anacreon? Pindar? Theocritus? Other poets? 7. What (lid the Greeks not know? 8. What of the poetry of the ancient Greeks. 9. What use did the Grecian poets make of their mythology ? What effect had the poems of the ancient Greeks ? Aro the poems of the ancient Greeks still rememhered ? 10. Are the places mentioned iu these poems rendered more interesting to travellers of the present time who visit them? < H. LX. — 1. W T hat did the men wear among the ancient Greeks ? Their shoes ? Head- dress ? 3. Headdress of the women ? What ornaments did they wear? The rest of •heir d'fu ? GREECE. 105 dress consisted of a white tunic fastened with a broad sash, and de- scending in folds down to their heels. 3. The Greeks usually made four meals a day ; the morning meal, which was taken at the rising of the sun ; the next at mid-day; the afternoon repast, and the supper, which was the principal meal, as it was taken after the business of the day. Below I give you pictures of some of their vessels for water, which will show you that some articles of their furniture were very beautiful. Vases used by the Greeks for water. 4. In the early ages, the food of the Greeks was the fruits of the earth, and their drink water ; the flesh of animals was introduced at a later period. This brought on the luxuries of the table, and some of the cities of Greece became renowned for producing excellent cooks. The Spartans; as we have before mentioned, ate at public tables. Their chief food consisted of black broth. 5. The poor sometimes fed on grasshoppers, and the extremities of leaves. In general, the Greeks were very fond of flesh. Their usual drink was water, either hot or cold, but most commonly the latter, which was sometimes cooled with ice. Wines were very generally used, and even perfumed wines were introduced at the tables of the rich. 6. Before the Greeks went to an entertainment, they washed and anointed themselves; when they arrived, the entertainer took them y the hand, or kissed their lips, hands, knees, or feet, as they de- served more or less respect. It must be observed concerning the guests, that men and women were never invited together. 7. They sat at meat either quite upright, or leaning a little back- 3. The meals of the Greeks? 4. What was the food of the Greeks in early ages? What of flesh ? Luxuries of the table ? What of the Spartans? 5. What of the poor? Were the Greek* fond of meat for food ? What of their drink ? Wine? 6. What of en- tertainments ? Men and women ? 7. How did Ihey sit at table ? How do the people of Asia sit at table? Did the Greeks adopt this Asiatic custom ? What was done before bo ginning to eat? 106 SCHOOL HISTORY. ward ; but in more degenerate ages, they adopted the eastern custom of reclining on beds or couches. As soon as the provisions were set on the table, and before the guests began to eat, a part was offered as a sort of first-fruits to the gods. 8. They had a custom, similar to ours, of drinking healths, not only to those present, but to their absent friends ; and at every name they poured a little wine on the ground, which was called a libation. 9. Tbe entertainment being ended, a hymn was sung to the gods. After this, the company was amused with music, dancing, and mim- icry, or whatever could tend to excite mirth or cheerfulness. 10. The houses of the rich were built of stone, and many of them were highly ornamented. A large part of the people, however lived in huts made of rough stone laid in clay. 11. In war, the Greeks fought with various weapons. Some of the soldiers had bows and arrows ; some had javelins or spears, which they hurled with great force and precision of aim, and some had slings, with which they threw stones. They usually carried shields for warding off the weapons of their enemies. 12. You must recollect that in these ancient times, gun-powder was not known, and muskets and cannon were therefore not in use. In battle, the warriors often engaged in close conflict, foot to foot, and breast to breast. The strife was therefore very exciting, and the men usually fought with furious courage. 13. As mankind were very much given to making war upon one another, it was the custom in all countries to surround the cities with high walls for defence. This practice, indeed, continued for many ages, and if you ever go to Europe, you will see that the principal cities of France, Germany, and many other countries, are still secured in this way. 14. In modern times, when an army attacks a city it batters down the walls with cannon shot, or by undermining them, placing gun- powder beneath, and then setting it on fire. But in the olden times of Greece, the warriors used battering rams, consisting of heavy beams with ponderous stones at one end. These were driven by main strength against the walls, and thus, after many efforts, they were demolished. CHAPTER LXL— EUROPE CONTINUED. Philip of Macedon conquers Greece. 1. 1 shall now resume the history of Greece, at the point where 1 left off. The reader will recollect that I had just finished speaking of the Theban war. 8. Drinking healths? Libation ? 9. What followed the eating? 10. What of the habitations of the rich ? Of the poor? 11. What weapons were used by the Greeks in war? 13. What of gunpowder? How did the warriors cDgage one another in conflict? 13. What was the custom regarding cities? What are to he seen in Europe? 14. How •Jo the moderns attack a walled city ? How did the ancients destroy the walls of a city? GREECE. 107 2. Not long after the close of that war, the states of Greece became iwolved in another, which was generally called the Sacred War The people of Phocis had been sentenced, by the Amphyctionic coun- cil, to pay a heavy fine for ploughing a field which belonged to the temple of Apollo, at Delphos. 3. Rather than pay the fine, the Phocians resolved to go to war. The people of Athens, Sparta, and Achaia assisted the Phocians. The Thebans, Locrians, and Thessalians took the part of the Am- phyctionic council, and Philip, king of Macedon, was solicited to figlu on the same side. 4. The kingdom of Macedon is numbered by some histoviacs among the states of Greece ; but others consider it a separate coun- try. Although it was founded about five hundred years before this period, it had never been very powerful till Philip mounted the throne. 5. Philip was ambitious and warlike. No sooner had he marched his army into Greece, than he determined to make himself ruler of the whole country. The Greeks were not now so valiant as they had been ; and there were no such men as Leonidas, Miltiades, or Epaminondas, to lead them to victory. 6. The man that gave Philip more trouble than any other, was Demosthenes, an Athenian. He was one of the most eloquent ora- tors that ever lived; and he uttered such terrible orations against Philip, that the Athenians were incited to resist him in battle. It is from these orations against the Macedonian king that severe speeches have since been called -philippics. 7. But the Athenians were beaten at Cheronea, in the year 338 before the Christian era. Thenceforward, Philip controlled the af- fairs of Greece, till his death. Perhaps, after all, he was a better ruler than the Greeks could have found among themselves. 8. But he had many vices, and among the rest, that of drinking to excess. One day, just after he had risen from a banquet, he decided a certain law-case unjustly. The losing person cried out, " I appeal from Philip drunk, to Philip sober !" And, sure enough, when Philip got sober, he decided the other way. 9. A poor woman, who had some business with Philip, tried in vain to obtain an audience. He put her off from one day to another, saying that he had no leisure to attend to her. " If you have no leisure to do justice, you have no right to be king !" said the woman. Philip was struck with the truth of what the woman said, and he became more attentive to the duties of a king. 10. He lived only about two years after he had conquered the Greaks. There was a young nobleman named Pausanias, a captain Ch. I.XI. — 2. What of the Sacred war? Cause of it? 3. What states fought on the »iae of the Phocians? What on the side of the Amphyctionic council? On which lide did Philip, king of Macedon, fight ? 4. What of Macedon ? Where was it situated ? When was it founded ? Which way did Philip's army march from Macedon to Greece ? What of Philip? (in what did he determine? What of the Greeks at this time ? 6. ? r hat of Demosthenes ? What effect had his oratory on the Athenians ? What is the ori- gin of the word philippic! 7. Where were they beaten? When did the battle taka place? Where \y I heronea? Direction from Thebes? Athens? Sparta? How long did Philip rule Greece ? 8. What of Philip ? Relate some anecdotes of him ? 1C8 SCHOOL HISTORY. of the guard, who had been injured by one of Philip's relations. Aa Philip would not punish the offender, Pausanias resolved that he him- self should die. 11. On the day of the marriage of Philip's daughter, the king was entering the public theatre, where the nuptial festivities were to be celebrated. At this moment Pausanias rushed forth, with his sword drawn, and stabbed him to the heart. 12. The Athenians greatly rejoiced at the news of Philip's death. They publicly voted that a golden crown should be given to Pausa- nias, as a reward for having murdered him. All the other states of Greece likewise revolted against the power of Macedon. CHAPTER LXII.-EUROPE CONTINUED. Conquests of Alexander the Great. 1. But the new king of Macedon, though only twenty years old, was well worthy to sifon his father's throne. He was Alexander, afterwards surnamed the Great. Young as he was, he had already given proofs of the valor which so soon made him conqueror of the world. 2. Alexander subdued the Grecian states in the course of one cam- paign. He was then declared generalissimo of the Greeks, and un- to. What of Pausanias ? Describe the death of Philip ? 12. What did the Athenians do ? Other states ? Ch. LXIL— 1. Who was the new king of Macedon? Of what had he riven prools? 2. After what exploit was Alexander declared generalissimo of the Greeks? What ol the army which he led against Persia ? Which way is Persia from Macedon ? GREECE. 109 rfertook a war aarains'. Persia. The army which he led against that country consisted of thirty-five thousand men. 3. He crossed the Hellespont, and marched through Asia Minor towards Persia. Before reaching its borders, he was met by the Per- sian king, Darius, who had collected an immense army. Alexander defeated him, and killed a hundred and ten thousand of his soldiers. 4. Darius soon assembled a mightier army than before. He had now half a million of men. He advanced to battle in the midst of his troops, seated on a lofty chariot, which resembled a moving throne. Around him we?e his life-guards, all in splendid armor. 5. But when the Persians saw how boldly the Macedonian horse- men advanced, they took to flight. Poor king Darius was left almost alone on his lofty chariot. He had but just time to get on horseback, and gallop away from the battle. Shortly afterwards, he was slain by two of his own subjects, as I have told you in the history of Persia. 6. After the victory, Alexander marched to Persepolis, which was then the capital of Persia. It was a rich and magnificent city. In the royal palace, there was a gigantic statue of Xerxes, but the Ma- cedonian soldiers overthrew it, and tumbled it upon the ground. 7. While he remained at Persepolis, Alexander gave himself up to drunkenness and licentious pleasures. One night, at a splendid ban- quet, an Athenian lady persuaded the conqueror to set fire to the city. It was accordingly burnt to the ground. S. When Persia was completely subdued, Alexander invaded In- dia, now Hindostan. One of the kings of that country was named Porus. He is said to have been seven feet and a half in height. This gigantic king led a great army against Alexander. 9. Porus was well provided with elephants, which had been trained to rush upon the enemy, and trample them down. Alexan- der had no elephants, but his usual good fortune did not desert him. The army of Porus was routed, and he himself was taken prisoner, and loaded with chains. 10. In this degraded condition, the Indian king was brought into the victor's tent. Alexander gazed with wonder at the enormous stature of Porus. Although so great a conqueror, he was himself only of middle size. "How shall I treat you?" asked Alexandex of his prisoner. " Like a king !" said Porus. This answer led Alex- ander to reflect how he himself should like to be treated, had he been in a similar situation; and he was induced to behave generously to Torus. 3. What sea and cour.tr)' did the army cross to reach Persia ? Who opposed Alexander? How many of Darius's army were killed ? 4. Describe the march of Darius and his half million of troops. 5. What became of Darius? G Where did Alexander go alter lu's vic- tory? Where was Perjepolis? Direction from Athens ? What of the statue of Xerxes? 7. What happened at Persepolis ? 8. What country did Alexander next invade? Direc- tion of India from Greece ? Persia? What of Porus? 9. What animals had Porus in his army.* Who conouered? What became of Porus? 10. Describe the meeting be- tween Alexander and Porus. 10 HO SCHOOL HISTORY. CHAPTER LXIII.— EUROPE CONTINUED. Sequel of Alexander's career. 1. In the early part of his career, Alexander had shown many ex« cellent and noble traits of character. But he met with such great and continual success in all his undertakings, that his disposition was ruined by it. He began to consider himself the equal of the gods. 2. Yet so far was Alexander from being a god, that some of his actions were unworthy of a man. One of his worst deeds was the murder of Clitus, an old officer who had fought under king Philip. He had once saved Alexander's life in battle; and on this account he was allowed to speak very freely to him. 3. One night, after drinking too much wine, Alexander began to speak of his own exploits ; and he spoke more highly of them than old Clitus thought they deserved. Accordingly, he told Alexander that his father Philip had done much greater things than ever he had done. 4. The monarch was so enraged, that he snatched a spear from one of his attendants, and gave Clitus a mortal wound. But when he saw the old man's bloody corpse extended on the floor, he was seized with horror. He had murdered the preserver of his own life ! 5. Alexander's remorse, however, did not last long. He still in- sisted on being a god, the son of Jupiter Ammon ; and he was mor- tally offended with a philosopher named Callisthenes, because he re- "used to worship him. For no other crime, Callisthenes was put into an iron cage, and tormented, till he killed himself in despair. 6. After Alexander's return from India to Persia, he met with a great misfortune. It was the loss of his dearest friend, Hephestion, who died of a disease which he had contracted by excessive drink- ing. For three days afterwards, Alexander lay prostrate on the ground, and would take no food. 7. He erected a funeral pile of spices and other precious materials, so that it was as costly as a palace would have been. The lifeless body of Hephestion was placed on the summit. Alexander then set fire to the pile, and stood mournfully looking on while the corpse of his friend was consumed to ashes. 8. It would have been well if he had taken warning by the fate of Hephestion. But Alexander the Great was destined to owe his de- struction to the wine-cup. While drinking at a banquet in Babylon, he was suddenly taken sick ; and death soon conquered the con- queror. 9. As to the merits of Alexander, I pretty much agree with a cer- Ch. LXIII. — 1. What of Alexander? What ruined his disposition ? How did he con- sider himself ? 2. What of the actions of Alexander ? Who was Clitus? 3.4. Give an account of the murder of Clitus. 5. What did Alexander insist upon being called? What of Calistlienes ? 6. What of Hephestion ? What was the cause of his death ? 7. What did Alexander do with the body of Hephestion? 8. What caused Alexander's death? Where did he die? Where is Babylon? Direction from Macedon? India? 9. Tell the story of the pirate. GREECE. HI tain pirate, whom the Macedonian soldiers once took prisoner. Al- exander demanded of this man by what right he committed his robberies. "lama robber by the same right that you are a con- queror,' 1 was the reply. " The only difference between us is, that I have but a few men, and can do but little mischief; while you have a large army, and cau do a great deal !" 10. It must be confessed that this is the chief difference between conquerors and robbers. Yet, when Alexander died, his body was deposited in a splendid coffin, at Alexandria, in Egypt, and the Egyp- tians paid him divine honors, as if he had been the greatest possible benefactor to the world. CHAPTER LXIV.— EUROPE CONTINUED. Greece invaded by the Gauls. 1. "When Alexander lay on his death-bed, his attendants asked to whom he would bequeath the empire, which now extended from Greece to India, including a great many nations. His answer was, " To the most worthy." 2. But there appears to have been no very worthy man among those whom he left behind him ; and even if there had been, the unworthy ones would not have consented to yield him the whole power. Alexander's empire was therefore divided among thirty- three of his chief officers. 3. But the most powerful of these officers were determined to have more than their share ; and in the year 312, before Christ, four of them had got possession of the whole. Alexander had then been dead eleven years. All his children and relatives had been destroyed by his ambitious officers. ■ 4. The Greeks, when they heard of Alexander's death, had at- tempted to regain their liberty. But their struggles were unsuccess- ful ; and the country was reduced to subjection by Cassander, who had been general of Alexander's cavalry. Cassander died in a few years. Thenceforward, the history of Greece tells of nothing but crimes and revolutions, and misfortunes. 5. In the year 278 before the Christian era, the Gauls invaded Greece. They were a barbarous people, who inhabited the country now called France. Their general's name wasBrennus; and their numbers are said to have been a hundred and sixty-five thousand men. 6. Brennus met with hardly any opposition. He marched to Del- phos, intending to steal the treasures that were contained in the fa- 10. Wliat was done when Alexander died ? Ch. LXIV. — 1. What was asked Alexander on li is death-bed ? His reply? 2. How was the empire divided ? 3. What took place in the year 812 B. C? What of Alexander's children and relatives? 4. Who put Greece under subjection ? Who was Cassander? What of the history of Greece after his death ? 6. When did the Gauls invade Greece ? Who was their general ? What of their army ? 6. Where was Delphos? Direction from Athens? Sparta? Thebes? What famous torn pie wan at Delphoi ? SCHOOL HISTORY. mous temple of Apollo. " A deity, like Apollo, does not warn these treasures," said Brennus. " I am only a man, and have great need of them." 7. Accordingly, he led his barbarians towards the temple. The stately marble front of the edifice was seen at a short distance before them. It was considered the holiest spot in Greece. Here was the mysterious oracle, from which so many wonderful prophecies had issued. S. A wild shout burst from the army of the Gauls, and they wef on the point of rushing forward to the temple. But suddenly a vio- lent storm arose. The thunder roared, and the wind blew furiously. At the same moment a terrible earthquake shook the ground beneath the affrighted Gauls. 9. A band of Greeks had assembled, to fight in defence of the tem- ple. When they saw the disorder of the barbarians, they attacked them, sword in hand. It had grown so dark that the Gauls could not distinguish friends from foes. They killed one another, and the whole army was destroyed. 10. Such is the story Avhich the old historians tell about this bat- tle ; it is doubtless much exaggerated, for some of the particulars ap- pear hardly credible. But, at any rate, this was the last great victory that the ancient Greeks ever achieved over their enemies. CHAPTER LXV.— EUROPE CONTINUED. End of Grecian Independence. 1. The Greeks had now almost entirely lost their love of liberty, as well as the other virtues which had formerly distinguished them. In proof of this, I will relate the story of Agis, the young king of Sparta. 2. King Agis was anxious for the welfare of Sparta, and he greatly desired to restore the ancient laws which Lycurgus had enacted. But the Spartans were now vicious and cowardly. They hated the very name of Lycurgus, and resolved not to be governed by his severe laws. 3. They therefore seized the virtuous young king, and dragged him to prison. He was condemned to death. The executioner shed tears at the moment when he was going to kill him. " Do not weep for me," said Agis; " I am happier than my murderers." 4. A little while after A^is was killed, his mother and grandmother came to the prison to see him, for they had not heard of his death. They were led into his dungeon ; and the murderers of Agis immedi- ately strangled them both, and threw their dead bodies upon his. 7. Describe the march towards the temple. 8. What affrighted the Gauls? 9. What of the Greeks? How were the Gauls destroyed? 10. What may be said of this victory over the Gauls ? Ch. LXV. — 1. What of the Greeks ? 2. Who was Agis ? What did ha desire? What of the Spartans? 3. What did they do to Agis? Describe his death, 4. What of the mother and grandmother of Agis ? GREECE. 113 5. Some time after this horrible event, the Spartans had a king called Nabis. He was such a cruel monster, that Heaven seemed to have made him a king only for the punishment of the people's wick- edness. Nabis had an image in his palace. It resembled his own wife, and was very beautiful; it was likewise clothed with magnifi- cent garments, such as were proper for the queen to wear. But the breast and arms of the image were stuck full of sharp iron spikes. 6. These, however, were hidden by the rich clothes. When king Nabis wished to extort money from any person, he invited him to his palace, and led him up to the image. No sooner was the stranger within reach, than the image put out its arms and squeezed him close to its breast. 7. This was done by means of machinery. The poor man might strugsle as hard as he pleased ; but he could not possibly get away from the cruel embrace of the statue. There he remained, with the iron spikes sticking into his flesh, until his agony compelled 1 him to give Nabis as much money as he asked for. 8. When such enormities were committed by the kings of Greece, it was time that the country should be governed hy other masters. My readers will not be sorry to hear that this soon happened. One hundred and forty-six years before the Christian era, Greece submit- ted to the authority of Rome. 9. Thus I have given you a very brief account of ancient Greece. Its history is full of interest, and full of instruction. I hope you will hereafter read the whole story, in some larger work than mine. CHAPTER LXVL— EUROPE CONTINUED. Modem History of Greece. 1. From this time forward, the history of Greece is connected with that of other nations. The Greeks had no longer any power, even in their own native country. But they were still respected, on ac- count of the poets, and historians, and sculptors, who appeared amon^ them. 2. But, in course of time, the genius of the Greeks seemed to have deserted them, as well as their ancient valor. They were then wholly despised. I have not space to relate any of the events that occurred to them while they were governed by the Romans. 3. Between three and four hundred years after the Christian era, the Roman dominions were divided into the Eastern and Western empires. The capital of the Eastern empire was Constantinople. The territory of ancient Greece was included under this government, and it was sometimes called the Greek empire. 6. What of Nabis? Describe the image. U. What did Nabis do. when he wanted to ex. tort money out of any one ? 9. When was Greece conquered by the Romans ? Cm. LXVI 1. What of the Greeks? Why were they rcsnecledf 2. What happened in course of time ? 3. When were the Roman dominions divided? 1U* 114 SCHOOL HISTORY. 4. Above a thousand years elapsed, and nothing happened of such importance that it need be told in this brief history. Hut, about the year 1450, the Turks invaded the Eastern empire of the Romans. Greece then fell beneath their power. During almost four centuries, the Greeks were treated by the Turks like slaves. 5. At last, in the year 1821, they rebelled against the tyranny of the Turks. A war immediately broke out. It continued a long time, and was carried on with the most shockinp; cruelty on both sides. 6. Many people from other countries went to assist the Greeks. The ancient renown of Greece made friends of all who were ac- quainted with her history. Lord Byron, the illustrious English poet, lost his life in Greece,_for the sake of this famous land. 7. The Turks are a fierce people, and they resolved not to give up the country./'The Greeks, on the other hand, determined either to drive away^their oppressors, or to die. But they would not have suc- ceeded^ff England, France, and Russia had not taken their part. 8. The fleets of these three nations formed a junction off the coast of Greece. They were all under the command of the English admi- ral Sir Edward Codrington. In October, 1827, they attacked a Tur- kish fleet of more than two hundred vessels, in the bay of Navarino. 9. The Turks were entirely beaten, and their vessels were sunk or burned. In consequence of their losses in this battle, they were una- ble to continue the war. Greece was therefore evacuated by the Turks. 10. But as the Greeks were not considered entirely fit to govern themselves, a king was selected for them, by England, France, and Russia. The new king was a young man of eighteen, named Otho. He was placed on the throne in the year 1829. This is the latest re- markable event in the history of Greece. CHAPTER LXVII. -EUROPE CONTINUED. About Italy as it now is. 1. Italy is a strip of land on the south of Europe, extending into the Mediterranean Sea. It is fancied to have the shape of a boot, the island of Sicily lying at the toe. It has a beautiful climate, the seasons of spring and summer seeming always to prevail. 2. If you were to go to this country, you would be charmed with the beaut}' of the sky, and the balmy softness of the air. You would 4. What happened about 1450 ? Into whose power did the Greeks then fall ? How were they treated? 5. What took place in 1821? 6. Who assisted the Greeks? Why did Greece find so many friends? What of Byron? 7. What of the Turks? The Greeks? Who took part with Greece ? 8. Who commanded the combined lleet of England, France, »nd Russia? When did they attack the Turks? 9. Wiat of the Turks' Were they obliged [o leave Greece ? 10. Who chose a king for the Greeks? What is his name ? Wlien did he come to the throne? Ch. LXVII. — I. What is Italy' Its shape ? Where is Sicily 1 Climate of Italy? i. What of the air and sky in Italy? What of Grapes? Wine . 116. SCHOOL HISTORY, find grapes so abundant that you could buy a delicious bunch, as largw as you could eat, for a cent ; and if you wished for wine, you could get a bottle for two cents. Inhabitants of modern Italy. 3. You would find, in short, that Italy abounds in pleasant fruits, and in every species of production required for the comfort of man. You Avould find the people, men, women, and children, living a great part of the time in the open air, often singing, and sometimes dancing in groups beneath the trees. 4. But, in the midst of these signs of cheerfulness, you would ob- serve a great deal of poverty, and you would soon discover that many of the people are indolent, vicious, and degraded. 5. In the cities, many of which are large, and filled with thousands of people, you may notice costly churches and splendid palaces, many of them built of marble. But still every tiling around you would bear an aspect of decay, and impress you with the idea that Italy, with all its splendor, is an unhappy country. 6. At Florence, Rome, Naples, and other large cities, you would find collections of pictures and statues, which surpass in beauty every thing of the kind in the world. These pictures are the works of fa- mous artists, who have lived in Italy within the last five hundred years. 7. The statues are the productions of sculptors, who have lived at various periods within the last two thousand years. Some of them, ndeed, are supposed to have been executed by Grecian artists, who ived in the time of Pericles. 8. But in all Italy there is nothing that will excite so much inte- rest as the ruins of ancient Rome, many of which are still to be seen in the modern city. These, like the ancient remains of Egypt and 3. Fruits? Other productions ? The people ? 4. What would you discover after i:i- omining the people of Italy carefully ? 5. What of the cities? 6. 7. What ofpictuiet aad statues ? 8. What of the ruins of Rome ? ITALY. 117 Greece, would delight you with their beauty, and astonish you oy ♦heir grandeur and magnificence. 9. The most remarkable edifice of modern times to be found in Italy, is the church of St. Peter's at Rome, the height of which is nearly five hundred feet. Near this is the Vatican, a famous palace . inhabited by the pope, who reigns over Koine and the country around, j like a king. 10. If you were to go to Naples, you would see at the distance of a few miles a famous mountain called Vesuvius, from which smoke, name, and torrents of melted lava have periodically issued for ages. Sometimes whole towns and cities in the neighborhood have been bu- ried beneath the burning masses. 11. If you were to go to Sicily, you would find another volcanic mountain called Etna, which also pours out, from time to time, im- mense volumes of smoke, fire, and lava. Yet on the very sides of these mountains the people dwell in thickly settled villages, and here you will find rich vineyards, beautiful gardens, and groves of figs, oranges, and olives. 12. Having visited Italy, you will return to America with many wonderful tales to tell of this famous peninsula that lies in the shape of a boot in the Mediterranean Sea; but you will still be contented and happy to settle down in your native country, where beggars are seldom seen, where poverty and wretchedness are rare, and where every thing speaks of prosperity. 13. You may remember with admiration the desolate ruins of Rome, the marble palaces of Florence and Naples, but you would not wish to live w r here even these splendid edifices oppress the heart with gloom. You would much rather live among the more cheerful and thriving villages and towns of our own country. The truth is that Italy has been badly governed for ages, and the people have be- come indolent and vicious. Let us hope that they will yet become more worthy of the beautiful country they inhabit. CHAPTER LXVIII.-EUROPE CONTINUED. Founding of Rome by Ronndus. Its early State. 1. I shall now proceed to tell you the history of Rome, the most celebrated empire of antiquity. Like the history of all ancient coun- tries, it abounds in tales of battle, bloodshed, injustice, and crime. Over such horrid scenes I should be glad to draw a veil; but these things have really happened, and it is the duty of the faithful story- teller to hide nothing which is necessary to give a true picture of what he undertakes to exhibit. 9. What of St. Peter's? The Vatican? The pone? 10. What of Vesuviu.- ? 11. What of Etna r Where is the island of Sicily? li- With what feelings would you re- turn to America after visiting Italy? Ch. LXVIII. — 1. What of the empire of Rome ' What of its history ? 118 SCHOOL HI STORY. Map of Italy. artivento\ •;±J.ra.s$aro 8|5 ToTLJast iVom. -WashmjjioTL. oil '""" 9]3 Questions on the Map — Boundaries of Italy? Tell the direction of the following places from Rome:— Africa; Sicily; Sardinia; Savoy; Naples; Tuscany; Switzerland; Malta; Tunis; Car- thago; Turin; Austria. ROME. no 2. The famous city of Rome stands on the river Tiber, in Italy. Its distance from the sea is about sixteen miles. It is supposed to have been founded by Romulus, in the year 752 B. C. Romulus was the captain of about three thousand banditti, or outlaws. These men built some huts on a hill called the Palatine, and enclosed them with a wall. This was the origin of the most famous city the world ever saw. 3. It is said that this wall was so low, that Remus, the brother of Romulus, leaped over it. " Do you call this the wall of a city ?' cried he, contemptuously. Romulus was so enraged, that he struck his brother dead ; and this was the first blood that bedewed the walls of Rome. 4. When Romulus and his fellow robbers were comfortably settled in their new houses, they found themselves in want of wives. At this time, Italy was inhabited by many rude tribes. Among these were the Sabines, who lived in the neighborhood of Rome. These would not allow their young women to marry the Romans; but Ro- mulus contrived a scheme to get wives by force. 5. He invited the whole Sabine people to witness some games and sports. Accordingly, the Sabines came; and, as they suspected no mischief, they brought almost all the marriageable young women in the country. 6. At first, the Sabines were highly delighted with the feats of strength and agility, which were performed by the Romans to enter- tain them. But, in a little while, Romulus gave a signal ; and all his men drew their swords, and rushed among the peaceable spectators. 7. The Sabines were of course taken by surprise, and could make no resistance. Each of the Romans caught up the prettiest young woman he could find, and carried her away. There was no longer any scarcity of wives in Rome. 8. This outrageous act of violence caused a war between the Ro- mans and Sabines. The latter mustered a large army, and would probably have exterminated Romulus and his banditti. But when they were about to engage in battle, the young wives of the Romans rushed into the field. 9. They besought the two hostile parties to make peace. They said that whichever side might gain the victory, it would bring nothing but sorrow to them ; for, if the Sabines should conquer, their husbands must lose their lives ; or if the Romans should win the day, their kindred would perish. 10. Both parties were much moved by these entreaties. The Sa- bines saw that the young women had become attached to their hus- bands; and therefore it would be a pity to separate them, even if it could be done without bloodshed. In short, the matter ended peace- 2. On what river is Rome ? How far is it from the sea ? When and by whom was it founded? Who was Romulus? What did the outlaws do ? What is the origin of Rome? 3. What happened between Romulus and Remus? 4. Of what did Romulus and hi> men feel the want ? What of the Sabines? 5. Give au account of the carrying oil" of the Sabine women. 8. What did this act cause ? Hew was the war prevented? 9. What did the young wives of the Romaas say ? 10. What effect had their entreaties? 120 SCHOOL HISTORY. ably, and an alliance, which you know is a friendly treaty, was formed. ] 1. The first government of Rome consisted of a king and senate- Romulus was chosen king, and reigned thirty-seven years. There are different accounts of the way in which his reign terminated. 12. Some historians pretend that, while Romulus sat in the senate, house giving wise instructions in regard to matters of state, the hall was suddenly darkened by an eclipse of the sun. When the sun shone out again, the chair of Romulus was perceived to be empty ; and it was said he had been taken up into heaven. 13. Others say, that Romulus attempted to make himself a tyrant, and that therefore the senators pulled him down from his chair of state and tore him in pieces. This story appears more probable than the former. At all events, king Romulus suddenly disappeared, and was never seen again in the city which he had founded. CHAPTER LXIX.— EUROPE CONTINUED. Battle of Horatii and Curiatii. 1. The second tking of Rome was Numa Pompilius. He was a wise and good king, and a great lover of peace. He spent forty-three years in making excellent laws, and instructing the people in agricul- ture and other useful arts. 2. The peaceful Numa was succeeded by Tullus Hostilius. He was a warlike monarch. During his reign the Romans engaged in hostilities with the Albans, who inhabited a neighboring city. 3. It was agreed that the war should be decided by a battle be- tween three champions on each side. In the army of the Albans there were three brothers, each named Curiatius; and in the Roman army there were likewise three by the name of Horatius. 4. These Horatii and Curiatii were fixed upon as the champions. They fought in an open plain ; and on each side stood the ranks of armed warriors, with their swords sheathed, anxiously watching the combat. 5. At first it seemed as if the Curiatii were going to win the vic- tory. It is true they were all three wounded ; but two of the Horatii lay dead upon the field. The other Horatius was still unhurt. He appeared determined not to perish like his two brothers; for he was seen to turn and flee. At the flight of their champion, the Romans groaned with shame and despair; for if he should lose the battle, they were all to be made slaves. 6. The three Curiatii pursued the fugitive. But their wounds had 11. What of the first government of Rome ? Who was chosen king, and how long did he reign ? 12. What do some historians pretend? 13. What do others say? Chap. LXIX.— 1. Who was the second king of Rome ? What of him ? 2. What of Tullus Hos- tilius f 3. How was the war hetween the Romans and Albans to he decided? Who were the Horatii and Curiatii ? 4. o. Describe the war between these combatants. Who fletl Irom the battle ? 6. What did the three Curiatii do ? What of Horatius ? ROME. 121 rendered them feeble. They staggered along, one behind the other, so that they were separated by considerable distances. This was what Horatius desired. Though he could not have beaten all three together, he was more than a match for them singly. 7. He now turned fiercely upon the foremost, and slew him. Then he encountered the second, and smote him dead in a moment. The third met with the same fate. The Alban army now turned pale,, and dropped their weapons on the field ; for they had lost their free- dom. The exulting Romans greeted Horatius with shouts of triumph. He returned towards Rome amid a throng of his countrymen, all of whom hailed him as their benefactor. But as he entered the city, he met a young woman wringing her hands in an agony of grief. This was his sister. She Avas in love with one of the Curiatii, and when she saw Horatius, she shrieked aloud, and reproached him bitterly for having slain her lover. 9. The victor still held the bloody sword with Avhich he had killed the three Alban champions. His heart was still fierce with the frenzy of the combat. He could not bear that his sister should be- wail one of the dead enemies, instead of her two dead brothers; noi that she should darken his triumph with her reproaches. Accordingly, in the frenzy of the moment, he stabbed her to the heart. 10. Horatius was condemned to die for this dreadful crime; but he was afterwards pardoned, because his valor had won for Rome such a great deliverance. But the disgrace of his guilt was far more than the honor of his victory. CHAPTER LXX.— EUROPE CONTINUED. From the Reign of Ancus Martins, till the Erpulsion of the Kings. « 1. After the death of Tullus Hostilius, the Romans elected Ancus Martius to be king. He was succeeded by Tarquin the Elder, whose father had been a rich mercbant. The next king was Servius Tul- lius. When Servius had reigned forty-four years, he was murdered by Tarquin, his son-in-law, who was ambitious of being king. 2. Tullia, the wife of Tarquin and daughter of Servius, rejoiced at her father's death, for she wished to be queen. She rode out in her chariot in order to congratulate her wicked husband. In one of the streets through which the chariot was to pass, lay the dead body of the poor old king. The coachman saw it, and was desirous of turn- ing back. " Drive on !" cried the wicked Tullia. 7. What was tlie fate of the Curiatii? 8. How was Horatius greeted ? What of hi* iister? 9. Whydid Horatius kill her ? 10. What of Horatius? Why was lie pardoned? Ch LXX.— 1. Who was king after Tullus Hostilius? Who next? Who killed Ser- vius Tullus? 2. 3. What of Tullia ? Describe her wicked act. 11 122 SCHOOL HISTORY. 3. The coachman did so; and as the street was too narrow to per* mit him to turn out, the chariot passed directly over the murdered king. But Tullia rode on without remorse, although the wheels were stained with her father's blood. 4. Her husband now ascended the throne, and was called Tarquin the Proud. The Ptomans abhorred him, for he was a hateful tyrant. Several almost incredible stories are told respecting his reign. 5. One day, it is said, that a woman of singular aspect entered the king's presence, bringing nine large books in her arms. No one knew whence she came, nor what was contained in her books. She re- quested the king to buy them. But the price was so high, that Tar- quin refused ; especially as he did not know what the books were about. 6. The unknown woman went away and burnt three of her books. She then came back, and again offered the remaining ones to Tar- quin. But she demanded as much money for the six as she had be- fore asked for the whole nine ; and Tarquin of course refused to buy tlhem. 7. The woman went away a second time. But shortly afterwards she was again seen entering the palace. She had now only three volumes left ; and these she offered to the king at the same price which she had before asked for the whole nine. 8. There was something so strange and mysterious in all this, that Tarquin concluded to give the woman her price. She put the three volumes into his hands, and immediately disappeared. 9. The books were found to be the oracles of a sibyl, or prophetess. They were therefore looked upon with superstitious reverence, and were preserved in Rome during many ages; and in all difficult and perplexing cases, the rulers looked into these old volumes, and read, as they supposed, the secrets of their country's fate 10. The above story is probably a fable. So also is that of the dis- covery of a man's head, while the workmen were digging the foun- dation of the temple of Jupiter. Yet the Romans firmly believed that a human head was found there under the earth, and that it looked as fresh as if just cut off. 11. When Tarquin the Proud had reigned more than twenty years, he and his family were driven out of Rome by the people. This event was brought about by the wickedness of his son Sextus, whose conduct had caused a noble Roman lady to commit suicide. Her name was Lucretia. 12. The expulsion of the Tarquins took place in the year 509 be- fore the Christian era. The Romans never had another king. Be- sides the senate, the government now consisted of two magistrates called consuls, who were chosen every year. Brutus and Collatinus were the first. 13. Brutus gave a terrible example of his justice and patriotism. 4. What was Tarquin called ? What of him ? 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. What strange story can you (ell of him/ 10. What of a man's head ? 11. How long did Tarquin reign ? What of him and his family ? What of Sextus ? 12. What took place 509 B. C. ? How long from the founding of Rome to the dealh of her last king? What of the government of Rome after the Tarquins i Who were the first consuls ? 13. What act did Brutus perform ' ROME. 123 His two sons had engaged in a conspiracy to make Tarquin king again. Brutus, who was a judge when they were brought to trial, condemned them both to death, and had them executed in his presence. CHAPTER LXXI.— EUROPE CONTINUED. The Story of Coriolanus. 1. Acts of heroism were common among the Romans, in those days. A young man, named Mutius'Scsevola, gained great credit for his fortitude. He had been taken prisoner by the troops of the king of Etruria, or Tuscany, who was at war with Rome. Porsenna threatened to torture him, unless he would betray the plans of the Roman general. 2. A tire was burning close beside the prisoner. He immediately put his hand into the midst of the flames, and held it there till it was burnt off. By this act, he showed Porsenna that no tortures could induce him to turn traitor. 3. Almost from the first foundation of Rome, the inhabitants had been divided into two classes; one called patricians, and the other plebeians. The senate and most of the rich men were included among the patricians. The consuls were also chosen from this class. 4. Thus the patricians had nearly all the power in their hands. This caused frequent quarrels between them and the common people, or plebeians. But at length it was ordained that five magistrates, called tribunes, should be annually chosen by the plebeians. 5. These tribunes took away a great deal of power from the patri- cians, and were therefore hated by them. Coriolanus, a valiant, but proud patrician, endeavored to have the office of the tribunes abolish- ed. But they were more powerful than he, and succeeded in procur- ing his banishment. 6. Coriolanus left the city, and went to the territories of the Volsci, who were bitter enemies of the Romans. There he gathered a large army, and advanced to besiege Rome. His countrymen were greatly alarmed when they heard that the banished Coriolanus was return- ing so soon, and in so terrible a manner. 7. They therefore sent an embassy to meet him, consisting of the oldest senators. But these venerable men could make no impression on Coriolanus. Next came an embassy of priests ; but they met with no better success. 8. Coriolanus still marched onward, and pitched his tent within a short distance of the Roman walls. He was gazing towards the city, Ch. LXXI. — 1. 2. Relate the anecdote of Muiius Scaevola. 3. What two classes were there in Rome? What of the class of the patricians? Who were the plebeians? 4. What caused uuarrela between the patricians and plebeians ? From which class were the tribunes chosen? 5. What of the tribunes ? 11 124 SCHOOL HISTORY. and planning an attack for the next day, when a third embassy ap- peared. It was a mournful procession of Roman ladies. 9. At their head walked Veturia, who was the mother of Coriola- nus; and Vergilia, his wife, was also there, leading his children by the hand. When they drew near, his mother knelt down at hisfeet, and besought him not to be the ruin of his native city. 10. Coriolanus strove to resist her entreaties, as he had resisted thos-; of the senators and priests. But though his heart had been proud and stubborn against them, it was not so against his mother. 11. "Mother," cried he, "I yield! You have saved Rome, but you have destroyed your son !" And so it proved ; for the Volsci were enraged at his retreat from Rome, and they murdered him at Antium. CHAPTER LXXII.-EUROPE CONTINUED. Rome invaded by the Gauls. The first Punic War. 1. In process of time, the Roman government underwent various changes. The will of the plebeians had far greater influence than the will of the patricians. The consequence was, that the prosperity of Rome increased at home and abroad. 2. But in the year 3S5 before Christ, a great calamity befell the city. It was taken by an army of Gauls, inhabitants of the country now called France. When Brennus, their general, had entered R,ome, he marched with his soldiers to the senate-house. 3. There he beheld an assemblage of gray-bearded senators, seated in a noble hall, in chairs of ivory. Each held an ivory staff in his hand. These brave old men, though they could make no resistance, considered it beneath their dignity to run away from the invaders. 4. The Gauls were awe-struck by their venerable aspect. But finally, one of the soldiers, being ruder than his companions, took hold of the long gray beard of an aged senator, and pulled it. The old gentleman, whose name was Papyrius, was so offended at this insult, that he uplifted his ivory staff, and hit the soldier a blow on the head. 5. But that blow cost Rome dear. The Gauls immediately mas- sacred Papyrius and the other senators, and set fire to the city; and almost the whole of it was reduced to ashes. You must bear in mind that, at this time, Rome had become an immense city. It contained many magnificent edifices; the most splendid of these was called the capitol ; this was not taken by the Gauls. 6. All the bravest of the Romans assembled there, and resolved to defend it to the last. Yet the enemy had nearly got possession of it 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. Tell the story of Coriolanus. 11. What was his fate? Ch. LXXII 1. Of what was the prosperity of Rome the consequence? 2. What hefell the city 384 B.C.? What of Brcmius ? 3. 4. What happened in the senate-house ? 5. Whatoftfie iize of Rome at this time ? What of the capitol ? 6. How was the capitol saved ? ROME. 125 in the night. But as they were creeping towards the gate, they awoke a large flock of geese ; and their cackling alarmed the sentinels. 7. In consequence of this fortunate event, a goose was thenceforth considered a very praiseworthy and honorable fowl by the Romans I am not sure but what they thought it a sin to have roast goose for dinner. 8. The Gauls were driven out of Rome, and were soon vanquished by Camillus, a brave and patriotic Roman. It is said that not a sin- gle man of them got back to their own country, to tell the fate of his companions. 9. The Romans were almost continually at war. Their valor and discipline generally rendered them successful ; but sometimes they met with misfortunes. In a war with the Samnites, a Roman army was captured, and forced to pass under the yoke, which was a sign of subjection. This was the highest possible ignominy. 10. But at length all the other states and kingdoms of Italy were reduced under the Roman power. Afterwards, the most formidable enemy of B.ome was Carthage. This was a powerful city on the African coast, near where Tunis now stands. It was situated nearly south of Rome, across the Mediterranean Sea, at the distance of about four hundred miles. 1 1. The wars between Rome and Carthage were called Punic wars. The first began in the year 264 before Christ, and lasted twenty-three years. Many battles were fought on land, and some by sea. 12. The Carthaginians were a cruel people. Whenever their gene- rals lost a battle, they were crucified. Regulus, a Roman general was taken by them, and underwent horrible torments. They cut off his eyelids, and then exposed his naked eyes to the burning sun. He was afterwards put into a barrel, the inner sides of which were set with iron spikes. 13. A peace was at last concluded between Rome and Carthage. The doors of the temple of Janus, at Rome, had not been shut for five hundred years ; for they always stood open while the Romans were at war. But now they were closed and barred ; for Rome was at peace with all the world. 8. Who conquered the Gauls? 9. What of the Romans? What of the war with the Samnites ? 10. What of the kingdoms of Italy ? Where was Carthage ? How far was it from Rome? 11. When did the first Punic war begin? How long did it last? 12. What of the Carthaginians ? What of Regulus ? 13. What of the temple of Janus ? How long had the doors been open? Why were they now closed ? When was the temple of Jarnu oteu ? Wheu shut ? 11* 12G SCHOOL HISTORY. CHAPTER LXXIIL— EUROPE CONTINUED Second and third Punic Wars. Hannibal and his army crossing the Jllps. 1. The doors of the temple of Janus were soon flung wide open again ; for a war broke out between the Romans and a tribe of Gauls. It ended in the conquest of the latter. 2. In the year 218 before the Christian era, another war with Car- tnage began. This was called the second Punic war. The Cartha- ginians were commanded by Hannibal, who proved himself one of the greatest generals that ever lived. 3. Hannibal transported his army across the Mediterranean Sea to Spain, and thence marched toward Italy. In his progress it was ne- cessary that he should cross the Alps. The summits of these moun- tains are many thousand feet in height, and were covered with ice and snow; in some places Hannibal had to cut a passage through the solid rock. 4. After crossing these mountains, several battles were won hy the Carthaginians. At length the two Roman consuls, with a large army, encountered Hannibal and his soldiers at Cannae. Here the Romans were defeated with dreadful slaughter. One of the consuls fled ; the other was slain, and forty thousand men were left dead on the field. 5. Rome had now no army to protect it. If Hannibal had marched thither immediately, it is probable that he might have taken the city. But he delayed too long, and the Romans made preparation to defend themselves. Ch. LXXIII. — 1. What war now broke out? Which side was victorious.'' 2. Wheq diil the second Punic war begin ? Who led the Carthaginians? 3. What did Hannibal do ' Haw did his army cross the Alps? 4. Describe the battle of Cannae. 6. WhatofRome.it this time ' ROME. 127 6. Haanibal never won such another victory as that at Cannae, for the Romans soon enlisted new armies, and fought more successfully than before. Scipio, their best general, sailed over to Africa, in order to attack Carthage. Hannibal immediately followed him. 7. A battle was fought between him and Scipio at Zama. The Carthaginians had a multitude of elephants. These animals were wounded by the Roman darts, and the pain made them rush through the field, trampling down whole ranks of Hannibal's army. 8. The Carthaginians were entirely defeated, and Hannibal himself barely escaped amid the rout and confusion. This battle put an end to the second Punic war. 9. But a third war between Rome and Carthage broke out in about fifty years. The Romans were commanded by another Scipio, who> was as valiant as his namesake, but the Carthaginians had no longer a Hannibal. 10. This third Punic war ended in the destruction of Carthage. The city was set on fire, and continued to burn during seventeen days. Many of the citizens threw themselves into the flames, and perished. This happened in the year 137 before the Christain era. 1 1. Scipio returned to Rome, and was rewarded with a triumph. As this was the highest honor that a Roman general could attain, and as such triumphs were often given to successful commanders, I will tell my readers, in the next chapter, what Scipio's triumph was. CHAPTER LXXIV.-EUROPE CONTINUED. Scipio's Triumph. 1. Scipio, on his return from Carthage, stopped at the Campus Martius, which was a plain on the outside of Rome. From thence he was escorted into the city by a grand procession. 2. First came a band of musicians, playing their loudest strains on all sorts of instruments. Then followed a drove of oxen, which were to be sacrificed in the temples of the gods. Their horns were gilded,, and garlands were wreathed around their heads. 3. Next came a train of cars, heavily laden with the rich spoils that had been taken at Carthage. There was gold and silver in abun- dance, and statues, pictures, and magnificent garments. The brilliant armor of the vanquished army was likewise piled upon the cars. 4. Then were seen some elephants, treading along like moving" hills. These huge animals were trained to war, and were able to carry a whole company of soldiers on their backs. 6. What of Scipio? Who followed him ? 7. Where was a battle fought? Whatof ele- phant? -i. Which side were defeated ? What of Hannibal? 9. Who led the Romans in the third Funic war? Whatof the Carthaginians? JO. When was Carthage burnt? 11. How Scipio rewarded ? Ch. LYXIV. — 1. Where was the Campus Martius? What of the procession? 2. What came first ? What was done with the oxen ? 3. With what were the cars laden? 4. What of elephants? II* 128 SCHOOL HISTORY. 5. Next appeared a melancholy troop of the vanquished Cartha- ginians. Their chains clanked as they walked heavily onward. Among them were all the principal men of Carthage, and thry droop- ed their heads in shame and sorrow, regretting that they had not perished in the flames of their city. 6. Behind the sad troop came another loud band of music drown- ing the groans of the captives with the uproar of a hundred instru- ments. There were likewise dancers, whose garb made them appear like monsters, neither beasts nor men. These wore crowns of gold. 7. Then came a splendid chariot, adorned with ivory, and drawn by four white horses all abreast. In this chariot stood the triumphant Scipio, dressed in a purple robe, which was covered with gold em- broidery. His face was painted with vermilion, and he had a crown of laurel on his head. 8. A golden ball hung at his breast ; and in his right hand he held an ivory sceptre, with a golden eagle at the top. But in the same chariot stood a slave, who kept whispering to Scipio, " Remember that thou art but a man ! " And these words seemed to sadden Sci- pio's triumph. 9. Around the chariot was a great throng of Scipio's relatives, and other citizens, all clothed in white. Next came the consuls and all the members of the Roman senate, in their robes of ceremony. 10. Last in the procession marched the victorious army. Their helmets were wreathed with laurel. The standard-bearers carried eagles of gold and silver, instead of banners. As they moved onward, they sang hymns in praise of Scipio's valor, and all the Roman citi- zens joined their voices in the chorus. In this manner, the processiop passed through the streets of Rome and entered the doors of the capitol. CHAPTER LXXV.-EUROPE CONTINUED. Sylla and Marius. 1. The Romans still continued to make conquests. Not longaftei the ruin of Carthage, the whole of Spain became a province of Rome. There was likewise a war with Numidia, a country of Africa, now called Algiers. Jugurtha, the Numidian king, was brought prisoner to Rome, and starved to death in a dungeon. 2. There was afterwards a Social war, beginning in the year 91 before Christ. This war was called Social, because it was between the Romans and the neighboring states of Italy, who 5. Describe the appearance of the captive Carthaginians. In what battle were they taken prisoners ? G. Wliat of Musicians and dancers? 7. How did Scipio appear? What did the slave whisper in his ear ? What was the effect of what he said ? 9. What fol- lowed the chariot ? 10. Describe the victorious army. Where did the procession stop ? Ch. LXXV.— 1. What of the Romans ? What of Spain ? Where was Numidia ? Direc- tion from Rome ? Carthage? Whatofit? Its king ? 3 When did t lie social war begin ? How many men were killed in this war? Who was Mithridates ? Where was Poutus? ROME. 129 had been their friends and allies. Three hundred thousand men were killed on both sides. Then there was a war with Mithridates, the powerful king of Pontus, in Asia Minor. He was not entirely vanquished till forty years afterwards. 3. In the course of all this fighting, two Roman commanders ac- quired great renown. One was named Marius, and the other Sylla. Maria's was a rude and daring soldier, knowing nothing but how to fight. Sylla was likewise a good soldier, but also a person of great elegance and polished manners- 4. These two generals became so great and powerful, that each was envious of the other. They therefore began a civil war, in which Romans fought against Romans. I will relate an incident in order to show the horrors of this war. 5. One of Sylla's soldiers had killed another that fought for Ma- rius. He began to strip him of his armor ; but on taking off the helmet which had concealed the dead man's face, he saw that it was his own brother. The wretched survivor placed the body on a fu- neral pile, and then killed himself. 6. In the outset of the struggle with Sylla, Marius was beaten; but he afterwards gained possession of Rome. He now resolved to put to death every person that was not friendly to his cause. Sena- tors and other distinguished men were publicly murdered. Dead bo- dies were seen everywhere about the streets. 7. But Marius could not escape the misery which his wickedness deserved. He was so tortured by remorse, that he contracted a habit of drinking immoderately. This brought on a fever, of which he died. 8. After the death of this wicked man, Sylla returned to Rome at the head of a large army. He declared himself dictator; and his word then became the sole law of Rome. Like Marius, he deter- mined to massacre all his enemies. As fast as they were killed, their bloody heads Avere brought to them. 9. When Sylla had shed as much blood as he desired, he suddenly resigned his power. Everybody was surprised at this, but nobody lamented it; nor were there any mourners when this cruel and wick- ed man died, which happened soon after. CHAPTER LXXVL— EUROPE CONTINUED. Cneius Pompey and Julius Ccesar. 1. If the Roman people had loved liberty as well as they once did, they never would have borne the tyranny of Sylla and Marius. But they had become addicted to luxury, by the riches which they had acquired from their conquests in alt parts of the world. 3. What of the Roman commanders ? Marius? Sylla? 4. What war broke out ill Rome? 5. Relate a horrid incident in this war. 6. What did .Marius do ? 7. What w.ie hufate? 8. What did Sylla do ? Give an account of his proceedings. 0. Wnat act of Syria's surprised everybody .' L'ii. LXXVI. — I What of the Roman people ? 130 SCHOOL HISTORY. 2. Owing to their continual wars, they had also accustomed them- selves to consider successful warriors as the greatest men on earth. Soldiers must obey their leaders, without asking why or wherefore and all the Roman people felt like soldiers. Thus the very same causes which rendered the Romans so invincible to their enemies, made them liable to be enslaved by any great general who should be ambitious of enslaving them. And such a general soon appeared. 3. After the death of Sylla and Marius, the two most valiant and distinguished warriors were Pompey and Caesar. Poinpey was tht 'eldest. He had grown famous by vanquishing Mithridates, and by many other victories. He had conquered fifteen kingdoms, and takeik eight hundred cities. 4. The name of this illustrious leader's rival was Julius Caesar. He was the most beautiful person in Rome. He had fought in Gaul, Germany, and Britain, and had overcome three millions of men, and killed one million. His soldiers idolized him. 5. At last, like Sylla and Marius, these two generals became so great and powerful, that the world was no longer wide enough for them both. They each collected great armies, in which all the Ro- man soldiers were enlisted, on one side or the other. 6. They encountered each other at Pharsalia, in Macedon. The best part of Pompey's army consisted of a multitude of the young Roman nobility. These youths had very handsome faces; and it was chiefly owing to this circumstance that Pompey lost the victory. 7. Caesar ordered his rough and weather-beaten soldiers to aim their blows right at the faces of their enemies. The latter were so afraid that their beauty would be spoiled, that they immediately turned and fled. A complete victory was gained by Caesar. 8. Pompey made his escape into Egypt, but was there murdered. His head was cut off and brought to Caesar, who turned aside his eyes, from the bloody spectacle, and wept to think that so mighty a warrior had met with so sad a fate. CHAPTER LXXVII.— EUROPE CONTINUED. Ceesar usurps the Supreme Poxoer. 1. When the Roman senate heard of Caesar's victory, they pro- claimed a solemn thanksgiving to the gods. Supreme power was granted him for life, with the title of dictator. His person was de- clared sacred and inviolable. 2. His statue was placed among those of gods and heroes, in the 2. What was the consequence of continual war? 3. What generals appeared after Ma- rius and Sylla? What had Pompey done ? 4. What of Pompey's rival, Julius Caesar: 6. What did these great generals do? 6. Where was a hattle fought? What of Pom- iiey's army? 7. Bv what means did Caesar vanquish the followers of Pompey? 8. What become of Pompey? Why did Caesar woep at his death. Ch. LXXVII.— 1 What di ioa SCHOOL HISTORY. 3. The latter countries, together with Greece, have become wholly or partially independent of the Turkish dominion. The capital of this empire is Constantinople, which I have often mentioned before, and which at this day is one of the greatest cities in the world. 4. The chief ruler or king of the Turks is called the Sultan. He lives at Constantinople, in a splendid palace. Like most eastern princes, he has two or three hundred wives, which he keeps shut up in a place called the harem. 5. The Turks have long beards, wear turbans on their heads, and a loose flowing robe over their under dress. They sit on cushions instead of chairs, and take their food with their fingers, instead of forks. They are fond of smoking very long pipes. 6. The Sultan rules over his country, not according to certain established laws, but according to his own will. The people gen- erally do exactly what he requires ; if they refuse to obey him, they may lose their property and their heads. 7. If you were to go to Turkey, you would discover that the climate is warm, and the country naturally fertile; you would also see that the people are indolent and cruel. You would see that they have not many manufactures, and but little commerce. You would see that the lands are poorly cultivated, and that many tracts natu- rally fruitful are barren and desolate for want of tillage. 8. You would discover that the people dislike the Christians, and worship according to the faith of Mahomet. You would discover that they have mosques instead of churches. At Constantinople there is a very splendid edifice, called St. Sophia. This was formerly a Greek church, but it is now converted into a Mahometan mosque. 3. What of the countries that formerly belonged to the Ottoman empire ? Capital of Turkey ? What of Constantinople ? 4. What of the sultan ? 5. Describe the Turks. 6. How does the sultan rule the Turks? What of the people? 7. Soil and climate of Turkey The people ? Manufactures ? Commerce ? Lands ? 8. Religou of the Turkj ? What are their places of worship called ? St. Sophia ? ROME. 161 ! I CHAPTER XCVIL— EUROPE CONTINUED. About the Saracens. How the Turks overturned the Saracen Empire. How the Ottoman Turks founded the Ottoman Empire. About Bajazet, Timour, and others. 1. In the history of Asia, I have given you some account of the Saracens. These you will remember were Arabs, among whom Mahomet and bis successors established an empire at the commence- ment of the seventh century. 2. The kings or rulers of the Saracen empire were called caliphs, and resided at Bagdad, a splendid city which they built near the river Tigris in Mesopotamia. I have told you how these caliphs ex- tended their empire over a considerable part of Asia and Africa, and iome portions of Europe. 3. To the north of Mesopotamia, there were several tribes of Tartars, among which were some called Turks. These were daring warriors, and such was their fame, that the caliphs induced many of them to come to Bagdad and serve as soldiers. 4. In process of time, the Turks acquired great influence at Bag- dad, and finally overturned the Saracen empire, made themselves masters of nearly all the Saracen possessions, and adopted the Maho- medan religion. Thus the Turkish empire became the successor of the Saracen empire, and included in its dominion Asia Minor, Syria, Palestine, and other Asiatic countries, which the Saracens had con- quered from the Greek empire. 5. After a while, the Turkish empire, which had been thus estab- lished, was overturned by another tribe of Turks, who called them- selves Ottomans. These came from the country east of the Caspian Sea, and laid the foundation of the present Ottoman empire. This took place in the year 1299 ; the founder of the empire being Othman' the First. 6. The Greek empire had formerly included Asia Minor, but this had been taken by the Saracens, and afterwards by the Turks. At the time of the Ottoman invasion, it included little more than what is at present called Turkey in Europe, with Greece. 7. Constantinople, the present capital of Turkey, was called Byzan tium, from Byzas, who founded it in 715, B. C. It was a flourishing city in the time of the early Greeks. The neighboring country was settled by colonies from Greece, and by other tribes. It was con- Ch. Xf'VII. — 1. What of the Saracens ? When and by whom was the Saracen empire established? 2. What of the caliphs' Dominion of the caliphs? 2. Where were the Turks? Where did they live ? Why were they employed by the caliphs of Bagdi id ? i. What did the Turks do? What of the Turkish empire? o. By whom was [he first Turkish dynasty overturned ? When was the Ottoman empire founded ? By whom? 6, What did the Greek empire formerly include .' What did it include in Wj? ■ 14* 1Q2 SCHOOL HISTORY. quered by the Romans, and the name of Byzantium was changed to Constantinople, by the emperor Constantine, in 329. S. It had before this period fallen into decay, but it was now re- vived, and Constantine removed thither with his whole court. It thus became the capital of the R-oman empire. When that was divided into the Eastern and Western empires in 395, it was the capital of the former, which, as you know, was often called the Greek empire. 9. This continued with various changes, to subsist as a distinct sovereignty, till the period of which I am now treating. It was, as I have said, on the brink of ruin, when the Ottomans, who had already established themselves in Asia Minor, and swallowed up the countries formerly belonging to the Saracen dominions, began to cast longing eyes upon the Greek empire in Europe. 10. The sultan, at this time, was Bajazet. He began to reign in 13S9, and was so famous for his conquests, that the Turks called him the Thunderbolt. 11. He was preparing to attack Constantinople, when a greater warrior than he came from Tartary, and subdued him. This was Tamerlane, otherwise called Timour the Tartar, and sometimes Timour the lame man. He defeated Bajazet in a great battle, in which three hundred thousand men were slain. 12. It is said that when Timour the lame man had got Bajazet the Thunderbolt into his power, he put him into an iron cage, and carried him about for a show, like a wild beast. Most conquerors have a resemblance to wild beasts, and it would be well if they could always be kept in iron cages. 13. The misfortunes of Bajazet prevented the Turks from conquer- ing the Eastern empire of the Romans, for a considerable time. But in 1453, when Mahomet the Great was sultan, they took Constantino- ple. The emperor, whose name was Constantine, was killed. From this time forward, the Turks were securely established in Europe, and the country which they inhabited was called Turkey. CHAPTER XCVIIL— EUROPE CONTINUED. Sequel of the Turkish History. 1. The reigns of most of the Turkish sultans have been full of crime and bloodshed. Sultan Selim, who began to reign in 1512, in- 7. What of Constantinople ? Who founded it, and when ? What of it in the time of the early Greeks? When was its name changed ? When and by whom was Byzantium called Constantinople? 8. What became of the capital of the Roman empire ? What took place in 395 ? What was called the Greek empire ' What countries did the Eastern empire of the Romans include ? Ans. Greece, Macedon, what is now called Turkey in Europe, Asia Minor, and other adjacent countries. 9. What of the Ottomans ? 10. Who was Bajazet ? When did he begin to reign ? What did the Turks call him ? What of Tamerlane ? 12. How did Timour treat Bajazet ? What of conquerors ? 13. What happened in 1453. I H. XCVIII. — 1. What of the reigns of seme of the Turkish sultans? What of Sultan Selim ' What of the Mamelukes? SFAIN. 163 vaded Egypt, and conquered it. The Egyptian soldiers were called Mamelukes, of whom I have told you in the history of Egypt. Thousands of them were taken prisoners. 2. After the victory, the sultan ordered a splendid throne to be erected on the banks of the river Nile, near the gates of Cairo. Sitting on this throne, he caused all the Mamelukes to be massacred in his sight, and their bodies to be thrown into the river. 3. Mohammed the Third, who ascended the throne in 1596, had nineteen brothers. All these he caused to be strangled, so that they might not attempt to rob him of his power. 4. Amurath the Fourth became sultan in 1621. This monster caused fourteen thousand men to be murdered. The sport that pleased him best, was to run about the streets at night, with a drawn sword, cutting and slashing at everybody whom he met. 5. These facts will show the reader what kind of government the Turks have lived under. The late sultan, whose name was Mahmoud the Second, ascended the throne in 1S08. He was more enlightened than his predecessors. 6. But he was compelled to act with great severity. This was par- ticularly the case in regard to the janizaries. These were a large body of troops, established by Mahomet the Second in 1300, and who con- tinued to be a very powerful body of soldiers for several centuries. Though called the sultan's guards, they became more dangerous than all the other subjects of the empire. 7. Sultan Mahmoud therefore determined to free himself from their power. Accordingly, in the year 1826, he ordered the rest of his troops to surround the janizaries. This was done, and they were shot down and massacred without mercy. The sultan afterwards endeavored to reform the manners of the Turks, and to make them adopt the customs of other European nations. In this he had some success, but his progress was very slow. The present sultan, son of the preceeding, is very young. CHAPTER XCIX.-EUROPE CONTINUED. Early History of Spain. The Moorish Conquest. 1. The kingdom of Spain is separated from France by the range cf mountains called the Pyrenees. It has Portugal on the west; its other boundaries are the Atlantic Ocean, the Bay of Biscay, and the Mediterranean Sea. The whole country forms a large peninsula. 2. Spain is a very remarkable country; it is full of wild, rocky mountains, with beautiful valleys between. The climate is warm 2. What did the sultan order? 3. When did Mohammed III. ascend the throne ? What crime did he commit ? 4. Who became sultan in 1G>1 ? What of Amurath ? 5. What of Mahmoud the Second ? When did he ascend the throne ? 6. What of him? Who were the janizaries? When were they established? 7. What was done in 1826 ? What has the sultan since done ? Who is the present sultau ? C'h. XVIX. — How is .Spain separated from France ? Boundaries of .Spain? 164 SCHOOL HISTORY. and delightful. The country produces ahundance of grapes, olives, lemons, almonds, figs, citrons, and pomegranates. 3. Spain is celebrated for a very fine breed of horses. It is also the country from which the merino sheep were first brought. There are many of these now in this country, and you know they produce the finest wool in the world. 4. Spain has about as many inhabitants as the United States. The people are generally ignorant and superstitious, but they seem to be very honest, ceremonious, and polite. They are fond of gay dances in the open air. Madrid, the capital of Spain, is a very splendid city. 5. Spain abounds in castles, churches, and palaces, built by the Moors, of whom I shall soon tell you the story. These edifices are some of the most wonderful buildings in the world. They are totally unlike those of ancient Greece and Rome. They bear some resem- blance to what is called the Gothic architecture, specimens of which are to be found in some of our cities. 6. If I had time and room, I should like very much to tell you a long story about Spain ; but I shall be obliged to say very little of it, and leave you afterwards to pursue the subject in some larger book. 7. Little is known about the history of Spain till the Phoenicians made voyages thither. They came from Phoenicia, which you know was close to the land of Canaan, a distance of two thousand miles, and built two columns at the Straits of Gibraltar. These columns were called the pillars of Hercules. The ancients did not dare to sail beyond them, into the broad Atlantic Ocean. S. The Greeks founded several cities in Spain. Afterwards, the Carthaginians acquired possession of the country; but it was taken by the Romans in 134 B. C, who kept it till the year 406 after the Christian era. Spain was then invaded by barbarians from the north, called the Suevi, the Alans, and the Vandals. 9. Some of these people continued in the country more than a hun- dred years. They were then driven out by another set of barbarians, called Goths, or Visigoths, who overran the whole of Spain. These became established in the country, and finally founded a kingdom there. 10. After the Goths had been in Spain about two hundred years, a king mounted the throne whose name was Roderick. This king grievously injured count Julian, who was one of' the most powerful of the Spanish or Gothic nobles. In order to avenge himself, Julian took steps which resulted in the ruin of his country. 11. In Mauritania, which I have already mentioned, on the north- ern coast of Africa, and not far from Spain, there was a nation of Sa 2. What sort of a country is Spain ? Climate? Productions? Should you not like to go to Spain and eat some of the fine fruits? 3. What of the horses of Spain ? Merino sheep ? 4. Population? What of the people ? Capital? What of Madrid ? Which way is Ma- drid from you ? From London r Paris ? Rome ? Algiers ? 5. What of the Moorish buildings in Spain ? 7. What of tlie early history of Spain ? Where was Phoenicia ? How far from Spain ? What did the Phoenicians do in Spain ? Where were the pillars of Hercules built ? How far did the ancients venture to go in their vessels? 8. What of the Greeks? The Carthaginians? The Romans? What barbarians conquered Spain ? About what time did they conquer Spain? '.). How long did the Suevi and other barbarians remain in Spain ? Who drove out the Suevi and oilier barbarians ? What of the Goths ? 10. What of Roderick ? Count Julian ? What, did he do ? SPAIN. 165 racens. They were called Mauri, or Moors, from the country which they inhabited. Count Julian invited them to cross the sea, and in- vade Spain. 12. Accordingly, a great number of these infidels landed on the Spanish shores, under the command of a general named Tariff. King Roderick the Goih gathered an army, and encountered them at Xerxes, in the south of Spain. Here a great battle was fought. 13. The Moors were completely victorious. The fate of Roderick was never known. His horse, and his sword, helmet, shield, and breastplate, were found by the side of a river, near the field of battle; but his body was nowhere to be seen. These events occurred about 712 A. D. 14. The Spaniards long believed that king Roderick was alive, and that, at some future day, he would again lead an army to battle against the Moors. But his war-shout was heard no more ; and as the Gothic monarchy was ruined by his fall, he is called Roderick the last of the Goths. 15. Pelagio, a prince of the blood-royal, took command of all the Gothic Spaniards who had not been slain by the Moors. He led them into the mountainous region of Asturias and Burgos, and there found- ed a little kingdom. This was the only part of Spain which the Moors never conquered. 16. The successors of Pelagio enlarged the boundaries of his king- dom. But, fer a long time, the Moors possessed three-fourths of Spain. CHAPTER C— EUROPE CONTINUED. Wars between the Moors and the Spaniards. 1. The Moors were a wild people when they first conquered Spain ; but they soon became civilized and polished. There was more learn- ing amongst them than in any other part of Europe. 2. In the city of Cordova, there was a library of six hundred thou- sand volumes. There were likewise seventy public libraries in other parts of the Moorish territories in Spain. The Moors were great lovers of poetry and music. 3. They built many noble edifices in Spain. The Alhambra, in the city of Granada, was the palace of the Moorish sovereigns. It was of marble, and ornamented with beautiful sculpture. The sultry at- mosphere was cooled by fountains, which spouted continually in the chambers and halls. Beneath the Alhambra were vaults, which the Moorish kings had caused to be dusr, that they might be buried there ; 11. What of Mauritania ! Its direction from Spain ? What of the Moors ? Count Ju- lian ? 12. What did the Moors do? What followed ? 13. Fate of king Roderick ? How long ago did this happen? 14. What did the Spaniards believe? Why was Roderick called the last of the Goths? 15. What of Pelagio? What was the only part of Spain not conquered by the Moors? 10. What of the successors of Pelagio ? What portion of Spain did the Moors long possess? Ch. C. — 1. What can you say of the Moors? 2. What olf libraries iu Cordova? In other cities? What did tho Moors love ? 166 SCHOOL HISTORY. for they loved the Alhamhra so well, that they used it both as their palace and sepulchre. 4. But the Spaniards hated the Moors, and seldom were at peace with them. In their continual wars, the victory sometimes fell to one party, and sometimes to the other. Eighty thousand Moors were once slain in a single battle. 5. On the other hand, a Moorish hero, by the name of Almanzor, is said to have vanquished the Spaniards in more than fifty battles He took the city of Compostella, and compelled his captives to carry the gates of a large edifice from thence to Cordova, on their shoulders. 6. The most famous warrior that appeared on either side, was Don Rodrigo de Bivaz, surnamed the Cid Campeador, or the Incomparable Lord. He gained so many battles against the Moors, that at last the Spaniards considered the victory certain whenever the Cid Campea- dor was at their head. 7. When the Incomparable Lord was dead, the courage of the Moors revived. They boldly attacked the Spaniards, and besieged the city where the Cid Campeador lay buried. The Spaniards Avent forth to meet them, and at their head rode an armed warrior, with a coun- tenance like death. 8. The Moors recognized his features, and fled ; for it was the Cid Campeador ! The Spaniards had taken him from the tomb, and seated him on the war-horse which he had rode in his lifetime. And thus the dead warrior won another victory. 9. Many other wonderful stories are told about the Moorish and Spanish wars. Sometimes, it is said, a saint came down from hea- ven, to lead the Spaniards to battle. Sometimes the sun stood still, that they might have time to kill their enemies. Sometimes they were encouraged by the appearance of a blazing cross in the sky. 10. But these are fables. It is certain, however, that the Moors gradually lost their Spanish territories, till nothing remained to them except Granada. And in the reign of Ferdinand and Isabella, they were wholly driven out of Spain. This event took place in 1492, nearly eight centuries after the overthrow of king Roderick the Goth. CHAPTER CI.— EUROPE CONTINUED. The Spanish Inquisition. 1. The reign of Ferdinand and Isabella was disgraced by the estab lishment of the Inquisition in Spain. The design of this horrible institution was to prevent the people from adopting any but the 3. What did they build in Spain ? Describe the Alhambra. What were beneath the Al- hambra ? 4. How did the Spaniards feel toward the Moors? What of their wars? 6. What of Almanzor ? What city did he take ? 6. What famous warrior can you men- lion ? What of him ? 7. What of the Moors after his death ? Who rode at the head of the Spaniards ? 8. How were the Moors affected byseeihg the dead body of the Cid Cam- peador ? 9. What stories are told of the Moorish and Spanish wars ? 10. What at last remained to the Moors ? When were the Moors driven out of Spain ? SPAIN. 167 Catholic religion ; it being believed, in those dark days, that it was right to do so. 2. Persons who were suspected of being heretics were thrown into damp and dismal dungeons. They were then brought before the in- quisitors, who sat completely covered with long robes and hoods of sackcloth. Their faces were invisible ; but they looked at the pris- oners through two holes in their sackcloth hoods. 3. If the accused persons would not plead guilty, they were tor- tured in various ways. Sometimes they were drawn up to the loof of the chamber by a rope, and after hanging a considerable time, the rope was loosened, so that they fell almost to the floor. 4. The rope was then suddenly tightened again, and the prisoner's limbs were put out of joint by the shock. If he still refused to con- fess, the inquisitors rubbed his feet with lard, and roasted them before a fire. In short, their cruelties were too dreadful to be told. 5. When the inquisitors had satisfied themselves with torturing their prisoners, they prepared to burn them. The condemned persons walked in a procession, dressed in garments which were painted with flames. On their breasts they wore their own likenesses, in the act of being devoured by serpents and wild beasts. 6. When they reached the place of execution, the victims were fastened to a stake with iron chains, and roasted to death by a slow fire. They sometimes suffered the agony of this torment for two or three hours, before death relieved them. 7. Such were the horrors of the Inquisition ; yet it had been intro- duced into Italy before it was adopted in Spain, and in after times it spread into other Catholic countries, and continued in operation for nearly three hundred years. Between thirty and forty thousand were burnt alive, before the Inquisition was abolished. 8. The remembrance of the Inquisition will ever cause a stain to rest upon the reign of Ferdinand and Isabella, for in Spain it was a more horrid institution than in any other country. It was the great- est glory of this king and queen, that they gave Christopher Colum- bus the means of discovering America. But Columbus was thrown into a dungeon, as the reward of his discovery ! 9. The Spaniards made great conquests in America. The riches of the country were in this way much increased ; and there was more silver and gold in Spain than in all the rest of Europe. But it is doubtful whether Spain ever derived any real benefit from her American colonies; for instead of staying at home to cultivate the soil, the inhabitants crossed the ocean in search of gold and silver. Ch. CI. — 1. When was the Inquisition established? What was its design? 2. How were suspected persons treated ? Describe the inquisitors. 3. How were the accused persons tortured? 5. Describe the burning of the prisoners? 6. How long did the Inqui- sition continue in operation ? 7. What of the reign of Ferdinand and Isabella? What was the glory of their reign? What was the fate of Columbus ? 8. What of the Spaniards ' What of the riches of Spain ? 9. Were the American colonies aDy benefit to Spain ? 168 SCHOOL HISTORY, CHAPTER CIL— EUROPE CONTINUED. The Invincible Armada. Curious Death of a Spanish King-. Piecent Affairs of Spain. 1. One of the most powerful monarchs of Spain was Philip the Second. He was not only king of Spain, but he obtained the crown of Portugal also, in 1580 ; but Portugal afterwards became a separate kingdom again. It had first been declared independent of Spain at the beginning of the twelfth century. 2. Philip intended to conquer England, and prepared a fleet of eighfy ships for that purpose. This fleet was called the Invincible Armada. But it was conquered even without a battle, for a storm scattered it, and drove many of the ships on the British coast. 3. The son of Philip was a weak minded man. The manner of his death was very singular. He was sitting, one day, in the coun- cil chamber, which was warmed by a large stove. The heat and vapor of the stove affected his head. 4. He ordered the attendants to quench the fire. But the person whose duty it was to do this happened not to be in the chamber, and the rules of the Spanish court were so strict, that it would have been unlawful for any other person to touch the fire. 5. Moreover, it would have been beneath the king's dignity tu leave the chamber, or even to move his chair back from the stove. So the fire continued to grow hotter, and the poor king grew sicker and sicker, till at last it was impossible to cure him. And thus lie died, by a kind of death that could have befallen nobody but a Span- ish king. 6. In the year 1700, Charles the Second of Spain died without children. He was succeeded by a young French prince, named Phil- ip, duke of Anjou, the grandson of Louis the Fourteenth. The kings of this family are called the Spanish Bourbons. 7. This event caused a long war in Europe. Charles, archduke of Austria, claimed the crown of Spain, and he and Philip of Anjou al- ternately drove each other out of Madrid. But Philip finally kept his . seat on the throne. S. Spain has often been at war with England. She united with France against that country during the American Revolution; but peace was concluded in 1783. Another war, however, began between England and France in about ten years afterwards. 9. In 1S08, when the emperor Napoleon was at the height of his power, he compelled the Spanish king to abdicate his throne. The name of this king was Ferdinand the Seventh. Napoleon then placed Ch. CIL— What of Philip II. ? What of Portugal ? 2. What of the Invincible Arma- da? 3. Describe the death of Philip's sun. G. What happened in the year 1700 ? Who succeeded Charles II. ? Who were the Spanish Bourbons? 7. Why did Charles and Philip go to war? Who triumphed ? 8. W hat of Spain? When was peace concluded between France and England. 9. What did Napoleon compel the Spanish king to do in 180S ? Who was Ferdinand VII. ? SPAIN. 169 the crown of Spain upon the head of his own brother, Joseph Bona- parte. 10. But most of the Spaniards refused to acknowledge king Joseph as their sovereign. A bloody war ensued. The English government sent armies into Spain and Pprtugal; and it was there that Lord Wellington gained his first victories over the French. 11. Ferdinand, the old Spanish king, was replaced upon the throne in 1814. He was, however, a tyrant and a bigot, and his reign was mischievous to the country. His death took place in 1S33. 12. Since that event, Spain has been ravaged by a civil war be- tween Don Carlos and the young queen Maria Isabella. Three or four hundred thousand persons where supposed to have been killed in this war which is now terminated, by the establishment of the claims of Maria Isabella. CHAPTER CIII.-EXJROPE CONTINUED. A short Story about Portugal. 1. Portugal lies to the west of Spain, and is bounded on the west by the Atlantic Ocean. The population of the country is nearly four millions. The capital is Lisbon. This is a large city, and many of our vessels visit it for the purpose of getting wines, grapes, oranges, and lemons. 2. The climate of Portugal is similar to that of Spain. The people also resemble the Spaniards, but speak a language somewhat differ- ent. The Portuguese are very ignorant, and as they seldom read, they have plenty of time for dancing. 3. Portugal was originally considered a part of Spain, and shared in the events of that country. In the twelfth century, it became in- dependent. Since that time it has been considered a separate king- dom, though it has been subject to Spain for a poriion of this period. 4. The history of Portugal is of little interest, till about the year 1400, when the Portuguese took the lead in navigating the Atlantic Ocean. At this time, this great sea was little known, and nobody had gone across it to America, nor had any one dared to sail around Africa. •5. But the little Portuguese vessels ventured out farther and far- ther, and finally one of them reached the Cape of Good Hope. Af- ter this, a Portuguese fleet passed entirely around Africa, crossed the Indian Ocean, and reached India. Whom dill Napoleon make kirn; of Spain ? 10. What of (he Spaniards? What of the English gover ml ? What of Lord H ellington ? II. When was Ferdinand replaced up- on the throne ; What of him ? When did he die? 12. What of a civil war in Spain .' Cm. CIII. — Boundaries of Portugal .' Population? Capital? What of Lisbon? 2. Cli- mate of Portugal ? The people.' Language? 3. What of Portugal ? When did it be- come independent? What of Portugal since the twelfth century? 4. What of the Por- luguene aftci ibnul WOO? What onfie Atlantic at this lime? 5. What of the Portuguese tfcmui*? Their discoveries ? 15 170 SCHOOL HISTORY. 6. These wonderful adventures and discoveries excited other na- tions, and in a few years Christopher Columbus discovered America. Thus the Portuguese may be considered as having led the way to the discovery of this vast continent on which we live, and which was un- known to the people of Europe, Asia, and Africa till the year 1492. 7. I need not tell you of what happened in Portugal from this time till the year 1755. At that date, an earthquake took place, which shook down nearly the whole city of Lisbon. Houses, churches, and palaces were suddenly tumbled into heaps of ruins. Large chasms were opened in the earth, and hundreds of houses were plunged into them. The sea at first rolled back from the land, and then returned, sweeping every thing before it. In this awful calamity, ten thousand persons Tost their lives. 8. The Portuguese founded a good many colonies in different parts of the world. One of these was in Brazil, in South America. To this place the king of Portugal retired with his family in 1S07, and established his court at Rio Janeiro, the capital of the country. This was done because Portugal had been invaded by the French. 9. The French being driven out in 1808, the king returned in a few years. After his death there was a struggle for the crown, but it was finally settled upon Donna Maria, the present queen. CHAPTER CIV. -EUROPE CONTINUED. Description of France. Its Climate. Cities. Manu- factures. Manners and Customs of the People. 1. France lies in the western part of Europe, and contains about Jhirty-two millions of inhabitants. Paris, the capital, is a very large jity, surrounded with -walls of stone. It is full of fine houses, beau- tiful public gardens, pleasant walks, handsome streets, and interesting places of amusement. To a stranger, it is the most agreeable city in the world. 2. Besides Paris, there are a great many other large and handsome cities in France. Among these are Rouen, where the people manu- facture a great deal of handsome jewelry ; Lyons, where they make beautiful silks; Marseilles, where the people deal in wines; and Bordeaux, in the midst of a country which produces fine grapes, and other delicious fruits. 3. The climate of France is about the same as that of Pennsylvania, Maryland, and Virginia. The soil is fruitful, and yields abundance of food for the numerous inhabitants. The country produces many 6. What consequences followed the Portuguese discoveries? What of America till 1492? 7. What happened in 1755? Describe the earthquake? 8. Colonies of Portu gal ? Wha* of the king of Portugal ? When and why did he remove to Brazil ? 9. What followed? Ch. CIV.— 1. Population of France ? Describe Paris? 2. What of Rouen? What of Lyons ? What of Marseilles ? What of Bordeaux ? FRANCE. 171 kinds of fruits in great perfection, such as cherries, pears, plums, peaches, and figs. It also yields immense quantities of grapes, from which many kinds of choice wines are produced. 4. The people of France are very gay and cheerful. They live a great deal in the open air, and it is common in all parts of the country to see both men and women at work in the fields. They do not labor very hard, and during the holidays, of which they have a : great many, they walk about the streets, and dance in the public gardens, or squares. One of the entrances of Paris. 5. The French seem to enjoy themselves better than most other nations. They are fond of music, and delight to get together, and talk about all sorts of things. They are very polite, and always treat strangers with particular civility. The gentlemen are courteous to the ladies, and the ladies in return take every means in their power to make their society agreeable to the gentlemen. 6. The manufactures of France are numerous and valuable. The people have an excellent fancy in making jewelry, silks, clocks, watches, and many other ornamental things. These are sent to all parts of the world, and though they may not be considered very necessary, yet they give a great deal of pleasure, and thus have their u-e. 7. The French people are fond of dress, and the dressmakers of Paris set the fashions for the rest of the world. The milliners and rnantua-makers of this city have more followers than any king that 3. Climate of France ? Soil? Production? 4. Character and manners of the French people? 5. What of the gentlemen ? The ladies? G. Manufactures of France ' What is the use of the fancy articles manufactured in France ? 172 SCHOOL HISTORY. ever lived ; for the gowns and bonnets of the ladies of Europe and America are made according to their direction. 8. The French nation, on the whole, are a very interesting and wonderful people. Though they might seem to be frivolous and thoughtless, yet France has produced many great men, and the history of the country displays many great and glorious actions. 9. They have been represented as a nation of fiddlers, dress-makers, and dancing masters ; but if you look into their character, and read their story with attention, you will see that this is not just ; they are in truth the most warlike nation in Europe ; they take the lead in many arts and sciences; and if the people at large spend much of their time in amusement, it is not because they are deficient in genius for the highest pursuits of the mind. CHAPTER CV.-EUROPE CONTINUED. About the Gauls and other Tribes of Barbarians. How the Southern Parts of Europe were first settled, and how the Northern Parts were settled afterwards. 1. In the course of this history, I have had frequent occasion to mention various northern tribes of Europe, called barbarians, and perhaps I shall not find a better opportunity than the present to give you some account of them. You remember that Greece was settled before any other part of Europe. The first inhabitants were the descendents of Japheth. The descendents of these spread themselves over Greece, and probably other parts of Europe. 2. As the people increased along the shores of Asia and Africa, they sent colonies to different places along the shores of the Mediter- ranean. Some settled in Greece, some in Italy, some in Spain. These countries being warm, pleasant, and fruitful, were soon filled with inhabitants. Living upon the coast, they had a great many ships, and carried on commerce with different countries. 3. In this way, after many years, they grew rich, and built large cities, with fine houses, temples, and palaces. Such was the course of events in regard to all southern Europe, of which I have been telling you the story. But, while these things were going on, various tribes were emigrating into the more northern portions of Europe. 4. Here the climate was colder, and the soil less fruitful. Still the woods were full of elks, rein-deer, fallow-deer, and the roe-buck, wild bulls, wild boars, and many other animals. These supplied food for the inhabitants, and the chase furnished excellent sport to the ad venturous men of those days. 7. What of the French, as to dress ? Milliners and mantua-makers ? 8. What might seem to be the character of the French? What does their history display? 9. What of their talent for -war ? Their genius for other things ? Cjj. CV.— 1. What of Greece ? 2. How were the shores of the Meditarranean settled ? What of the people in these conn tries? 3. How were the northern portions of Europe settled' 4. Climate and 6oil of northern Europe ? What furnished subsistence to the inhabitants ? FRANCE. 173 5. Beside all this, in these regions unoccupied by man the land was very cheap, and whoever would come and take it might have it These circumstances invited the people to leave the soft, sunny re- gions of Greece, Italy, Spain, and also of Asia, for the colder and wilder realms of northern Europe. 6. Thus tribe followed tribe, and nation followed nation, until the whole country was occupied, from the Mediterranean on the south, to the Arctic Sea on the north. It was, in fact, very much such a course of events as you may have seen going on in our country. 7. Those portions of America first settled by the Europeans were along the Atlantic seaboard. Here they first built houses, and founded cities. After a while, they went into the farther interior, in search of wild game and new lands. Thus they continued to push farther and farther into the country, and even now they are still advancing to- ward the far west. CHAPTER CVL— EUROPE CONTINUED. Story of the Barbarians continued. 1. I have now shown you how the north of Europe was gradually settled by tribes that emigrated from the south of Europe, and from Asia. These might be compared to a vast stream that continued to flow on, growing wider and advancing farther, until at length the whole country was peopled. 2. Bui you must remark one thing, that these emigrants were sav- ages, and of a warlike character; they therefore did not mingle into one great nation, but each tribe remained distinct. As they increased in numbers, they increased in power. 3. After a while, something would happen to bring two tribes liv- ing near each other into a state of war. Fierce battles would follow, and a great many would be killed. Sometimes one tribe would be vanquished, and they would all be slaughtered, reduced to a state of slavery, or driven out of their country. 4. It was, in short, a state of things very much like that of our American Indians, when this country was first settled by the white people. There was this difference, however, that the northern bar- barians of Europe carried with them the knowledge of many arts. Their weapons of war, therefore, were not merely the bow and ar- row, but they had swords, spears, and shields. 5. They also built better houses than the wigwams of our Indians. Still they were a fierce people, and in many respects were as savage as the wild boars and wild bears which they pursued in the chase. 5. What of the land ? What induced the people to settle in northern Europe ? 6. How does the settlement of America compare with that of Europe ? Ch. C'VI. — 1. How was the north of Europe settled? To what may the emigration of the tribes be compared? 3. What of these emigrants? 3. What of their wars ? 4. What did the state of these bar- barians resemble ? 5. What of them ? 15* 174 SCHOOL HISTORY. 6. Among the most remarkable of these northern tribes were the Gauls, who were the first known inhabitants of France, and who came from Asia several hundred years before Christ ; the Franks and Suevi, who inhabited Germany ; the Goths and the Vandals, who in- habited Norway, Sweden, and Lapland, and afterwards established themselves in Germany ; and the Huns, who lived in Hungary. There were still many other tribes, but it is not necessary to mention them here. 7. Well, you must now imagine all the north of Europe inhabited by these wrfd tribes. Spending their time chiefly in the chase, or in war, or other hardy pursuits, they became bold, daring, and adventu- rous. Their numbers also increased, and some of them became pow- erful nations. 8. They were, however, generally restless, and, like beasts of prey, were constantly looking out for some object upon which they might fall and devour it. So things went on, till at length these barbarians fixed their attention upon the rich cities, the fertile plains, and vine- clad hills of the south of Europe. 9. The Roman empire was now tottering to decay, and the Roman armies were no longer the dread of these tribes. About the year 400, they began to pour down their armies upon the plains of Italy. Ala- ric king of the Goths, laid Rome under contribution, and less than fifty years after, Attila, king of the Huns, threatened the same city with destruction. 10. After this period, these restless invaders continued from time to time to attack the southern regions of Europe, till they made them- selves masters of its finest portions. 11. As the northern barbarians of whom I have been speaking had no books, and wrote no histories, their early story is little known. After getting possession of Rome, Spain, and other southern portions of Europe, they settled in these countries. 12. For a time, literature and learning, the arts of poetry, painting, sculpture, and music, which had been cultivated by the Romans, were unknown in the countries where they once flourished. But by degrees, the new inhabitants became civilized and polished, and the modern nations which now occupy these regions may be considered as in part their descendants. It is now time to proceed with the his- tory of France. 6. Which were the most remarkable of the northern tribes ? 7. Describe their mode ofllfe. 8. What at length attracted their attention ? 9. What of the Roman empire? When did the barbarians attack Italy? What of Alaric and Attila? 10. What did the barbarians continue to do? 11. Where did the northern barbarians settle ? 12. What of them for a time ? What happened at length ? What of the modern nations of the south of Europe ? FRANCE. 175 CHAPTER CVII.— EUROPE CONTINUED. The Gauls. Origin of the French Nation. Little King Pepin. Meroveus. Clodion. 1. The ancient name of France was Gaul, and the inhabitants were called Gauls. These were one of those warlike tribes of which I have just been speaking. At a very early date, they appear to have been numerous and powerful. In the year 390, B. C, they invaded Rome under Brennus, and took that city, but were expelled by Camillus. 2. Under another Brennus, they invaded Greece, as I have told you. In the time of Julius Caesar, the Gauls had made some little progress towards civilization ; but they were still a barbarous people, and re- tained many practices that belong only to savages. They had, how- ever, a good many cities, and these were defended with strong walls. 3. When Caesar entered the country, he found the Gauls sorely pressed by some of the German tribes. At first, he affected to be the deliverer of the Gauls from these troublesome enemies. 4. But the people soon discovered that Caesar's real design was to conquer them. They then began to resist, and for nine long years Ch. CVII. — 1. What was the ancierit name of France? Of the people ? What did they do under Brennus? i. When did they invade Greece ? What of them in the time oX Ju- lius taesar? What of thuir cities ? 3. What did Ciesar find on entering the country? X76 SCHOOL HISTORY. they fought Caesar and his armies with admirable skill and spirit. But the Romans were better versed in the art of war than the G-auls. Their soldiers were better trained, and their implements of war were superior to those of the Gauls. 5. Notwithstanding all this, so brave and obstinate were the Gauls in the defence of their country, that it required all the genius of Julius Caosar one of the greatest leaders that ever lived, aided by the im- mense power of Rome, to subdue them. 6. Caesar was occupied no less than nine years in conquering the Gauls, and it is supposed a million of men were slain in the bloody struggle. From the time of Caesar's conquest, about 50 years B. C, Gaul was a Roman province, and the people gradually adopted the manners and customs of the Romans. Even their language became changed, and assumed a resemblance to the Latin. But between the third and fourth century, the Franks, a German tribe whom I have mentioned, got possession of the greater part of Gaul. 7. It is said, that the Franks who first established themselves in Gaul were led by Pharamond. He died in 428, and was succeeded by his son Clodion, who was celebrated for the beauty of his hair. Clodion died in 448, and was succeeded by Meroveus ; Meroveus died in 45S, and was succeeded by Childeric. Very little is known of these kings, except the last. CHAPTER CVIII.-EUROPE CONTINUED, About Clovis and little King- Pepin. 1. Childeric is considered the founder of the French monarchy. He was succeeded by his son Clovis. When Clovis was only nine- teen years old, he drove the Romans out of France. He afterwards gained a great victory over the Germans. 2. As Clovis had married a Christian princess, he attributed his suc- cess to the God whom she worshipped. He therefore determined to Become a Christian himself, and he was baptized, with three thousand of his subjects, on Christmas day, in the year 496. After the death of Clovis, France was divided among several petty kings. They quarrelled among themselves, and caused great trouble to the nation. The wife of one of them was accused of murdering ten kings, or child- ren of kings. 3. Little king Pepin, otherwise called Pepin the short, thrust all the other kings from their thrones, and made himself sole ruler of 4. What did the people soon discover ? What did they do? What of the Romans ? 5. What of the Gauls ? What was required to subdue them? 6. What was the consequence of this struggle between the Gauls and Romans ? What of Gaul from this time ? What of the Franks : 7. Pharamond? Clodion? Meroveus? What of these kings? Ch. CVIII.— 1. Who was Childeric ? What cf Clovis? '2. Why did Clovis determine to he a Christian Wiicn was he baptized? What of Prance after his death? What of the lungs ? FRANCE. France. He was a very small man, being only four feet and a hall high; but he had a mighty spirit in that little body. Childeric. Clovis I. Clotilda, wife of Clovis. 4. Moreover, he had an enormous deal of strength. Knowing that fome of his courtiers made fun of his little size, he resolved to show them, that there was as much manhood in him as there could possibly be in a giant. He therefore invited them to see a fight between a lion and a bull. 5. The lion gave a tremendous roar, and leaped upon the bull's back, sticking: his claws deep into the flesh. The bull also roared with pain and terror, as well he might. Then little king Pepin stood on tiptoe on his throne, to make himself as tall as he could ; and he roared out to his courtiers, full as loud as either the bull or the lion : — 6. "Which of you all," cried he, "will make that lion let go his hold ?" The courtiers all stood silent and abashed ; for they had no notion of venturing within reach of the lion's claws. "Then I '11 do it myself!" said king Pepin the Short. So the valiant little king leaped down from his throne, and drew a sword almost as long: as himself. Brandishing it in the air, he ran up to the lion, who was still clinging to the mad bull's back. 7. When the lion beheld this terrible small champion, he opened his enormous jaws, as if lie meant to snap him up at a single mouth- ful. But little king Pepin aimed a blow at him with his sword, and hit him fair upon the neck. 8. Down feil the lion's head on one side of the bull, and down fell his body on the other ! And from that time forward, the courtiers 3. 4. Describe little kiri£ Pepin. What did he invite his people to see? 5. 6.7. Eelat* king Pepin'» encounter with the lion. S. How did his bravery affect hii courtiert? . What of Charlemagne ? Over what countries did he reign ? What did he wish ? FRANCE. 179 altar of the church as if to say his prayers. There was a large con-, gregation in the church, and they were much edified by the devout behavior of Charlemange. But while he was kneeling, the pope stole softly behind him, and placed the imperial crown upon his head. 5. This was the crown which all the old emperors of Rome had worn, and when the people beheld it on the head of Charlemagne, they shouted " Long live the emperor !" Charlemagne pretended to be surprised and angry ; but he took care to keep the imperial crown upon his head. 6. Charlemagne died in the year 814, when he was quite an old man. While he was alive, as I have mentioned, he wore a sheep- skin cloak. But after he was dead, his attendants dressed him in robes of imperial purple. 7. They placed a throne of gold in his sepulchre, and set the dead body of the gray-bearded old emperor upon it. A sword was girded about his waist. He had a golden crown upon his head, a golden sceptre and shield at his feet, a golden chalice in his hand, and a Bible upon his knees. 8. Over the sepulchre, there was a magnificent triumphal arch, with an inscription to the memory of the mighty Charlemagne. And having wasted all this splendor upon the senseless corpse, the attendants shut up the tomb, and went to pay their court to Charle- magne's successor. 9. This was his son, entitled Louis the Mild. I know not where- fore he was called the Mild, for one of the acts of his reign was to put out the eyes of another king, whom he had taken prisoner. When Louis died, he left his dominions to his three sons. They im- mediately went to war with each other. It is said that a hundred thousand men were slain in one of their battles. 10. Some of the succeeding kings of France were Charles the Bald, Louis the Stammerer, Charles the Fat, Charles the simple, Louis the Foreigner, and Hugh Capet. These sovereigns performed no actions that need be recorded in my book. CHAPTER CX.-EUROPE CONTINUED. About the Crusades or Holy Wars. 1. I must now give you some account of the Crusades or Holy Wars, undertaken by the European nations for the recovery of Jeru- salem, which was in the hands of tlie Turks. The Christians had a great reverence for this city, for here Christ preached, here he per- 4. 5. What did he do? Describe his coronation. 6. When did Charlemagne die' How was his body dressed for his burial ? S. What was put over the sepulchre ? 9. Who was Louis the Mild? Whatofhiin? Waat of his three sons ? 10. Who were some of the •ucceeding king* of France ? 180 SCHOOL HISTORY. formed many miracles, here he was crucified, and here he rose from the dead. 2. On account of the pious reverence entertained for what they called the Holy City, many Christian pilgrims went on foot to visit it. It was very common for the Roman Catholic priests to impose this pilgrimage on persons who had committed some sin, and they were made to believe, that in this way alone they could receive pardon >f God. Battle between a Crusader and a Saracen. 3. Now the pilgrims to Jerusalem were often treated ivith cruelty and scorn by the Turks, who held possession of Jerusalem and the country around it. The pilgrims returned to Europe, and gave an account of the treatment they received. This excited the indignation of the Christians, and they were easily induced to unite in a great effort for taking the Holy Land from the infidel Turks. 4. The pope of Rome at this time had vast influence, and he wished to acquire more. When this project was proposed, therefore, he gave it his sanction, thinking that he should extend his dominion over Palestine, if the country should be taken. 5. Peter the Hermit was the principal agent in exciting the people to the first crusade. He was a half-starved monk, and went about bareheaded, with a rope round his waist, and wearing a garment of coarse cloth. This was so short that it barely covered his body, leaving his arms and legs naked. 6. It might seem that such a scarecrow as this would rather have excited ridicule than reverence. But Peter had been in Palestine, and Ch. CX. — 1. What were the crusades ? Why were they undertaken ? Why did the Christians reverence Jerusalem ? 2. What of pilgrimages to Jerusalem? 3. How were ^he pilgrims treated? What did they do ? What was the consequence of their represents tion» , 4. What of the pope of Rome ? 6. Describe Peter the Hermit ? FRANCE. 181 had experienced the insults of the Turks. He therefore spoke of things he had seen, and the people listened with a willing sympathy. 7. Thus Peter went from city to city, and everywhere crowds came to hear him. There was soon such a state of excitement, that the princes assembled, and armies were speedily gathered for the enterprise. Thus in the year 1096, Peter set out with two hundred thousand men at his heels. He carried a ponderous cross upon his shoulders, and his followers wore crosses of red cloth sewed upon their clothes. S. But scarcely had his army landed in Asia, when sultan Solyman attacked them, and made a terrible slaughter. As a trophy of his victory over the poor wretches, he built a pyramid of their bones. Other armies of crusaders met with similar misfortunes. 9. It is computed, that ei^ht hundred and fifty thousand Christians lost their lives in the course of the first crusade. And all this slaughter took place before they had even come in sight of Jerusalem. 10. There was another army, however, belonging to the first crusade, that had better suceess. This consisted of eighty thousand men, and was led by a French prince called Godfrey of Bologne. He proceeded through Asia Minor, took several cities, and captured Jerusalem in 1099. From this period till the year 1187, the Holy City remained in the hands of the Christians, when it was again captured by the Turks, in whose hands it has since remained. 11. No less than five other crusades took place; the last being commenced in 1248. This, with most of the others proved unsuc- cessful. The whole number of men who lost their lives in these wild expeditions was not less than two millions. 12. It appears, that many of the crusaders were good men, and some, perhaps, were wise ones. Several of the leaders were brave knights, and they went forth clad in bright steel armor, and mounted upon fine horses. But a large portion of the armies were of a different character. Some were half crazy people, filled with religious zeal, and a larger portion were thieves and robbers, who joined the expedi- tions that they might share in the plunder of cities that should be taken. 13. But although the motives of many of the crusaders were selfish, though the great object of these expeditions was not very important, and though much slaughter and bloodshed flowed from them ; still the half barbarous inhabitants of Europe brought from the East many arts that tended to refine and civilize the people. In this, and other ways, the crusades produced some good results. 6. Whatofhim? 7. What effect had his preaching ? What took place iu 1096 ? 8. Who attacked the army in Asia ? What. dljBke sultan do? What of other crusaders? 9. Whatofthe hr.-l crusade.' 10. What .d' I hoTjUOny under (lodfroy of Bologne ? What city did he take? When did the Turks retakemWwsalem ? 11. How many crusades were there? When was the first crusade hegun ? ^Bjle last ? How many men lost their lives i» the crusades? 12, What appears concerning many of the crusaders? Their leaders? Whit of a large portion of the armies? 13. What good results did the crusades produce? 16 182 SCHOOL HISTORY. CHAPTER CXI. -EUROPE CONTINUED. About the Feudal System. Ruins of an ancient feudal castle. 1. I suppose you think it is now time to proceed with the history of France ; but do not be impatient. It is not right for one who under- takes to tell the history of mankind, to speak only of kings and the great battles which they fight. We must not forget to consider how the people lived, and what they were about while their rulers were thus engaged. 2. If I were only to speak of little king Pepin and Charlemagne, and the popes and other rulers, and tell you what they did, you might still be ignorant of what their subjects were doing. You might not know whether they were happy or unhappy, whether they were in a state of poverty or plenty, whether they were in the enjoyment of freedom, or suffering the miseries of despotism. 3. I trust you will therefore excuse me for talking a little about the Feudal System, Chivalry, and a few other big words, which it is proper you should understand. I have told you that the northern tribes of Europe were fond of war, and of a restless, roving character. War was indeed the chief business of the men. A few of them wete engaged in agriculture ; but a large portion of them led the lives of soldiers, either wholly, or at such times as their services were re- quired. 4. A few were devoted to the building of houses, to the manufac- ture of armor, aud such other articles as the simple manners of the Ch. CXI. — 1. What must not be forgotten .' 2. Why must the history of the people ujt be neglected ? 3. What of the northern tribes of Europe ? What of the men ? FRANCE. 183 people rendered necessary. But even these artisans occasionally bore arms, and went with their countrymen to the field of battle if they were needed. 5. But, as I have said before, the great business of society in these times was war; either for defence against the attacks of other tribes, or for the purpose of conquering other tribes. The chiefs, or leaders, were generally the bravest and strongest men, those who would be most likely in a battle of hard blows to insure victory. 6. When a country was conquered, the lands, towns, cities, gold, silver, merchandise, horses, cattle, and all other property belonging to the conquered people, were considered the spoils of the victors. The people who were defeated, were either killed, driven away, or reduced to a state of servitude. 7. Strange as it may seem, this making of war and robbing people of their lands and possessions, was not only considered lawful, but it was reckoned grand sport. It is true, that the soldiers had often hard fare and hard knocks; occasionally they were wounded, and many of them were slain. But when the battle was over, those who survived celebrated their victory with feasting and drinking, and other amuse- ments suited to the tastes of barbarous men. 8. Between the intervals of fighting, they had mimic battles among themselves, or two stout fellows would fight with swords in the pre- sence of the whole people. At other times, during a wet day, or a dull night, they would prolong their festivities by telling stories of the great deeds they had done, or seen, or heard of, or by singing ballads of bloodshed and battle. 9. It frequently happened that some person in the camp had a great talent for singing and story-telling; he therefore would be often called upon to exercise his gift. So he would amuse the company with wild legends of the chase, in which a king or prince had a terri- ble battle with a fierce boar or a rough bear. 10. Or he would tell of some chief who had performed wonderful deeds, or perhaps he would weave some superstitious tale of ghosts that walked abroad by moonlight, or of some murdered prince whose spirit often came at night to haunt the castle where he once dwelt. 11. Such were some of the amusements which repaid these barba- rians for the toils of war. But these were by no means all. The real object of most of the wars among these people was plunder. War took the place of trade and commerce among them, and the prin- cipal inducement to carry it on was to obtain the lands and the goods of other nations. It was, in short, a system of plunder, and the sev- eral tribes might be considered as so many bands of robbers. 12. When a country was conquered, the spoils were distributed among the victors according to their rank. The king, or chief, had a lar^e share, the inferior chiefs had a smaller share, and the common soldiers had still less. The lands were divided in this way ; but it f>. What was the great business of society in these times? What of the chiefs ? 6 What of a conquered country ? The people? 7. How were war and robbery considered ? Tha foldiers ? The -urvivors? 8. What was done in the intervals of fighting ? 9. What of •lory telling? II. What was the real object of war among these ancient nations ? Whit of war? How might the tribes be considered ? 16 184 SCHOOL HISTORY. was always understood, that those who received the land were after* wards bound to go and fight whenever called upon by their chiefs. 13. The lands were not held in those times as they are now among us; each individual did not own a piece of land and build upon it, or cultivate it as he liked. But a large tract might belong to the king, and a smaller tract might belong to the inferior chiefs or barons. 14. The king or baron built upon his land an immense strong castle of stone ; around it, the people, who were called his vassals or slaves ; built their little huts. These tilled the land, taking what was neces- sary for their own support, but giving the best of every thing to their liege lord. 15. Now what is meant by the Feudal System is this; that the vassals of a baron who lived upon his land were bound to do military service whenever the baron required it. So also the barons, under the Feudal System, were required to do military service, bringing into the field all the men they could muster, whenever their king re- quired it. 16. In return for these services, the lord of the manor, or owner of the land, was expected to protect his people intime of war; and as the castle was usually large and strong the people fled to it, when- ever an enemy appeared in sight. 17. Here in the castle they would make the best defence in their power. Sometimes they would be besieged for months; but so long as the wines lasted, and the stores of provisions held out, the besieged inmates of the castle would hold their revels, tell their stories, and sinfr their sonsrs. CHAPTER CXIL— EUROPE CONTINUED. About Chivalry, or Knight- Errantry. 1. I hope you now understand how matters and things went on among the rude tribes of France, Germany, and most other northern countries of Europe, in early times. I hope also you understand what is meant by the Feudal System. 2. If you will reflect a moment you will perceive that Europe at this time was divided among a great number of warlike tribes or na- tions; each tribe having a king, each king having under him several powerful barons, and each baron having a good many vassals. 3. You will remember, that the kings and barons dwelt in strong stone castles, and if you should ever go to Europe, you will see many of these still in existence, some of which were built more than a thousand years ago. Most of them are in ruins, but they are interest- 12. What of the division of spoils? What of lands? 13. How were the lands held in these times? 14. What of a king or baron ? The people or vassals? 15. What was the Feudal System? What were the vassals and barons required to do ? 10. What was ex- pected of the lord of the manor ? 17. What of a besieged castle ? Ch. CXIL— 2. What . When did Charles IV. die ? When did Philip of Valois become king? What did Edward III. claim ? 6. What did king Edward do ? What of the battle of Cressy ? 190 SCHOOL HISTORY. 7. In 1350, John the Good, son of Philip of Valois, succeeded to the throne of France. The country was invaded by an English army under the eldest son of Edward the Third. He was called the Black Prince, on account of the color of his armor. 8. King John of France, with sixty thousand men, encountered the Black Prince of England, near Poictiers. The Black Prince had only eight thousand soldiers. But the English archers and cross-bow men, let fly their arrows at the French, and made a dreadful havoc among them. King John was taken and kept prisoner four years in London. 9. John the Good, was succeeded by his son, Charles the Wise. King Edward of England had now grown old, and his son, the brave Black Prince, was dead. The French therefore got back all the territortes which the English had won of them, except the town ot Calais. 10. But when Charles the Well-beloved was king of France, the English renewed the war. Henry the Fifth, now king of England, invaded France. At the battle of Agincourt, he had but fifteen thou- sand men, while the French had nearly a hundred thousand. 11. Yet the English gained a glorious victory, with the loss of only forty men. On the side of the French, there were seven princes, the high constable of France, and ten thousand gentlemen killed, besides many prisoners. In 1420, the English king entered Paris in triumph. 12. But Henry, king of England, died soon afterwards ; and then the French began to beat the English. The chief leader of the French at this time, was a girl of eighteen, named Joan of Arc, or the Maid of Orleans. She was very beautiful. The French believed that Heaven had sent her to rescue their country from the English in- vaders. The English believed her to be a witch, and that the evil one assisted her in fighting against them. 13. For a considerable time, it was found impossible to withstand holy Joan, the Maid of Orleans. She was clad in bright steel armor, and rode in front of the French army, on a snow-white horse. In her hand, she carried a consecrated banner, on which was painted the image of our Saviour. But, at last, she was wounded and taken prisoner. The English condemned her to be burnt alive for witch- craft. 14. She was accordingly bound to a stake, in the marketplace of Rouen. The English army looked on, rejoicing, while the flames roared and whirled around her. When the fire had burned out, there remained nothing but ashes and whitened bones of the valiant Maid of Orleans. 7. Who became king in 1350 ? Who was the Black Prince ? 8. Who encountered the Black Prince ? Describe the battle of Poictiers ? 9. Who succeeded John the Good ? Why were the French able to win back their territories from the English ? 10. Who was the next king- of France ? What battle was fought with Henry V. ? 11. Whicli side won the victory ? What was the loss of the French ? What took place in 1420 ? 12. What happened after the death of Henry V. ? Describe the Maid of Orleans ? What did the French and English think of her ? 13. How did she appear at the head of the army i 14 What was her sad fate ? FRANCE. 191 CHAPTER CXV.— EUROPE CONTINUED. The Reigns of several French Kings. Murder of Henry IV. 1. But, though the Maid of Orleans was no longer their leader, the French were still successful. The English lost nearly all that Henry the Fifth had won. The French monarch was called Charles the Victorious, on account of his many triumphs. 2. Yet he was an unhappy king. His son hated him, and attempted to kill him by poison. After the discovery of this plot, the poor old king was afraid to lake food enough to support life, lest he should take poison with it. So he wasted away, and died miserably. 3. His son, Louis the Eleventh, succeeded him in 1461. He was a crafty, treacherous, and cruel king. Once, when a nobleman was tc> be beheaded, Louis ordered his infant children to be placed under the scaffold, that they might be sprinkled with their father's blood. 4. One of the most famous of the French kings, was Francis the First, who ascended the throne in 1515. He fought against the Swiss, and against the emperor of Germany; but the emperor took him prisoner at the battle of Pavia. 5. There was no war with England during the reign of Francis the First; but he once held an interview with the English king near Ca- lais. So much magnificence was displayed on both sides, that the place of meeting was called the Field of the Cloth of Gold. Ch. CXV.— 1. What of the French people? The English? The French king? 2. What of Charles the Victorious ! 3. What of Louis XI.? When did Francis I. ascend the throne .' What of him ? Describe the interview at Calais ? 192 SCHOOL HISTORY. 6. In 1560, Charles the Ninth became king of France. He was then a boy of ten years old. His reign was disgraced by one of the bloodiest scenes in history. It is called the Massacre of St. Bartholo- mew. 7. The Catholics (those who were attached to the pope of Rome) had conspired to murder all the Protestants, (those who did not like the pope) throughout France. On the night of Saint Bartholomew's day, their wicked project was put in execution. Some writers affirm, that a hundred thousand Protestants were murdered. S. The king himself sat at one of his palace windows, with a mus- ket in his hand, and shot some of the poor wretches. But he was soon called to receive the recompense of his crimes. After the mas- sacre, he was afflicted with disease, and he died in 1574. 9. The next king, but one, was Henry the Fourth, who ascended the throne in 1589. He was a good king, a brave warrior, and a gen- erous man. His subjects loved him, and the French have always been proud of Henry the Fourth. 10. Yet the affection of his people could not save his life. One day he was riding through the streets of Paris in his coach. Seven courtiers were with him. Other vehicles were in the way, so that the coachman was compelled to stop the horses. The king chose to alight. 11. There was a man near the coach, named Ravaillac. He was waiting for a chance to kill the king; and now, seeing him about to get out of the coach, he drew a poniard. All the power of France could not now be of any avail. The first blow of the poniard wounded the king, and the second killed him. CHAPTER CXVI.-EUROPE CONTINUED. The Reigns of Louis the Grand and his Successor. 1. The murdered Henry was succeeded by his son, Louis the Thir- teenth. The government was chiefly directed by Cardinal Richelieu, an ambitious priest. He grew more powerful than the king himself. 2. The next king was Louis the Fourteenth, whom the French call Louis the Grand. He was a very proud and haughty monarch. He endeavored to make France the greatest country on earth; not that he really cared for the welfare of his subjects, but because he wished to exalt himself above all other kings. 3. He had a peculiar manner of walking, which would have been ridiculous in a common man, but was thought extremely majestic in a king. He used to wear a large curled Avig, and nobody ever saw 6. When did Charles IX. come to the throne ? Describe the massacre of St. Bartholo- mew. S. When did Charles IX. die? 9. When did Henry IV. come to the throne? What of him ? 11. How did he lose his life? Ch. CXVI. — 1. Who succeeded Henry IV. ? What of cardinal Richelieu? 2. Who was the next king ? What can you say of Louis le Grand? FRANCE. 193 mm without it. He would never pull off his wig till he had got into bed and closed the curtains. 4. This king began to reign at five years old, and reigned no less than seventy-two years. He was continually at Avar. Li the early part of his reign, his armies achieved many splendid victories. 5. But, in the king's old age, the English duke of Marlborough wasted his troops, and reduced his kingdom to great distress. The French people now grew weary of their grand monarch. 6. And well they might be weary of him, for he had taken all their money, in order that he might have the means of going to war. He seemed to think it more necessary that he should have glory, than that they should have bread. Louis XIV, Maria Theresa, wife of Louis XIV. Louis XV, 7. At last, in 1715, the old king died. As he had been so grand in *\is lifetime, his courtiers deemed it proper that he should carry as much grandeur with him to the tomb as possible. They therefore prepared a magnificent funeral. S. But wherever the procession passed, the people heaped curses on the royal corpse. They hissed so loudly, that, if the king haJ not been stone dead, he would have started up in his coffin. Thus ended the glorious reign of Louis the Grand. 9. All the sons and grandsons of old Louis the Grand had died be- fore him. He was therefore succeeded by his ereat-grandson, a cn j|d of five years old, who now became Louis the Fifteenth. 4. What ofhis ware ? 5. Whal oflhe Duke of Marlborough ? fi. W'liat oftlie French people? 7. When did Louis le Grand die? Describe Ihefuueral? 9. Who succeeded Louis XIV. ? 17 194 SCHOOL HISTORY. 10. Until the little. king should become of age to take the sceptre inlo his own hands, the duke of Orleans was declared regent of" France. Pie was a profligate man. Instead of teaching the young king how to make his subjects prosperous and happy, he set him ail example of all sorts of wickedness. 11. And Louis the Fifteenth turned out just such a king as mighl have been expected. In his whole reign, of fifty-nine years, he seems to have thought of nothing but his own selfish pleasures. 12. His kingdom was almost ruined and his subjects were starv ing. But if an earthquake had swallowed France and all its inhabit- ants, the king would hardly have cared. The reign of this odious monarch prepared the French to hate the very name of monarchy. He died in 1774, and was succeeded by his grandson, Louis the Six- teenth, who was then a young man of twenty. 13. Thus by the extravagance of Louis the Fourteenth and the profligacy of Louis the Fifteenth, a foundation was laid for what is called the French Revolution, of which I shall tell you in the next chapter. 14. I should be very glad to pass by the story of that awful period, for I know it can give my reader no pleasure to read of violence and bloodshed. But it is necessary to read the dark as well as the bright pages of history. 15. We may learn from the French revolution how much evil may be brought upon a country by bad rulers, and as some of my young pupils will hereafter be men, and be called upon to assist in choosing rulers, they may be made to feel the duty of choosing good ones. CHAPTER CXVIL— EUROPE CONTINUED. The French Revolutio?i. 1. Loins the Sixteenth had no talents which could render him fit to govern a nation. But he was a man of good heart, kind disposi- tion, and upright intentions. With all his defects, there has seldom been a better king ; for, if he was unable to do good, he was unwill- ing to do harm. 2. The king was married to an Austrian archduchess, named Ma- rie Antoinette. She had great beauty and accomplishments; but she was never a favorite of the French people. 3. Not long after this kins and queen were crowned, the American revolution broke out. The United States declared themselves a free and independent republic. The people of France took a great inter- est in the affairs of America; and they began to think that a repub- lic was^ better kind of government than a monarchy. 10. What of the duke of Orleans ? 11. What, of Louis XV. ? 12. Whou did he die ? What of the French Revolution ? Ch. CXVII.— 1. What of Louis XVI. ? -2. Wl.al of Marie Antoinette ? 3. When did the American revolution begin? What of the French peopj,, ? FRANCE, 195 4. They compared the tyranny under which they and their fore- fathers had groaned for ages, with the freedom which made the Americans so prosperous and happy. The more they reflected upon the subject, the more discontented they became with their own con- dition. Louis XVI, Marie Antoinette, wife of Louis XVI. Louis XVIII. 5. The French are a people whose minds are easily excited, and whenever any thing' remarkable is going on among them, you would think that the whole nation was almost mad, or perhaps had been drinking too much wine. So it happened in this case. They now began to rave against the king, queen, and nobles, the priests, the gentlemen, and all others whom they formerly respected. They even blasphemed against Heaven itself. 6. In 1789, the mob of Paris tore down the Bastile. This was an old castle, where the kings of France had been accustomed to confine such of their subjects as offended them. Many a poor wretch had been thrown into the dungeons of the Bastile, and never again beheld the sunshine. 7. The destruction of the Bastile was a good thinsf ; and so like- wise were many other of the first movements of the French revolu- ti m. But when the people had once begun to change then ancient government, they knew not where to stop. 8. It was not long before blood began to flow. No man nor wo- man in the kingdom was now safe, unless they wore a red cap upon their heads, which was called the cap of liberty. 5. How do the French appear when any tiling remarkable is going on ? 0. What wai done id 1689? What of the Bastile ? 7. What of the destruction of this old cutle? 8. What were people obliged to wear upon their heads? 196 SCHOOL HISTORY. 9. At this period, it was no uncommon thing to see a mob of men and* women in the streets of Paris, carrying a bloody head upon a pole. And those who looked at the features would perhaps recognise the countenance of some great nobleman or beautiful princess. 10. In a little while longer, there were so many heads to be cut off, that the work could not be done fast enough in the ordinary way. Il was therefore necessary to do it by machinery ; and a horrible instru- ment, called the guillotine, was invented for the purpose. 11. This infernal contrivance was set to work upon the proud no bles, and the holy priesthood, and the beautiful ladies of France Hundreds of their heads fell upon the pavement of Paris, and theii blood run like a river through the streets. 12. When many of the loftiest heads in the kingdom had been cut off, the people fixed their eyes on the head that wore a crown. " Off with the king's head too!" cried they. So they dragged the poor, harmless king before the national convention, and he was forthwith sentenced to the guillotine. 13. As the poor king mounted the steps of the scaffold, he gazed around at the fierce and cruel multitude. It seemed all like a dream, that they, his born subjects, should be waiting there to see him die. Then he looked at the guillotine, and beheld it stained with the blood of the thousand victims who had been dragged thither before him. 14. He could not yet believe but that his royal blood was precious to his people. He lingered, — he was loth to lay down his head, — he shivered with the agony of his spirit. There stood a holy priest be- side him on the scaffold. Other priests, in those dreadful times, had abjured their God ; but here was one who held fast his faith. Other subjects had betrayed their king; but here was one who revered him most upon the scaffold. 15. He whispered consolation to the unhappy king, and pointed heavenward. The victim mustered his fainting courage, and laid his head upon the block. "Son of saint Louis," said the priest, "ascend to heaven !" 16. Down came the axe of the guillotine, and the head that had worn a crown was severed from the body ! The blood of a kingly race gushed out upon the scaffold. Thus the crimes and misused power of many kings had brought vengeance on their innooent de- scendant. CHAPTER CXVIII.-EUROPE CONTINUED. The Fuse of Napoleon Bonaparte. 1. The day of the king's execution was the 21st of January, 1793. Not many months afterwards, the queen was likewise beheaded 9 What was common in Paris at tin's lime ? 10. Why was the guillotiue invented ? 11. What use was made of it ? 13. Describe the execution olLouM XVI. FRANCE. 197 France was now ruled by a succession of bloody monsters, who, one day, were sending crowds to the guillotine, and, the next day, were sent thither themselves. This anarchy was what the French called a Republic. 2. In the mean time, war was breaking out on all sides. Austria, Prussia, England, Holland, Spain, and Russia sent armies against France. The French raised a million of men, and bade defiance to \11 Europe. 3. In the French army, there was a young lieutenant of artillery, uamed Napoleon Bonaparte. When the war began, he was an un- known and friendless youth. But he distinguished himself in every battle and every siege, till, in a very few years, the whole world had heard of Bonaparte. 4. When he was only twenty-six years old, he conquered Italy. The next year he compelled the emperor of Austria to make peace. In 179S, he invaded Egypt, and fought many battles in the sandy deserts, and among the pyramids. 5. The French were now tired of being governed by men whose only engine of government was the guillotine. They wanted a ruler who would deserve their obedience by his sagacity and energy, and not merely compel them to obedience by the fear of having their heads cut off. 6. Napoleon Bonaparte was such a man. He was not a good man, nor a truly wise one. He was a selfish and ambitious despot. But, perhaps he was a more suitable ruler for such a people as the French, than if he had been a different man. Ch. CXVIII. — 1. When was Louis XVI. beheaded? Describe the French republic? 2. What countries now went to war witli France ? 3. What of Napoleon Bonaparte ? 4. What acts did Napoleon perform ? G. What of the French people at this time ? 6. What of Napoleon? 1h4 17* 198 SCHOOL HISTORY. 7. He saw that the French were now so excited, that it would be difficult, perhaps impossible, to restrain them. He thought it better that they should make war on foreigners than slaughter each other, and with the sword rather than the guillotine. So, partly because he could not help it, but chiefly because he was ambitious, Napoleon Bonaparte became a mighty conqueror. CHAPTER CXIX.— EUROPE CONTINUED. The Fall of Bonaparte. The Burning of Moscow. 1. In 1802, Bonaparte was elected consul of the French republic, for life. Two years afterwards he was proclaimed emperor, by the name of Napoleon. He had now more power than any of the ancient kings. 2. I cannot follow this great general in his marches all over Europe, nor even number the victories which he won. Wherever he went, monarchs humbled themselves before him. He drove them from their thrones, and placed his own brothers and chief officers there instead. He gave away royal diadems like playthings. He was called the Man of Destiny, because fate seemed to have ordained that he should always be victorious. 3. But, in 1812, the spell of his success began to be broken. He invaded Russia with a vast army, and penetrated to the city of Mos- 7. What were his thoughts upon the French ? What did he become ? Ch. CXIX. — 1. What were the titles of Napoleon? 2. What happened wherever he went? What was he called ? "RANGE. ^ 199 cow. The Russians set the city on fire. Winter was comicg on, and the French soldiers had nowhere to shelter themselves. 4. They retreated towards Poland. On their way thither, they fought many battles with the 'Russians, and the weather was so bitter cold, that the bodies of the slain were frozen stiff. The snow was ' crimsoned with their blood. 5. Before they reached the frontiers of Poland, three-fourths of the army were destroyed. The emperor Napoleon fled homeward in a sledge, and returned to Paris. He soon raised new armies, and was ready to take the field again. 6. But all the nations of Europe were now allied against him, and, after a few more battles, he was driven from Germany into France. The enemy followed him. They compelled him to surrender the imperial crown of France in exchange for the sovereignty of the little island of Elba, in the Mediterranean. 7. Napoleon went to Elba, and remained there almost a year. But in March, 1815, he suddenly landed again on the French coast. He was almost alone when he set his foot on the shore. But there were a multitude of his grim old veterans throughout the country. These shouted for joy, and trampled on the white flag of the Bourbon kings, who had succeeded him. In a few days, Napoleon's banner again waved triumphant all over France. S. The nations of Europe now mustered their armies once more. Thev were led by the English Duke of Wellington. Napoleon marched into Flanders, or Belgium, to meet them. He was followed by almost every young Frenchman that could shoulder a musket. 9. The emperor Napoleon's last battle was fought at Waterloo, on the 18th of June, 1815. There he was utterly overthrown, and France was overthrown with him. The warlike emperor was sent to die on the Island of St. Helena, and the Bourbon king was again established on the throne of Louis the Sixteenth. 10. But a strange and interesting scene has lately been witnessed in France relating to Napoleon. The French people did not like to think that the remains of Napoleon were far away upon the rock of St. Helena. So in 1S40, Louis Philippe, king of the French, sent his son in a national ship, and he brought the body of the late emperor back to France. 11. The people received the body with military honors, and many of Napoleon's old soldiers and officers, rushed to the side of the coffin, and wept over it as if he had been their father. With vast ceremony the body was taken to Paris, and there it is now interred, in the famous edifice called the Hotel of Invalids. 3. What happened in 1S12? What of the French army? 5. What of Napoleon? G. What happened to him ? 7. How long did Napoleon remain at Elba ? What of him in 1815? Describe his landing in France? 8. Who led the nations of Europe? What did Napoleon do ? Who followed him ? 9. When was the battle of Waterloo fought ? Fate of Napoleon? 10. What has lately been witnessed in France ? 200 SCHOOL HISTORY. CHAPTER CXX.-EURQPE CONTINUED. Recent Affairs of France. 1. Loins the Eighteenth, the new king of France, was a fat, quiet, respectable sort of old gentleman, and seems to have been chiefly distinguished for his love of oysters. He died in 1S24, and was suc- ceeded by his brother, Charles the Tenth. 2. It was said of all the Bourbon family, that they had learnt nothing during their exile from France, nor forgotten anything. And Charles soon proved that he had not forgotten that his ancestors had exercised absolute power, nor learnt that such power is very danger- ous to possess or exercise. 3. In 1830, when Charles the Tenth had sat on the throne about six years, he forbade the printing of any newspapers, except such as praised his conduct and government. 4. The mob of Paris immediately rose, and began a war against the royal troops. They beat out the brains of the king's soldiers with paving stones, and shot them from the windows of the houses. The old king, who had not forgotten the days of the revolution, began to tremble for his head. 5. In order to ke.ep it on his shoulders, he took off his golden crown, and put it on the head of his grandson. But the French would not acknowledge the little fellow for their king. They raised large armies, and drove Charles the Tenth and his family out of the kingdom. 6. They then asked the good and glorious La Fayette, (the man who came and fought with our countrymen in the time of the Revo- lution,) what sort of a government they should have. He would have chosen a republic, like our own; but he knew that his country- men were not like us. 7. He therefore told them, that the government must be a limited monarchy, and that Louis Philippe, the Duke of Orleans, must be their king. Louis Phillippe was accordingly raised to the throne. 8. He went on prosperously for a time, and was considered the most successful sovereign of the age. But in February 1848, a revolution broke out in Paris, which extended over France. 9. In December, 1848, Louis Napoleon Bonaparte (a nephew of the emperor Napoleon) was elected President. He assumed the duties of the office immediately, thus becoming the first President of the Republic of France. 10. In December, 1851, Louis Napoleon suppressed by violence the republic, and soon after was declared emperor, under the name of Napoleon III. Ch. CXX.— 1. What of Louis XVIII. ? When did he die ? 2. What was said of the Bourbon family? What did Charles prove ? 3. What took place in 1S30 1 4. What of the mob of Paris? 5. What did the old king do? 0. What did the French ask La Fayette! 7. What did he tell them ? Who was made king? What has since occurred? GERMANY. <201 CHAPTER CXXL— EUROPE CONTINUED. About Germany. 1. Germany lies to the east of France, and contains no less than 'hirty-six different kingdoms and states, beside Austria and Prussia, which are sometimes considered as making a part of Germany, and of which I shall tell you by and by. These thirty-six states and king- doms contain about twelve millions of inhabitants. 2. Some of the principal kingdoms of Germany are Bavaria, Wur- temburg, Hanover, and Saxony. They are nearly all governed by a king, or grand duke, or prince of some kind ; yet they are leagued to- gether under a sort of congress, called a diet, which meets at Frank- fort To this diet the states send deputies. 3. There are a great many large towns and cities in Germany. Among these, the principal are Hamburgh, which carries on a good deal of commerce with this country ; Munich, which is a very splen- did city ; Carlesruhe, which has its streets arranged like the sticks of an open fan ; Dresden, which is famous for the beautiful country around it, and Frankfort, which is encircled by a belt of fine gardens and public walks. 4. I could easily write a book about Germany, for it is full of curi- ous and interesting things. In the cities there are a great many churches, in the Gothic style, which excite the wonder and admira- tion of a traveller, on account of their grandeur, and the skill with which many parts of them are carved. 5. In many of the towns there are very curious manufactures, par- ticularly of musical boxes, toys for children, and clocks of all kinds. The Germans are very ingenious in these matters, and sometimes they make clocks so cunningly contrived, that at every hour a little bird will come out, flutter his wings, and sing a song, or perhaps tell you the time of day. 6. If you ever travel in Germany, you will find that the people are very fond of music, All the boys and girls are taught music as a part of their education. Most of them can play upon some instrument. The flute is a great favorite, and is called the German flute, either because it was invented in Germany, or because it is more in use amongst the Germans than elsewhere. 7. In passing through Germany, you will often notice the ruins of castles, some of which were built a thousand or twelve hundred years ago. These belonged to the barons who occupied the country in the old feudal times, of which I have told you in the history of France. Ch. CXXI. — 1. Where is Germany anitheir principal leader. After sixty pitched battles with the em- peror's troops, the liberty of Switzerland was established, and it be- came a free and independent republic. 2. Describe the appearance of the country there. 3. What of the people ? 4. What of Albert I. 3 What of Gesler ? 5. What of William Tell ? 6. How did Swilzeiland ob tain her liberty ? • GERMANY. 205 7. It is said, that some of the Swiss still believe that William Tell is not yet dead, though it is nearly five hundred years since he was seen on earth. They suppose, that he lies asleep in a cavern near the lake of Lucerne, with two other men who assisted in founding the public. 8. These three slumberers are called the Men of Grutle. If ever Switzerland shall be enslaved, it is fancied that they will start from their sleep, and come forth with their ancient garb and weapons, and rouse up the people to fight for their freedom. 9. Since the time of William Tell, who died in the year 1534, Switzerland has generally been a free country. But during the French revolution it was conquered ; it has since been restored to independ- ence, yet the people are overawed by the kings that reign in the neighboring countries. 10. Many of the Swiss leave their beautiful, but poor country, to seek their fortunes in other lands. Some enter foreign armies as sol- diers, and some go to Paris and London, to sing songs, or carry about shows, and thus get a little money. You often find a Swiss boy in the streets of these great cities, doing what he can to get a living. CHAPTER CXXIV.-EUROPE CONTINUED. Sequel of German History. 1. I will now proceed with the history of Germany. Charles the Fiftl* was the most renowned of the emperors of Germany. He was likewise king of Spain, and ruler of the Netherlands, and part of Italy. 7. What ,cgend have the Swiss concerning William Tell and his two companions? 9 When did Tell 'lie.' What of . Switzerland since the time of Tell? 10. What of the Swiw people? Ch. CXXIV.— 1. What of Charles V. ? 206 SCHOOL HISTORY. 2. When this great potentate was fifty-seven years old, he grew weary of pomp and power. He therefore took off his crown, and gave it to his son Philip, and went to live in a monastery in Estra- madura, in Spain. He dressed very plainly, and busied himself in saying his prayers and working in a garden. 3. One day, he wrapped himself in a shroud and lay down in a cof- fin, stretching himself out as if he were dead. He then ordered his attendants to carry him to the tomb. The reader must not suppose that the emperor meant to be buried alive. He merely wished to re- mind himself that his life must soon close. But the ceremony has- tened his end ; for it brought on a fever, of which he died, in 1588. 4. Ferdinand the Second, who began to reign in 1619, was called by the Catholics the Apostolic emperor, because he was a bitter per- secutor of the Protestant inhabitants of Germany. His cruelties forced them to ask the aid of the Swedish king, Gustavus Adolphus, who accordingly invaded Germany, and gained many victories. 5. The subsequent history of Germany does not abound with the sort of events which my young readers would be desirous of knowing. Few or none of the later emperors performed any remarkable actions. But they appear to have been better than most sovereigns, for they cannot be accused of great crimes. 6. The emperor of Germany, as I have mentioned above, was gen- erally a prince of the Hapsburgh family. The kingdom of Austria was enlarged by the successive emperors, and finally became great and powerful. 7. It was now able to carry on war by itself, and was at different times engaged in struggles with Turkey, with France and Spain, with Prussia, and sometimes with several of the sovereign states of Ger- many. 8. In 1792, Francis the Second became emperor of Germany. He undertook a war against Napoleon Bonaparte, but his armies were routed, and, in 1S06, he was compelled to resign the title of emperor of Germany. He was afterwards called emperor of Austria. His empire at the time of his death, which took place in 1836, was one of the most powerful sovereignties of Europe, and deserves a seperate chapter. 9. There is now no German emperor. The seperate states and kingdoms and governed by their own sovereigns and their -own laws. After the revolution in France, in February, 1848, great agitation took place in several of the German states. The general diet consisted of members chosen by general suffrage ; there was a free press through out Germany, and most of the kings were compelled to give charters to the people. But a reaction has taken place, and the former despot isms are restored. 2. Relate an anecdote of him. 3. When did Charles V. die? 4. When did Ferdinand II. begin to reign ? What of him ? What were the Protestants forced to do ? 5. What of the late emperors of Germany ? 6. What of the emperor of Germany ? Kingdom of Aus- tria? 7. With what countries has Austria waged war? 8. Who became emperor of Ger> Biny in 1792 ? What took place in 1806 ? What of the Austrian Empire ? AUSTRIA 207 CHAPTER CXXV.-EXJROPE CONTINUED. About Austria, Hungary, Sfc. 1. Austria is an extensive and powerful empire, lying south of Russia and Poland, and north of Turkey. On the west it is bounded by the German States, Switzerland, and Italy. 2. Austria formerly belonged to Germany, and is still considered as belonging to it. But of late years other countries have been added to it which do not belong to Germany. It now includes Hungary, Bo- hemia, a part of Poland, a part of Italy, and many other states which were formerly independent. Its present population is about thirty-two millions, including all these places. 3. Vienna is the capital of the German part of Austria, and is one of the most splendid cities in Europe. It is situated on the Danube, which is a large river. In winter, this is frozen over, and the people amuse themselves by sliding, skating, and driving upon it with vari- ous kinds of sledges or sleighs. The scene presented at such a lime is very gay and pleasant. 4. In summer, the inhabitants resort to the public gardens, which are extensive and beautiful. Here are fine walks, where you may see people of all kinds. There are ladies and gentlemen taking the air, boys and girls scampering about, men with monkeys taught to dance, and a multitude of curious sports. The gentlemen of Austria are much addicted to hunting wild boars, which are common in that country. 5. In the German part of Austria which is the eastern portion, the inbabitants speak the German language, and have the manners and Ch. (.'XXV. — 1. Where does Austria lie ? Its boundaries? ' belong ? What does it now include ? 3. What of Vieuua ? Amusements ? 4. What of the public gardens ? 18 . To what does Austria What of the Danube? 208 SCHOOL HISTORY. customs of Germany. The history of this country has been partly told. In early times it was occupied by tribes of barbarians. At a later period it formed one of the states of the German empire. 6. At this time it was called an archduchy, and was governed by an archduke, who was, however, subject to the emperor. Rodolph of Hapsburgh succeeded to the government of the empire in 1273, as I have toi lainVi/B^uf J^uy |g Giantsztui _ ?"- , ; = - Londoudei Slioo ^ Btfjg 5 ■nrmPlnTTr.i A' .. M j jIitv Jhiiriic-^' Tj'.i B-^V' jGali^P 1113 ^( Dornoch Frith. I W 0\R T E ■>\e>V ~-l ^.^V^XAterdeeix | E #f ;i „t - i ■ ir -^^^a^ ' Andrews ,rT>Giast3_ow^ . *■& V - Dumfries .'V*: k wN". Castle *», .£ fa •t"! J^ 1 / ^; . ■ C »^Dm-3iiir>i «y/t > 1 . E > S. . - "Nrs^J/ -Carl isle ^ — ^ fc'XitrL .*>__ l_, ^Kiicastei-|( iHl. ^1 vBrnTrry' ■ clou JT CaiuI)ri£loc5J-j; aces Brlslnl: " ■; '»KHi^5\iadsor Channel. ci^TiVcftoii . SaUsImi-^j t ^^f; ii : ,'>J£ \ " Dorchester J T,"^f , 8|ZOTy. W.fnnWlmnnn ■ ^ C H A W INT E lJ^/^? ntk'^ro — i«T^g3 EBg?»ai mm — SSBS MAP OF THE BRITISH ISLAND. 228 SCHOOL HISTORY, river, runs through it. Across this, there are a number of handsome stone bridges. London has no wall around it like Paris, Berlin, and most large cities of the continent; but it is encircled by a beautiful .country, dotted with villages, villas, and country-seats. 2. London seems like a world of itself; you might walk about for a year, and go into some new street every day. In some parts of the city there are such streams of people, that it always seems there like the Fourth of July, or Election day. The shops are filled with beautiful things, and the streets are crowded with coaches and carriages of all sorts. Westminster Jilibey Lo7idon. 3. The palace of St. James is a dark old building, but the king has lately had a new one built for him, which is very hue. Westminster Abbey is an old Gothic church, which strikes every beholder with ad- miration and wonder. St. Paul's is a more modern church, and is very handsome. 4. I have not time to tell you of the other wonderful things in London, nor can I tell you of the other beautiful towns and cities in England. You must read about them in some larger book, or come and see me of a long winter ni^ht. 5. I will then tell you of Manchester, where they make beautiful ginghams, calicoes, and other goods ; of Birmingham, where they make guns, pistols, swords, locks, and lamps; of Sheffield, where they make knives, forks, and scissors ; and of other places, where they make a sjreat variety of articles. 6. Wales is a country of mountains, lying on the west of England. Most of the people talk the Welsh language, which you could not understand. They are very industrious, and live in a comfortable manner. Their mountains are celebrated for producing coal, tin, iron, and copper. Ch. CXXXVIII.— 1. Population o r London? The Thames? Country around LondoD ? 2. Describe the appearance of London. 3. Palace of St. James? Westminster Abbey .' St. Paul's ? 5. What of Manchester? Birmingham? Sheffield? G. Where is Wales. W hat of the people ? Mountains ? ENGLAND. 229 7. Scotland is also a land of mountains. In the southern part, the people speak the Scotch language, which perhaps you could partly understand. But in the highlands of the north, the inhabitants speak Gaelic, which would be as strange to you as the language of an Arab. 8. The capital of Scotland is Edinburgh, a fine smoky old city, with an immense high castle in the midst of it. Besides this, there are many fine towns in Scotland. Glasgow is a large place and cele- brated for its manufactures. 9. Ireland is a bright, green island, containing seven millions of people. It is the native land of those cheerful, witty Irishmen, who come out to this country in such abundance. If their country were happily governed, they would not come here; but the truth is, that Ireland has felt the miseries of bad government for many years, and a large part of the people are therefore kept in a state of distressing poverty. 10. The Irish, however, are a very interesting people. At home or abroad, they seem to be full of wit and hospitality. It is by their lively disposition and cheerful turn of mind, that they seem to soften the evils which too often pursue them. 11. Dublin is the capital of Ireland; and seme of its streets are magnificent, but many portions of it are tilled with inhabitants who present the most woful aspect of raggedness and misery. Beggary is common in all parts of the kingdom. CHAPTER CXXXIX.— EUROPE CONTINUED. Origin of the British Nation. The Druids. 1. It is supposed that Great Britain and Ireland were originally settled by a colony from Gaul. These were called Gaels, or Celts. Their descendants are found, at this day, in Ireland and Wales, and the highlands of Scotland. Some of these still speak the ancient Gaelic or Celtic language. 2. Very little is known about these islands till the time of Julius Caesar. He invaded England in the year 55, before the Christian era. The country was then called Britannia, or Britain. It was inhabited by barbarians, some of whom wore the skins of wild beasts, while others were entirely naked. They were painted like the American Indians. Their weapons were clubs, spears, and swords, with which they fiercely attacked the Roman invaders. 3. The ancient Britons, like the other northern nations of Europe were idolaters. Their priests were called Druids. Their places of worship were in the open air, and consisted of huge stone pillars, 7. What of Scotland? Language? 8. What of Edinburgh ? Glasgow? 9. What of Ireland? Government? 10. What of the Irish people? 11. What of Dublin ? '. rt . CXXXIX.— 1. What of the Gaels or Celts? 2. When did Ctesar invade England ? What was Great Britain then called ? What of the people? 3. Religion of the ancient Britons .' Who were the Druids ? What of their places of worship? 20 230 SCHOOL HISTORY. standing in a circle. A large stone in the middle was used as an al- tar, and human victims were sacrificed upon it. The ruins of one of these temples still remains at Stonehenge, and is very wonderful. 4. Tke druids considered the oak a sacred tree. They set a great value on the mistletoe, a sort of plant which sometimes grows on the oak. Wherever they found the mistletoe, they held a banquet be- neath the spreading branches of the oak on which it grew. Celtic Inhabitants of Britain. 5. The druids incited the Britons to oppose the Roman power. They fought fiercely, and the country was not entirely subdued till sixty years after the Christian era. Suetonius, a Roman general, then cut down the sacred groves of oak, destroyed the temples, and threw the druids into the fires which they had themselves kindled to roast the Romans. 6. The Scots, who inhabited the northern part of the island, were a fierce people, and were still unconquered. To prevent them from making incursions into Britain, the Romans built a wall from the river Tyne to the Frith of Solway. 7. The Britons remained quietly under the government of Rome for nearly five centuries after the Christian era ; adopting during this period, many of the Roman customs. They never attempted to free themselves. But, at last, the Roman empire became so weak, that the emperor Valentinian withdrew his troops from Britain. * S. The inhabitants had grown so unwarlike, that, when the Roman soldiers were crone, they found themselves unable to resist the Scots. They therefore asked the assistance of two tribes of people from Ger- many, called Saxons, and Angles. 4. How was Ihe oak considered by the Druids ? The mistletoe ? 5. When was the coun- try entirely subdued ? What of Suetonius ? 6. What of the Scots ? What did the Ro- mans do ? 7. How long did Rome govern Britain ? What of the emperor Valentinian? 8. Wnose aid did the Britons ask against the Scots? ENGLAND. 231 9. These people drove back the Scots into their own part of the island. Then, instead of returning to Germany, they took possession of Britain by the right of the strongest. It was divided by them into seven small kingdoms, called the Saxon Heptarchy. CHAPTER CXL.— EUROPE CONTINUED. Saxon and Danish Kings of England. 1. In the year S27 of the Christian era, all the seven kingdoms of the Saxon Heptarchy were united into one, under the government of Egbert. He was therefore the first king of England. 2. Egbert was a native of England, but had been educated in France, at the court of Charlemagne. He was therefore more pol- ished and enlightened than most of the Saxon kings. During the reign of Egbert, and for many years afterwards, the Danes made in- cursions into England. They sometimes overran the whole country. 3. All red, who ascended the throne in 872, fought fifty-six battles with them, by sea and land. On one occasion, he went into the camp of the Danes in the dissuise of a harper. He took notice of every thing, and planned an attack upon the camp. Returning to his own men, he led them against the Danes, whom he completely routed. 4. This king was called Afred the Great ; and he had a better right to the epithet of Great than most other kings who have borne it. He made wise laws, and instituted the custom of trial by jury. He likewise founded the university of Oxford. Nearly a hundred years after his death, the Danes again broke into England. There was now no Alfred to oppose them. They were accordingly victo- rious, and three Danish kings governed the country in succession. 5. Canute the Great was one of them. He appears' to have been an old pirate, or, as they were called in those days, a sea-king. One day, when he and his courtiers were walking on the shore, they called him king of the sea, and told him that he had but to command, and the waves would obey him. 6. Canute desired a chair of state to be brought and placed on the hard, smooth sand. Then, seating himself in the chair, he stretched out his sceptre over the waves, with a very commanding aspect. 7. "Roll back thy waves, thou sea!" cried Canute. "I am thy Icing and master ! How darest thou foam and thunder in my pre- sence?" But the sea, nowise abashed, came roaring and whitening onward, and threw a sheet of spray over Canute and all the courtiers. The giant waves rolled upward on the beach, far beyond the mon- arch's chair. They would soon have swallowed him up, together with his courtiers, if they had not all scampered to the dry land. 9. What did these two tribes do ? How was Britain then i'w idcd ? Ch. CXL.— 1. Win wus the first king of England? What kingdoms did lie govern? 2. What of Egbert f What of the Danes? 3. When did Alfred ascend the throne ? Whnt did he do ? 4. Why was he called Alfred the Great? What of the Danes after his death? 5. 6. 7. Tell a itory of Canute. 232 SCHOOL HISTORY. 8. In the year 1041, the Danes Avere driven out of England, and another Saxon king, called Edward the Confessor, was placed upon the throne. At his death in 1066, Harold, who was also a Saxon, became king. 9. But he was the last of the Saxon kings. No sooner had he mounted the throne, than William, duke of Normandy in France, in- vaded England, at the head of sixty thousand men.* L0. Harold led an army of Saxons against the Norman invaders, and fought with them at Hastings. In the midst of the battle, an arrow was shot through his steel helmet, and penetrated his brain The duke of Normandy gained the victory, and became king of Eng- lund. CHAPTER CXLI.— EUROPE CONTINUED. Norman Kings of England. William the Conqueror. Richard of the Lion Heart. 1. William the Conqueror (as the duke of Normandy was no"W called) reigned about twenty years. He was succeeded by his second son, William Rufus, or the Red, who was so named from the color of his hair. 2. The Red kinjy was very fond of hunting. One day, while he was chasing a deer in the forest, a gentleman by the name of Walter Tyrrel let fly an arrow. It glanced against a tree, and hit the king ,n the breast ; so that he fell from his horse and died. 3. This took place in the year 1100, and William Rufus Avas suc- ceeded by his brother Henry. This king was called Beauclerk, or Ex- 8. When were the Dar.es driven out of England ? Who was then placed upon the throne ? When did Harold become king.' 0. Who now invaded England: 10. Where was the battle fought between Harold and William ? Who became lung of England ? Ch. CXLI 1. Who succeeded William the Conqueror? 2. What was the fate of William Rufus? ENGLAND. 233 cellent Scholar, because he was able to write his name. Kings were not expected to have much iearning in those days. On the death of king Henry Beauclerk, in 1135, the throne was usurped by Stephen of Blois. But he died in 1154, and was succeeded by Henry the Se- cond, who was son to the former Henry. 4. This monarch had a violent. quarrel with Thomas Becket, arch- bishop of Canterbury. Hoping to please the king, four knights Avent to Canterbury, and murdered Becket at the foot of the Altar. But this bloody deed was a cause of great trouble to king Henry ; for the pope threatened to excommunicate him. 5. In order to pacify his holiness, the king set out on a pilgrimage to the tomb of Becket. When he entered the abbey where the tomb was situated, the whole community of monks assaulted him with rods. The king, being afraid to resist them, was soundly whipped ; and, as a reward for his patience, he received the pope's pardon. 6. During the reign of this king, Ireland was concmered and annex- ed to the realm of England. It had previously been divided into seve- ral separate kingdoms. 7. Richard the Lion-hearted was crowned king of England in 11S9. He was a valiant man, and possessed prodigious strength; and he de- lighted in nothing so much as battle and slaughter. After gaining great renown in Palestine, he was, on his way back, taken and impris- oned for two years by the duke of Austria. 8. The English obtained Bichard's release by paying a heavy ran- som; but soon afterwards, while besieging a castle in Normandy, he was killed by an arrow from a cross-bow. The next king was Rich- ard's brother John, surnamed Lackland, or Loseland. 9. This epithet was bestowed on John because he lost the territo- ries which the English kings had hitherto possessed in France. John was one of the worst kings that ever England had. Among other crimes, he murdered his nephew, Arthur of Bretagne, who was right- ful heir to the crown. 10. The barons of England were so disgusted with the conduct of John, that they assembled atRunnymede, and compelled him to sign a written deed, called Magna Charia. This famous charter was da- ted the 19th of June, 1215. It is considered the foundation of English liberty. It deprived John, and all his successors, of the despotic pow- er which former kings had exercised. 11. King John died in 1216, and left the crown to his son, who was then only nine years old. He was called Henry the Third. His reign continued fifty-five years; but, though he was a well meaning man, he had not sufficient wisdom and firmness for a ruler. 3. Wiicn did Henry lieauclerk begin his reign ? When did Stephen succeed to the throne.' When did he die ? 4. Who murdered Thomas Becket ? 5. What happened to Henry II.? 6. What of Ireland ? 7. When was Richard made king of England ? What of him? S. How \ias he killed? 9. Why was John called Lackland? What of him. His crimes ? 10. Who signed Magna Charta? How is it considered? 11. When did king John die ? What of Henry III. ? t 20* 234 SCHOOL HISTORY. CHAPTER CXLIL— EUROPE CONTINUED. English Wars and Rebellions. m^mmi Henry IV. 1. The next king, Edward the First, was crowned in 1272. The people gave him the nickname of LongshankSj because his legs were of unusual length. He was a great warrior, and fought bravely in Palestine, and in the civil wars of England. 2. Edward conquered Wales, which had hitherto been a separate kingdom. He attempted to conquer Scotland likewise, but did not entirely succeed. The illustrious William Wallace resisted him, and beat the English troops in many battles. But, at last, Wallace was taken prisoner and carried in chains to London, and there executed. 3. Robert Bruce laid claim to the crown of Scotland, and renewed the war against Edward. But old Longshanks was determined not to let go his hold of poor Scotland. He mustered an immense army, and was marching northward, when a sudden sickness put an end to his life- 4. His son, Edward the Second, ascended the throne in 1307. He led an army of a hundred thousand men into Scotland. But he was not such a warrior as old kins: Longshanks. Robert Bruce encoun- tered him at Bannockburn, with only thirty thousand men, and gain- ed a glorious victory. By this, Scotland was set free. Edward the Second reigned about twenty years. He was a foolish and misera- ble king. His own wife made war against, him, and took him prison- er. By her instigation, he was cruelly murdered in prison. Ch. CXLII. — 1. When was Edward I. crowned? What did the people call him? What of him ? 2. What of Wales? Who resisted Edward in Scotland? Fate of Wil liam Wallace? 3. What of Robert Bruce ? Death of Edward Longshanks ? 4.Wliatol Edward II.? Battle of Bannockburn ? How was Scotland set free? What happened to fcMwardH..' ENGLAND. 035 5. His son, Edward the Third, began to reign in 1327, at the age of eighteen. He had not long been on the throne, before he showed himself very unlike his father. He beat the Scots at Halidown Hill, and afterwards invaded France. I have spoken of his French wars, in. the history of France. 6. The king's son, surnamed the Black Prince, was even more va- liant than his father. He was also as kind and generous as he was brave. He conquered king John of France, and took him prisoner; but he did not exult over him. When they entered London together, the Black Prince rode bareheaded by the side of the captive monarch as if he were merely an attendant, instead of a conqueror. 7. This brave prince died in 1376, and his father lived only one year longer. The next king was Richard the Second, a boy of eleven years old. When he grew up, Richard neglected the government, and cared for nothing but his own pleasures. 8. During his reign a rebellion was headed by a blacksmith, named Wat Tyler. The rebels had also other leaders, nicknamed Jack Straw and Hob Carter. They marched to London with a hundred thousand followers, and did a great deal of mischief. 9. The king, attended by a few of his nobles, rode out to hold a conference with Wat Tyler. The blacksmith was very rude, and treated king Richard as if he were no better than a common man, or perhaps not quite so good. He even threatened the king with a drawn sword. 10. William Walworth the lord mayor of London, was standing near the king. He was so offended at Wat Tyler's insolence, that he uplifted a mace, or club, and smote Wat to the ground. A knight then killed him with a sword. 11. When the rebels saw that the valiant blacksmith was beat down and slain, they gave an ansry shout, and were rushing forward to attack the king's party. But king Richard rode boldly to meet them, and waved his hand with a majestic air. 12. " Be not troubled for the death of your leader !" he cried, " I, your king, will be a better leader than Wat Tyler !" The king's words and looks made such an impression, that the rebels imme- diately submitted, and Wat Tyler's murder was unavenged. CELYPTER CXLIIL— EUROPE CONTINUED. The Lancastrian Kings of England. ]. Notwithstanding his promise to the rebels, kin? Richard was not half so cood a ruler as the blacksmith would probably have been. His subjects grew more and more discontented, and his cousin, 5. What of Edward III. ? When (lid he begin to reign ? 6. What of the Black Prince ? How did he treat John of Fran, e : 7. What of Richard II. ? 8. 9. What of Wat Tyler's rebellion? 10. What did William Walworth do? 11. What of the rebels when Wat Tyler was killed ? What did Richard do? 20* 236 SCHOOL HISTORY. the Duke of Lancaster, formed the project of making himself king. Richard was dethroned, and imprisoned at Pontefract castle, where he was either killed or starved to death. The Duke of Lancaster began to reign in the year 1400, and was called Henry the Fourth. 2. There were two rebellions against this king. One was headed by the Earl of Northumberland, and the other by the Archbishop of York ; for, in those times, bishops often put on armor and turned soldiers. Henry conquered the rebels and reigned several years in peace. 3. As long as his father lived, the king's eldest son was a wild and dissipated young man. But no sooner was the old king dead, than his character underwent a complete change. He now threw off his dissipation and devoted himself carefully to the business of governing his kingdom. He was crowned, as Henry the Fifth, in 1413. Two years afterwards he invaded France. 4. I have already told, in the history of France, how Henry van- quished the French in the famous battle of Agincourt, and how he afterwards became master of the whole kingdom of France. His death took place in 1422, in the midst of his triumphs, at the age of thirty-four. 5. The new king of England, Henry the Sixth, was a baby, only nine months old. At that tender age, while he was still in his nurse's arms, the heavy crowns of England and France were put upon his head. The ceremony of this poor child's coronation was performed in the city of Paris. He soon lost the crown of France. But the crown of England continued a torment to him as long as he lived, and it caused his death at last. 6. When he grew up, he turned out to be a mild, quiet, simple sort of man, with barely sense enough to get along respectably as a private person. As a king, he was an object of contempt. His wife had far more manhood than himself, and she governed him like a child. 7. During this king's reign began the war of the Roses. The reader will recollect, that the Duke of Lancaster had unlawfully taken the crown from Richard the Second. But he and his son reigned without much opposition, because they were warlike men, and could have defended the crown with their swords. 8. Henry the Sixth, on the contrary, was soft, meek, and peaceable, without spirit enough to fight for the crown which his father left him. The heirs of Richard the Second therefore thought this a proper time to get back their lawful inheritance. The Duke of York was the nearest heir. 9. He began a war in 1445. If there had been nobody but Henry the Sixth to resist him, he might have got the croAvn at once. But Henry's wife,. whose name was Margaret, and many of the nobility, Ch. CXLIII.— 1. What of England under Richard? Who dethroned him ? His fate ? Who was Henry IV.? When did lie begin to reign ? ■!■ What rebellions were there against this king? 3. What of Henry V.r When did he invade France ? Who fought the battle of Agincourt ? When did Henry V. die ? 5. Describe the coronation of Henry VI. 6. What of him ? His queen ' 7. What of the Duke of Lancaster ? His sou HeLry V. 8. What did the heirs of Richard II. do ? ENGLAND. ' 237 took up arms for the king. Other noblemen lent assistance to the Duke of York. 10. All the Yorkists, or partisans of the Duke of York, wore white roses, either in their hats or at their breasts. The Lancastrians, or those of the king' s party, wore a red rose in the same manner. Whenever two persons happened to meet, one wearing a red rose and the other a white, they drew their swords and fought. 11. Thus the people of England were divided into two grea parties, who were ready to cut each others throats, merely for the difference between a white and red rose. . CHAPTER CXLIV.— EUROPE CONTINUED. Wars of the Roses. 1. The wars of the roses lasted thirty years. Sometimes the white rose was uppermost, and sometimes the red. The most cele- brated general in these wars was the Earl of Warwick. It was chiefly by his means that the soldiers of the white rose gained a decisive victory at Tuwton, in which thirty-six thousand of the red rose men were killed. The young Duke of York was then proclaimed king, under the name of Edward the Fourth. 2. This was in 1461. But, not long afterwards, the Earl of War- wick quarreled with king Edward, and quitted the party of the Yorkists. He took king Henry the Sixth out of prison, and placed him on the throne again, and Edward was compelled to flee over to France. 3. As the Earl of Warwick showed himself so powerful in pulling down kings and setting them up again, he gained the name of the King-maker. But he was finally killed in battle, while fighting bravely for the Lancastrians; and then the white rose flourished again. 4. Henry the Sixth and his son were murdered in 1464, and Edward the Fourth became the undisputed king of England. He had fought bravely for the crown, but now that he had got firm pos- session of it, he became idle and voluptuous. 5. lie was a cruel tyrant, too. Having resolved to put one of his brothers to death, he gave him the choice of dying in whatever manner he pleased. His brother, who was a great lover of good liquor, chose to be drowned in a hogshead of wine. 6. Edward the Fourth died in 14S3. He left two voung children, the eldest of whom now became Edward the Fifth. But these poor children had a wicked uncle for a guardian. He was called Richard 9. When did the Duke of York uegin the war ? Who took up arms for Henry ? 10. What did the followers of the Duke of fork wear? Those of the king? What often happened ? Ch. CXLIV.— 1. How long did the wars of the rues last? What of the Karl of Warwick? 2. When was Edward IV. made king? What did Warwick do? What was he called? How was he killed? When did the party of the white roses flourish again? 1. What of Edward IV. ? :>. How did lie treat hi» [irother? 238 SCHOOL HISTORY. Crookback, Duke of Gloucester. Most historians say, that he was a horrible figure to look at, having a hump-back, a withered arm, and a very ugly face. This frightful personage was determined to make himself king. 7. He took care that the little king Edward and his brother should lodge in the tower of London. One night, while the two children were sound asleep in each other's arms, some villains came and smothered them with the bolsters of the bed. They were buried at the foot of a staircase. So Richard Crookback, the murderer, be- came king of England. He committed a thousand crimes for the sake of getting the crown, but he did not keep it long. 8. Henry Tudor, the young earl of Richmond, was now the only remaining heir of king Henry the Sixth. The French supplied him with the means of making war against Richard Crookback. He landed in England, and gained a victory at Bosworth. 9. When the soldiers of Richmond examined the dead bodies that lay in heaps on the battle-field, they found the hump-backed Richard among them, witb the golden crown upon his head. They put it on the head of Richmond, and hailed him king Henry the Seventh. 10. The new king married a daughter of Edward the Fourth; and at their wedding, they each wore a red rose intertwined with a white one ; for the wars of the roses were now over at last. 6. When did he die ? What children did he leave ? Describe Richard Crookback? 7 What cruelty did he commit ? Did he become king? 8. Who gained the battle of Bos- worth ? 9. Where was Richard found ? 10. Who did Henry VII. marry ? Why wer« the wars of the roses now at an end? ENGLAND. 239 CHAPTER CXLV.— EUROPE CONTINUED. Reig-ns of the Tudor Princes. Richard Crookback. Henry VIII. 1. Henry the Seventh (the former earl of Richmond) besan his reign in 14S5. He was a craftv kin?, and cared much more" for his own power and wealth than for the happiness of his subjects. But, for his own sake, he desired to reign peaceably, without foreign wars or civil commotions. 2. During his reign, two impostors appeared in England, each of whom pretended that he had a better right to the crown than Henry the Seventh had. One was Lambert Simnel, the son of a baker; but he called himself a nephew of Edward the Fourth. The other was Perkin Warbeck, the son of a Flemish butcher. He pretended to be one of the little princes whom Richard Crookback had smothered in the' tower. 3. Many knights and noblemen of England were led into rebellion by each of these impostors. But finallv'they were both taken prison- ers. Perkin Warbeck was handed, and Lambert Simnel was set to washing dishes in the king's kitchen. 4. Henry the Seventh died in 1509. He had been a great lover of ■money, and put all that he could lay his hands on into his own purse. A sum equal to fifty millions of dollars was found in his palace, after his death. 5. His son, Henry the Eighth, began to reign at the age of eighteen. He was a haughty, stem, hard-hearted, and tyrannical king. When- ever he got angry, and that was not seldom, the heads of some of his subjects were sure to be cut off. This royal villain had six wives. Ch. CXLV — 1. When did Henry VII. begin to reign ? What of him? 2. What of two irnpustors ? Their Dames? Whom did they pretend to he ? 3. What became of them * 4. What of the riches of Henry VII. ? 6. When did Henry VIII. begin to rei'u? Whal of him? What of hi» wives ? 240 SCHOOL HISTORY. One died a natural death; he was divorced from two, cut off the heads of two others, and one outlived him. 6. The reign of Henry the Eighth was chiefly remarkable on ac- count of the Reformation in England. By this term is meant the substitution of the Protestant religion for the Roman Catholic. Until this period, the pope of Rome had claimed authority over England. 7. But Henry the Eighth took all the power to himself. If any of his subjects dared to have a religion unlike the king's, they were eith- er beheaded or burnt. The king was so proud of his religious char- acter, that he called himself Defender of the Faith !* 8. The old tyrant died in 1547, at the age of fifty-six. One of his last acts was to cause the earl of Surrey to be beheaded, although he was guilty of no crime; and with that innocent blood upon his soul, king Henry the Eighth was summoned to the judgment-seat. 9. His son, Edward the Sixth, was but nine or ten years old when he ascended the throne. He was a fine and promising boy, but lived only to the age of sixteen. His sister Mary succeeded him in 1553. 10. She bears the dreadful title of Bloody Queen Mary. She was blinded by the errors of the age, and being a Roman Catholic, she caused persons to be burnt alive who denied the authority of the pope. Many bishops and godly ministers thus perished at the stake. 11. But, even in the midst of the flames, they were happier than Queen Mary. It seemed as if a fire were consuming ber miserable heart. She knew that everybody hated her, and, after a reign of only five years, she died of mere trouble and anguish of mind. CHAPTER CXLVL— EUROPE CONTINUED. The Reign of Elizabeth. 1. The famous Elizabeth, sister to the Bloody Mary, became queen in 1558. She was a Protestant, and therefore there were no more martyrdoms in England. She was, however, very hard and cruel to those who held a different faith from her own. 2. Elizabeth, however, in all that related to the power of England was truly a great queen, and the nation was never more respected than while this mighty woman held the sceptre in her hand. But she possessed hardly any of the kindly virtues that a woman ought to have. Yet she prided herself greatly on her beauty. 3. Many princes and great men desired to marry Elizabeth ; but she chose to remain sole mistress of her person and her kingdom. And as she herself refused to take a husband, it made her very angry whenever any of the ladies of her court got married. 6 What great event occurred in this reign? What is meant by the Reformation ? Who had claimed authority over England? 7. Why was the king called Defender of the Failh? 8. When did Henry VIII. die? What was the last act of hia reign? 9. What of Edward VI. : When did Maiy begin to reign ? 10. Why is she cailed Bloody Mary? 11. How Hi" did she r«i«n ? Ch. CXLVI. — 1. When did Elizabeth ascend the throne? Whal Wither religion? 2. What of her? 3. Why did she iiul marry: What made her angry .' ENGLAND 241 4. Philip the Second of Spain asked her hand in marriage. On her refusal, he sent his Invincible Armada to invade England. But a storm destroyed part of the ships, and the English fleet conquered the re- mainder. Bloody Mary. Elizabeth. 5. Some of the actions of queen Elizabeth were almost as bad as those of old Harry, her father. When Mary, the beautiful queen of Scots, fled into England for protection, she caused her to be imprison- ed eighteeen years. And after those long and weary years, the poor queen was tried and condemned to die. 6. Elizabeth was resolved upon her death, but she was loth to in- cur the odium of such a crime. She therefore endeavored to per- suade the jailer to murder her. But, as he steadfastly refused, Eliza- beth signed the death-warrant, and the unfortunate Mary was be- headed. 7. When queen Elizabeth grew old, she could not bear to look at her gray hairs, and withered and wrinkled visage, in a glass. Her maids of honor, therefore, had all the trouble of dressing her. Part of their business was to paint her face. The queen of course expect- ed them to make her cheeks look red and rosy. S. But, instead of putting the red paint on her cheeks, these mis- chievous maids of honor used sometimes to put it all upon her nose. So they set this great queen on her throne, in the presence of her court, with her nose as bright as if it had caught fire. 9. The courtiers often made a fool of Elizabeth by pretending to be in love with her, even when she was old enough to be their grand- mother. Among others, the earl of Essex paid his addresses to her, and became her chief favorite. But, at last, he offended her, and was sentenced to lose his head. 4. What of Philip of Spain ? What of the Invincible Armada ? 6. What Was one of the worn actions of queen Elizabeth? What was the fate of Mary queen of Scots? 7. .-^. What trick did the maid» of honer put upon queen Elizabeth ? 9. What of the earl of E^s, v ' 242 SCHOOL HISTORY. 10. When the earl of Essex was dead and gone, queen Elizabeth bitterly repented of her. cruelty. She was now very old, and she knew that nobody loved her, and there were none that she could love. She pined away, and never held up her head again ; and in her seven- tieth year she died. 11. The bishops, and the wise and learned men of her coutt, came to look at her dead body. They were sad, for they doubted whether England would ever be so prosperous again, as while it was' under the government of this mighty queen. And, in truth, of all the monarchs who have held the sceptre since that day, there has not been one who could sway it like the gray-haired woman, whose spirit had now passed into eternity. CHAPTER CXLVH.-EUROPE CONTINUED. Accession of the House of Stuart. James I. Charles I. 1. Elizabeth was succeeded by James Stuart, king of Scotland. He was the sixth James that had ruled over that kino-dom, but was James the First of England. He began to reign in 1603. James in- herited the Eno-lish crown, because he was the grandson of a daugh- ter of Henry the Seventh. His mother was Mary, queen of Scots, whom Elizabeth had beheaded. 2. The whole island of Great Britain was now under the same government. This event put an end to the wars which had raged between England and Scotland during many centuries. But it was a 10. How did Elizabeth feel after his death? 11. How did the great men of the court feel when they saw Elizabeth's dead body? What may be said of her government? Ch. CXLVII. — 1. When did James I. begin foreign? Who was he? 2. What put a* end to the wars between England and Scotland ? ENGLAND. 243 iong time before the English and Scotch could live together like brethren. 3. As for king James, he was much fitter for a schoolmaster than for a king. He had a good deal of learning, and wrote several books. He delighted to talk Hebrew, and Greek, and Latin ; and his courtiers were often puzzled to > understand him. 4. James tbought himself as wise as Solomon ; and it must be own- ed that he possessed a sort of cunning, which greatly resembled wis- dom. This was seen in his discovery of the Gunpowder Plot. Some misguided Catholics had laid a plan to blow up the parliament house, at a time when the king, the lords, and all the members of parlia- ment, would be assembled there. If it had succeeded, the whole government of England would have been destroyed. 5. But king James smelled out the plot. He set people on the watch, and they caught a man by the name of Guy Fawkes, in a cel- lar, where thirty-six barrels of gunpowder were concealed. Fawkes told the king the names of eighty of his accomplices. He and they were all put to death. b'. James had one good quality which kings have not very often possessed. He hated war. His reign was therefore peaceable. He died in 1625, and was succeeded by Charles the First, his son. 7. It was easy to foresee that this king would have a more trouble- some reisn than his father. There were now many Puritans in Eng- land. These people were opposed to the Church of England, to the bishops, and to all the ceremonies which had not been cast off when the Roman Catholic faith was abolished. S. They likewise thought that the kings of England had too much power. They were determined that, thenceforward, the king should not reign merely for his own pleasure and glory, but for the good of the people. Charles, on the other hand, seemed to think that the common people were created only that kings might have subjects to rule over. 9. In the early part of his reign, the king persecuted the Puritans. He would not allow the Puritan ministers to preach, nor the people to attend their meetings. Their sufferings were great, although the king dared not burn them, as the bloody queen Mary would have done. 10. Many of them crossed the ocean, and sought religious freedom in New England. John Hampden, John Pyne, and Oliver Cromwell were once on the point of coming to this country. But the king pre- vented them, and these three persons afterwards became his most powerful enemies. 3. What of king James? 4. What plot had the Roman Catholics laid? 5. How did James discover the plot? What of Guy Fawkes ? 6. What good quality did James po«- «ess? When did he die? Who succeeded him ? 7. What of the Puritans? 8. What did they think? What of Charles? 9. How did he treat the Puritans? 10. What did many of them do ? What of three principal enemies of Charles ? 21 S44 SCHOOL HISTORY, CHAPTER CXLVIII.-EUROPE CONTINUED. Wars of the King and Parliament. : j[ =^^^^~T^= ^=s! — Iff ^111 - = 3 m B i^P H 51 ^ 1 ^^-^ jlb=E= s j 1 Oliver Cromwell. diaries II. 1. Till the reign of Charles the First, the English parliament had hardly ever dared to oppose the wishes of the king. But now there were continual disputes between the king and parliament. And if Charles dissolved one parliament, the next was sure to be still more obstinate. 2. Matters went on in this way, till at length the quarrel grew too violent to be settled by mere words. Both parties then betook them- selves to their weapons. The king was supported by a great major- ity of the lords and gentlemen of England and Scotland, and by all the bishops and clergy of the English church. All the gay and wild young men in the kingdom likewise drew their swords for the crown. The whole of king Charles' party were called cavaliers. 3. Some of the noblemen and sentry look the side of the parlia- ment. ; but its adherents were chiefly mechanics, tradesmen, and com- mon people. Because their hair was cropped close to their skulls, their enemies gave them the nickname of roundheads. The cavaliers dressed magnificently, and wore long hair, hanging in love-locks down their temples. They drank wine, and sang songs, and rode merrily to the battle-field. 4. The roundheads wore steeple-crowned hats and sadcolored gar- ments. They sang nothing but psalms, and spent much of their Jeasure time in praying and hearing sermons. They were a stern and resolute set of men, and when once they had made up their Ch. CXLVIII. — 1. What of the parliaments during the reign of Charles I. ? 2. How was the king supported? What were the lung's party called ? 3. Who were on the sidf ef the parliament? Describe the cavaliers? 4. What of the roundheads? ENGLAND. 245 minds to tear down the throne, it must be done, though the realm of England should be rent asunder in the struggle. 5. The civil war between the cavaliers and roundheads began in 1642. Many battles were fought, and rivers of English blood were shed on both sides. 6. It was.not long before Oliver Cromwell began to be a famous leader, on the side of the parliament. He pretended to fight only for religion and the good of the people. But he was an ambitious man, and meant to place himself in the king's empty seat. 7. Cromwell gained one battle after another, and rose from step to step, till there was no man so powerful and renowned as he.- . Final- ly, in 1645, he defeated the king's army at the bloody battle of Nase- by. King Charles afterwards surrendered himself to the Scots, and they delivered him to the parliament. 8. The parliament brought the king to trial as a traitor. The court that tried him consisted of a hundred and thirty-three persons. They declared him guilty, and sentenced. him to lose his head. When the people of England heard the sentence, they trembled. 9. For it was a great and terrible thing, that their anointed sover- eign should die the death of a traitor. Many kings, it is true, had died by the hands of their enemies, but it had always been in dark- ness and secrecy. But king Charles was tried and condemned in the face of all the world. 10. On the thirtieth of January, 1649, they brought the king from his palace to the scaffold. It was covered with black cloth. In the centre of the scaffold stood a block, and by the block stood an execu- tioner, with an axe in his hand, and a black mask over his face. 11. The steel-clad soldiers of Cromwell surrounded the scaffold. But the king walked to his death with as firm a step as when he went to his coronation. " They have taken away my corruptible crown," said he, " but I go to receive an incorruptible one." 12. When king Charles had knelt down and prayed, he cast a pitying glance upon the people round the scaffold; for he feared that direful judgments would come upon the land which was now to be stained with its monarch's blood. 13. But, as he saw that his enemies were resolved to slay him, he calmly laid his head upon the block. The executioner raised his axe, and smote off the king's head at a single blow. Then lifting it in his hand, he cried aloud, — " This is the head of a traitor !" But the people shuddered; for they doubted whether it was the head of a traitor, and they knew that it was the head of a king. 5. What war began in 1G42 ? 6. What of Oliver Cromwell ? 7. When was the battle of Naseby fought? 8. What was done to king Charles? How did the people feel when he was sentenced to death? 10. 11. 12. 13. Describe the execution of Charles I. In whst year did it take place ? 21* * 246 SCHOOL HISTORY. CHAPTER CXLIX.-EUROPE CONTINUED. The Protectorate and the Restoration. 1. And now the throne of England was empty. The king, indeed, had left a son, but if he had shown himself in London, he would soon have died the same death as his father. The young prince was defeated in battle, and compelled to flee. At one time, his enemies pressed him so hard, that he climbed up among the thick branches of an oak, and thus saved his life. 2. The government, at this period, was called a republic. There was no king, no lords, no bishops, nothing bat the House of Com- mons, or the lower House of Parliament. All the real power of the kingdom was possessed by Oliver Cromwell, because he was at the head of the army. 3. No sooner did the parliament dare to oppose Cromwell's wishes, than he led three hundred soldiers into the hall where they were sitting. He told the parliament men that they were a pack of traitors, and bade them get out of the house. When they were gone, he summoned another parliament. The principal man in it was called Praise-God Barebone. This name sounded so well, that it was bestowed on the whole parliament. 4. But Praise-God Barebone's parliament did not keep together a great while. At the end of five months they besought Cromwell to send them about their business, and take the government into his own hands. This was just what Cromwell wanted. 5. In 1654, he was proclaimed Lord Protector of the Common- wealth of England. He held this high office four years. He was a sagacious and powerful ruler, and made himself feared and respected, both in England and foreign countries. 6. But he had no peace nor quiet as long as he lived. He con- stantly wore iron armor under his clothes, dreading that some of his enemies would attempt to stab him. He never enjoyed any quiet sleep, for the thought always haunted him, that conspirators might be hidden in the closet or under the bed. 7. Cromwell was released from this miserable way of life by a slow fever, of which he died in 1658, at the age of fifty-nine. His son Richard succeeded him in the office of Lord Protector; but he had not ability enough to keep the kingdom in subjection. S. Richard Cromwell soon resigned his office, and the government then became unsettled. The people began to think that England would never be prosperous again, unless the hereditary sovereigns were re-established on the throne. Ch. CXLDj»-l. What of king Charles's son ? 2. What was the government called at this time ? ^Bp had all the power ? 3. Describe the dispersing of the parliament by Cromwell? What parliament was then called ? What of it ? 5. When was Cromwell proclaimed Lsrd Protector ? How long did he hold the office? What was his character? C. What fears deprived him of peace ? 7. When did he die ? W T ho succeeded him ? 8. What of Richard Cromwell ? ENGLAND. 247 9. The man who had most influence in the 'army, after Olivet Cromwell's death, was General George Monk. He invited the eldest son of Charles the First to return to England, promising that the soldiers would assist in making him king. 10. The banished prince had been living in different parts of Europe, and was reduced to great poverty. He lost no time in coming to England, and entered London in triumph. At sight of their new king, it seemed as if the*peoplp were mad with joy. He was crowned in 1660, by the title of Chanes the Second. 11. Many of the persons who had assisted in dethroning and be- heading the' king's father were hanged. The body of Oliver Crom- w.ell was taken out of the grave and hung upon the gallows, and afterwards buried beneath it. Yet it would have been well for England, if that stern but valiant ruler could have come to life as;ain. CHAPTER CL.-EUROPE CONTINUED. The Revolution of 1688, and other matters. James II. Quee.n Jinne. 1. Charles the Second had lived a careless and viscious life during his banishment, and his habits did not improve now that he was on the ihrune. He spent whole days and nights in drinking wine, and in all sorts of profligate pleasures. 2. In the year 1665, there was a great plasrue in London, of which nearly a hundred tbousand persons died. The next year, a terrible fire broke out, which consumed a great part of the city. But neither of these calamities made any impression on the king. 9. What did General Monk do? 10. Wliatuf the banished prince ? When was Charlei II. crowned? U. What of the body of Cromwell? Cm. CL.— 1. What of Charles II. during his banishment ? 2. What of the plague ? What of a great fire ? 21" 248 SCHO.OL HISTORY. 3. He suffered the nation to be ruled by unprincipled and wicked men. It was safer to be wicked, in those days, than to be virtuous and upright. Virtue and religion were looked upon as treason, in the reign of Charles the Second. This good-for-nothing monarch died, in the midst of his drunkenness and debauchery, in the year 1685. His brother succeed him., and was called James the Second. 4. James was a Roman Catholic; and, from the moment that he ascended the throne, he thought of nothiig but how to bring Great Britain again under the power of the pope of Ptome. This project rendered him hateful to his subjects. 5. He had not been on the throne more than three years, when some of the greatest men in England determined to get rid of him. They invited William, Prjnce of Orange, to come over from Holland and be their king. 6. This prince had no title to the crown, except that he married the daughter of James the Second. But no sooner had he landed in England, than all the courtiers left king James, and hurried to pay obeisance to the Prince of Orange. He and-his wife were crowned in 1689, as king William and queen Mary. James had made his escape into France. Some of his adherents endeavored to set him on the throne again, but without success. 7. This change of government of which I have been speaking, is generally called the glorious revolution of 168S. Some regulations were now adopted, in order to restrain the royal power. 8. King William was very fond of hunting, and this amusement hastened his death. He was thrown from his horse, in the year 1702, and died in about a month. His queen had died some years before him. 9. Anne, another daughter of the banished James, now ascended the throne. The reign of this queen was a glorious one for England. The renowned Duke of Marlborough gained many splendid victories over the French. But the chief glory of the age proceeded from the great writers who lived in her time. 10. Queen Anne reigned twelve years, and died in 1714, at the age of forty-nine. She was the last sovereign of England who belonged to the family of the Stuarts, which, as you remember, began to reign in England in 1603'. 3. What was the state of morals and religion during this reign ? When did he die ? Who succeeded him ? 4. What did James wish to do ? 5. What did some of the great men do ? Whom did they invite from Holland? 6. What title had William to the throne? When was he crowned? What of king James? 7. What of the revolution of 16SS? 8. When did William die? 9. What of Anne? Her reign? What of th« Duke of Marlborough ? What was the chief glory of Anne's reign, f 10. When did Anna die ? Whtm did the Stuarts begin to reign 1 ENGLAND. 249 CHAPTER CLI.-EUROPE CONTINUED. The Hanoverian King's of Great Britain. 1. The old banished king James had died in France, in the year 1701, He left a son, whom Louis the Fourteenth caused to be pro- claimed king of England. But tbe English people called him the Pretender. The'y were determined not to have a Boman Catholic king. The nearest Protestant heir to the throne was the elector of Hanover, a German prince, whose mother was a granddaughter of James the First. He was now about fifty-five years old. 2. This old German elector was proclaimed king of England, by the title of George the First. With him began the dynasty of the House of Hanover. He could not speak a word of English, and knew nothing about the kingdom which he was to govern. 3. He spent much of his time vu his native country, for he dearly loved Hanover, and could never feel at home in the palace of the English kincrs. He died in 1727, and was succeeded by his sou. George the Second, who was likewise a native of Germany. 4. During part of George the Second's reign, England was at wai with Spain and France. The king commanded his army in person. The English were victorious in the battle of Dettingen, but they lost the battle of Fontenoye. o. In 1745, the grandson of James the Second attempted to win back the crown of his ancestors. He landed in Scotland, and marched into England with a small army of Scotch mountaineers. But he Ch. CLI. — 1. When and where had James II. died ? What did the English call James'i son? Who wa» the nearest heir to the throne ? 2. Who was George I. f What of him? 3. When did George II. come to the throne ? 4. With what countries was England at wai during this reign .' Whai battle did the English gain ? What did they lose i 250 SCHOOL HISTORY. was at last defeated, and forced to fly ; and many of his adherents were beheaded or hanged. 6. In 1755, another war began between the French and English, and some of their principal battles were fought in America. The city of Quebec and the Canadas were conquered by the English during this war. Shortly-after this event, George the Second died, at the age of seventy-seven. 7. His grandson, George the Third, began to reign in 1760, when he was about twenty-one years old. No king ever ascended the throne with better prospects. Yet so many misfortunes befell him, that it would have been far better for him to have died on his cor- onation day. 8. George the Third vvas a man ofrespectable common sense. In his private conduct he was much better than the'generality of kings. But he was very obstinate, and often would not take the advice of men wiser than himself. Had he done so, it is probable that the American Revolution would not have have happened ill his reign. 9. I shall speak of this great event hereafter. The loss of America, together with many other troubles, contributed to drive George the Third to madness. His first fit of derangement happened in 1788, and lasted several months. 10. In 1S05, he had another turn, and a third in 1810. From this latter period, he continued a madman till his dying day. While the armies of England were gaining glorious victories, and grand events were continually taking place, the poor old crazy king knew nothing of the matter. Death released him from this miserable condition, in the eighty-second year of his age. ' 11. The son of the old king was very wild in his youth, and he never became a really good man. He had been declared Prince Regent in consequence of his father's insanity. In 1820', he was crowned as king George the Fourth. 12. Even when he was quite an old man, this king cared as much about dress as any young coxcomb. He had a great deal of taste in such matters, and it is a pity that he was a king, because he might otherwise have been an excellent tailor. 13. During his regency and reign, England combated the power of Bonaparte. With her gigantic power, and aided by the other king- doms of Europe, that famous conqueror was finally overthrown. The other events of king George's reign are so recent, that they scarcely yet belong to history. He died in 1830, and was succeeded by his brother, William the Fourth ; he died in 1S37, and was succeeded by Victoria, the present queen. 5. What took place in 1T45 ? 6. What of the war in 1755? What of Quebec and the Canailas ? 7. When did George III. begin to reign? 8. Character of George III. ? 9. What happened to him ? 18. What of his insanity ? When did lie die ? 11. When was George IV . crowned ? \2 . What of his taste in dress ? 13, What events took place during his reign ? When did he die ? Who succeeded him ? WALES. 251 CHAPTER CLII.-EUROPE CONTINUED. • The Story of Wales. 1. If you ever go to Wales and mingle with the people, you will hardly believe that you are in any part of Great Britain. The names of the inhabitants are very different from "English names. What would you think of Mr. Llewellyn ap 'Griffith ap Jones, and Mrs. Catesby ap Catesby ? Yet such names are common in Wales. 2. Some of the people speak English, but most of them use the same language that was spoken by their ancestors. It is nearly the same as the original language of Ireland and the Highlands of Scot- land. This seems to show that the people are of the same stock as the Irish and the Scotch Higlanders. 3. The early history of Wales is involved in obscurity. When the Romans came to Britain, the Welsh mountains were inhabited by a rougli set of people, who gave terrible blows with their clubs. They defended their mountains so fiercely, that the Romans never got pos- session of the country. 4. When the Saxons came, they subdued all England, and a small portion of Wales ; but the greater part heid out against them to the last. Thus the Welsh princes maintained their independence, as well against the Roman as the Saxon invaders. These princes ap- pear to have lived in strong stone castles, which, in time of war, were defended by the people around them. The ruins of some of these castles are still to be ■seen. 5. In these ancient limes there was a strange set of men in Wales, called bards. These sung songs and told stories about the brave deeds of the Welsh princes and heroes. The people loved to listen to these men, for their tales related to fierce war and bloody battles, of which such rude nations are ever fond. 6. Some of these bards had a wonderful gift for singing and story- telling. These were often taken into the castles of the princes, and here they led a merry life, between singing and feasting. In order to keep up their influence they pretended to be prophets, and both the people and the princes believed they could foretell future events. Perhaps, too, the bards believed it themselves, for nothing is more easy than self-decepiion. At all events, the people paid them the greatest reverence. 7. There is nothing so troublesome to a king as a tribe of people maintaining their independence in his neighborhood. His pride is moriified, his indignation roused, by seeing people thus set up for themselves. He thinks everybody ought to bow to power, and feels toward them very much as an old hunter does towards a family of Ch. CLII. — 1. What of the names in Wales ? 2. Their language ? Of what stock are Am Welsh people ? 3. What of the early history of Wales? The ancient inhabitants ? 4. What of the Saxons? What of the Welsh princes? 5. G. What of the bard;,? 252 SCHOOL HISTORY. •wolves or foxes, that persist in living among the rocks near him, in spite of all his efforts to kill them. 8. So it was Avith the kings of England with regard to Wales. With a view therefore to subdue these Welsh wolves and foxes of the mountains, they sent a great many armies against them. But the mountaineers were too cunning to be caught, until about the year 1285. Edward the first was then king of England, and Llewellyn prince of Wales. 9. The bards were always great lovers of hard fighting, and there- fore they incited the Welsh princes to the boldest deeds. Llewellyn had been told by one of these bards, that he should become master of the whole island of Britain. 10. Accordingly, when the army of Edward the First came against him, he rashly led his little army against the English, and was de- feated and slain. He was succeeded by his brother David, but he too was taken and hung on a gibbet, for the crime of bravely defend- ing his country. 11 King Edward was very angry at the bards for stirring up the people to resist his arms. He therefore caused them all to be as- sembled and put to death. These acts did not make the king a favorite, but the next king was born in Wales, and received the title of Prince of Wales. They appear to have liked him a little better. From this time, the eldest son of the king of England has been called Prince of Wales. 16. Thus, with the death of David, ended the line of Welsh princes, and thus ended the independence of Wales. Since that time, the Welsh have been a part of the British nation, and they now weave stockings and dig coal and iron, instead of fighting, as' their fathers did in the times of Llewellyn. CHAPTER CLIII.-EUROPE CONTINUED. The Story of Scotland. 1. The first inhabitants of Scotland appear to have been Celts, and probably were the same as the early Britons, Welsh, and Irish. They defended themselves against the Romans, who could never subdue the people of the Highlands. They were so troublesome that the lloman generals caused a wall to he built from the Solway 1 Frith to he river Tyne. 2. Thus the Scots were shut up in their own country, like a herd of unruly cattle; but they contrived' to get over the wall pretty often. 7. What is very troublesome to a king? 8. What did the lungs of England do ?. Who was Prince of Wales in 1235? 9. What did the hards do? What did one of them jell Llewellyn ? 10. What did Llewellyn do ? His fate? Who defeated him ? What of his brother David? 11. What did king Edward do to the bards? Where was the next king of England born ? 12. Since when have the Welsh become a part of the British nation? What of the Welsh people now? Ch. CLIII. — 1. What of the first inhabitants of Scotland ? What did the Roman generals do ? SCOTLAND. 253 Tn three or four hundred years after Christ, a tribe of Goths, called Picts, came over from the continent, and settled in this country. These inhabited the Lowlands, and lived by agriculture. The Scots dwelt in the mountains, carrying on war, and subsisting by the chase. 3. Thus the nation became divided into Highlanders and Lowlan- ders, and thus, to some extent, the people remain to this day. They live peaceably now, but in early days, they quarrelled very fiercely, I cannot undertake to tell you of their battles, and indeed we know but little about them. 4. In 839, it is said that Kenneth the Second, who was a Highland leader, subdued the Picts, and became the first kins: of all Scotland. From his time to Edward the First of England, there were a good many sovereigns, but their story is not worth repeating. 5. I have told you in the history of England, how Edward Long- shanks, the same that subdued Wales, made war upon the Scotch, imprisoned Wallace, and had prepared a great army for the final subjugation of the Scotland, when he died. I have told you how his son, Edwrrd the Second, was beaten by Robert Bruce at the glorious battle of Bannockburn. This event occurred in 1313, and secured the freedom of Scotland, which had been threatened by the English kings. 6. From this time the history of Scotland tells of little but civil wars and bloody battles with England, till the time of James the Fifth. He assumed the reins of government in 1513, at the age ot thirteen years. He lost the confidence of his army, and they deserted him in the hour of need. This broke his heart, and he starved him- self to death, at the age of thirty-one. 2. What of the Picts? The Scots? 3. How was the nation divided ? How did they live in the early times ? 4. Who was king of Scotland in 839 ? 5. What can you tell ol Edward Longshanks ? Of Edward II,? When was the battle of Bannockburn? Iti effects? 6. How long were the Scots at war with the English ? When did James V. begin to reign ? His fate ? -_ 254 SCHOOL HISTORY. 7. His daughter was the beautiful and unfortunate Mary, queen oi Scots, as she is called, and whom I have mentioned in the history or England. She was educated in France, and was not only very hand- some, but she was very accomplished. While she was yet a" young lady, she was taken to Scotland and became queen. 8. But beauty, accomplishments, and power, cannot insure happi- ness. Mary's kingdom was in a state of great trouble ; the people were divided among themselves, and Mary found it impossible to govern them. At length,' she became afraid that they would kill her, and, to save her life, she set out for England, and placed herself under the protection of Elizabeth. 9. This was about as wjse as it would be in a fly to seek protection of a spider. Elizabeth treated Mary very much as a spider would a fly who falls into his power. She caused her to be put in prison, and finally took her life. 10. The son of Mary, James Sixth' of Scotland, succeeded his mother, and after the death of Elizabeth, he became king of England also, under the title of James the First. Though he lived in Ens-land, he did not forget Scotland. He loved learning, and caused schools to be established in his native country, where all the boys and girls might learn to read and write. These schools are continued to this day, and therefore it is very uncommon to meet with a Scotchman who is not a fair match for a Yankee. 11. From the time ofKing James, in 1603, Scotland has been attached to the British crown. She has sometimes rebelled, and in the cause of the Stuarts she fought a good many battles. But for many years, Scotland has been a peaceful portion of the British kingdom. CHAPTER CLIV. -EUROPE CONTINUED. About Ireland. 1. The history of Ireland, or " Green Erin," as it is called, is ful J of interesting matter, and I am sorry that I can only bestow upon it one brief chapter. The first inhabitants, like the Britons, were hard-fisted Celts, who fought with clubs, and seemed to love fighting better than feasting. 2. They were divided into many tribes, and their leaders were called kings. These were constantly quarrelling with each other, and thus the people had plenty of their favorite sport. The early Irish, like the other Celtic tribes, were devoted to the religion of the Druids, but about the year 430, a Christian missionary came into the country, whose name was Patrick. 7. 9. 9. Tel] the story of Mary of Scotland? 10. Who succeeded Mary ? What did James do' 11. What of Scotland since 1603? Ch. CLIV.— 1. What is Ireland called ? Who were its first inhabitants 5 2. What of the Celts? Religion of the early Irish? What took place in 430 ? IRELAND. 255 3. He seems to have been a wise and good man, and the people liked him very much. la thirty yens he spread Christianity over all Ireland, and under its influence ilie Irish gradually became civilized. Patrick lived to a great age, but at length he was buried at Doune. 4. When he was gone, the people told pretty large stories about nim, and finally they considered him more holy than other men, and called him a saint. To this day, they regard St. Patrick as in heaven, watching over the interests of Ireland. o. Among the curious notions still entertained by the Irish with regard to St Patrick, is this In Ireland there are no serpents or venemous reptiles, and the people firmly believe that St. Patrick put an end to them, and freed the island from them all for ever ! 6. In the time of jlenry the Second of England, Ireland was con- quered,. and since that period has been under the English kings. It has, however, been very" ill governed. King James the First did something towards improving the condition of the people, but neithei he nor any subsequent king has beeu able to get Si. Patrick out of their heads. 7. The saint was a Roman Catholic, and the greater part of the people are Catholics to this day. They are dissatisfied with the Eng- lish government ; and well they may be, for its conduct has been sel- fish, cruel, and unwise. The people have often been in a state of re- bellion, and though the leaders are ever crushed by the power of the government, still others rise Up to head the people. 8. Thus Ireland has been for years in an almost constant state of agitation. Thousands of lives have been lost in vain attempts to obtain the freedom of the country. In 1847, it was visited by famine and pestilence, which carried off a million of the inhabitants. Since that time vast emigrations have taken- place; and the country seems now slowly rising from its former state of depression. CHAPTER CLV.— EUROPE CONTINUED. Matters and Things. 1. I have now told you something about England, Wales, Scotland, and Ireland ; but it is impossible to do justice to so great a subject, in this little book. I have told you something about the kings, and the battles that have been fought. 2. But there are a great many interesting stories that I have been obliged to omit. If I had time, I could giv^you a more particular account of the Celtic religion taught by the druids, which was very 3. Whnt of Patrick? What influence civilized the people ? 4. What did the people think of Patrick? How do they consider him? How do they honor him? 5. What cWious notions have the Irish with respect to St. Patrick? 6. When was Ireland con qnered? How has it since heen governed ? What of king James I. ? 7. What is the re- ligion of Ireland. Do the people like the government of England? What excites them to rebellion ? S. What is the present state of Ireland ? 22 256 SCHOOL HISTORY. curious, together with the manners of these Celts in other respects, which you would find very amusing. " • \l. I could tell you of Odin, or Woden, the Scandinavian hero, who established a strange mythology, which pervaded the northern nations of Europe, and became, for a time, the religion of some of the inhabi- tants of Britain. I could tell you how Christianity was- introduced into England, sixty years after Christ ; and how at first the people built rude churches of wood, and how they afterwards constructed those fine Gothic buildings in which the people worship now. Jin English church in very early times. 4. If I had time, I could tell of the Gypseys, a strange race of people to be found in most countries of Europe, but particularly in England, Spain, Hungary, and Bohemia ; who wander from place ta place, having no fixed homes ; who come from some far land, but whether from Egypt or Asia, none can tell ; who continue from age to age the same, while the nations, among which they wander, rise and fall, flourish and decay. 5. If I had time, I could tell you some curious stories about a fa- mous robber by the name of Robin Hood, who lived in the woods, and performed strange things. I could also tell you of many celebrated people more worthy of being remembered than this freebooter. 6. I could tell you of Dr. Watts, who wrote that beautiful little book entitled Hymns for Infant Minds; a work which has given more pleasure, and done more good, than all the battles of the greatest conqueror that ever lived. 7. I could tell you of Hannah More, who wrote that beautiful story entitled the Shepherd of Salisbury Plain ; of Miss Edgeworth, who wrote the story of Frank; and Daniel De Foe, who made up that beautiful fancy-story called Robinson Crusoe. 8. It would be very pleasant to read about these people ; they seem like friends to us, and we should like to know Avhere they lived, how Ch. CLV. — 3. Who was Woden ? What did his mythology become .' When was Chris- tianity introduced into England ! 4. .What of the Gypseys? Where do they live < 5. Who was Robin Hood? 6. What of Dr. Watts ? 7. What other celebrated writers could b« mentioned? EUROPE. 257 they looked, and what adventures they met with. But these and other matters relating to the history of that beautiful and interesting country from which our forefathers came, I must leave for the present. 9. I have then only to add, that while you can read the history of the British nation in books, you can best study the character and man- ners of the people at home, in their own country. An Englishman is very agreeable in his own house ; but out of his country, he is too of- ten disagreeable, ill-mannered, and unreasonable. 10. The Scotch are a shrewd, money-saving race, and if you will go to their wild country, and pay well for what you want, you will be well served. If a Scotchman leaves his own country, it is to better his fortune, and it is best to keep out of his way. He will get what he can, and give nothing. He will then go home and laugh at you. 11. The Irish are much the same, wherever they may be; cheer- ful, witty, and generous. They live for to-day, and think little of to- morrow. They are generally without education, but if ignorant, they are better than most other ignorant people. Let us ever treat them kindly. They are of a nation possessing fine qualities, but injured by ages of oppression. Beside, they are rapidly improving now, and their children will be among our best and happiest citizens. CHAPTER CLVI.— EUROPE CONTINUED. Review. The Dark Ages. Important Inventions, Sfc. 1. Such is my brief story about Europe. I hope I have told you enough to excite your curiosity, and lead you to read larger works than mine, about the nations I have mentioned. You will find the subject very interesting, and worthy of your careful study. I have room now only to mention a few things that have been omitted in the progress of my story. 2. You will" remember that Greece "was settled before any other portion of Europe, and that the Greeks became a polished and pow- erful people. You will remember thai Rome became a mighty em- pire, and extended its sway over nearly all parts of the world that were then known. 3. You will remember that four or five hundred years after Christ, the Roman empire was dismembered, and that the northern tribes cf Europe spread themselves over Spain, Italy, and Greece. Thus the arts, learning, and refinement, which had been cultivated in these countries, were for a time extinguished, and all Europe was reduced to a nearly barbarous state. 4. This period is called the Dark Ages, because the nations were generally ignorant, fierce, and barbarous. So things continued, till about five hundred years ago, when the liijlit of learning began to re- 9. WhrU of Englishmen? 10. What of the Scotch ? 11. What of the Irish? Ch. CLVI —2. Which of the nations of Europe was first settled? What of Rome ? 8. What hap pencd four or five hundred years after Christ? O.J * '258 SCHOOL HISTORY. turn. Since that time, society has advanced in civilization, till it has reached a higher state of improvement than was ever known before. 5. The history of the church of Christ is a subject at which I have been able only to take an occasional glance. After our Saviour's death, in the year 33, his apostles proceeded to spread the Gospel throughout different countries. Paul was the most active and suc- cessful of these missionaries. He went several times through Asia Minor, travelled to Greece, and finally to Rome ; everywhere preach- ing the tru hs of the Christian religion. He died at Rome A. D. 61. 6. At first, the Christians were persecuted by the Roman emperors, but the Gospel continued to flourish, until it pervaded most parts of the Ptoman empire. It was introduced into Britain in the year 60, and into most other parts of Europe at an early period. But it was not till the year 306, when Constantine adopted it, that it found favor with any king or prince in Europe. 7. From this period it advanced rapidly. The mythology of Greece and Rome gave way before it. .The horrid sacrifices and gloomy superstitions of the druids yielded to the gentle worship of one God, and the mysterious rites of Odin were forsaken for the reli- gion of the Cross. S. The popes of Rome succeeded in placing themselves at the head ri the christian religion, thereby obtaining a controlling influence over mankind. They gradually acquired an immense power, which, mis- led by the spirit of the time, they often used improperly. 9. In process of time, their authority was lessened, and a large part i)f the people of Christendom protested against their authority, and tvere thence called Protestants. At the present day, the pope of Rome has but little power, and the catholic church, Which, like other religious communities in the dark ages, was addicted to persecution, aas ceased thus to exercise its authority. The popes of modern times nave been distinguished for their piety. 10. I have mentioned the Inquisition, in the history of Spain. This was a secret court, whose business it was to arrest and bring to trial those who were suspected of not being true followers of the Catholic religion, which was believed to be tiie only sound faith. 11. It appears that this institution w,as sanctioned by pope Inno- cent III., in the year 1215. From that time, it was gradually ex- tended, and at length was established in Spain, 1481. Here it acquired great power, and became the most cruel and bloody tribunal on earth. 12. It was for many years a favorite instrument by which the pope of Rome carried on his schemes of tyranny. It was introduced into inosi countries of Europe where the Catholic religion prevailed, but in no country did it exercise its terrible power with such cruel despot- ism as in Spain. It was not finally abolished till the year 1820. 4. What period was called the Dark Ages ? How long is it since learning began to re- vive ? 5. When did Christ die ? What of the Apostles? Paul ? G. How did the Roniarai al first treat the Christians? When was Christianity introduced into Britain? What took place in 308 ? 7. What of the progress of Christianity ? 8. What of the popes? 9. Whc were called Protestants? What of the pope at present ? 10 What was the Inquisition ? II Bj whom sanctioned ? When? When established in Spain ? What did it there be '••line, r VI. Where was it introduced ? Where was its power most cruelly exercised ' EUROPE. 259 13. I have not had an opportunity to mention the abheys and mon' asteries of Europe. These curious institutions, however, deserve no- tice. It appears that in most countries there have ever been some people who retire from the active business of life, and shut themselves up for religious contemplation. Such has been the case in Asia ; and among the worshippers of Brama, Fo, Lama, and Mahomet, they are still found. Such was also the case among the idolaters of ancient Eijvpt, Greece, and Rome. Such was the case among the ancient Jews and such has been the case among the believers of Christ, from very early ages. 14. The first monastery was founded by St. Anthony, in Upper Egypt, A. D. 305. This consisted of a number of huts, in which sev- eral hermits dwelt, devoting themselves to penance and prayer. Another monastery was established in France, in the year 360, by St. Martin. From this time, these institutions were multiplied, and be- came established in all Catholic countries. From the eighth to the fifteenth century, they received great encouragement, and many splen- did edifices were erected for their use. 15. Some were called abbeys, and some monasteries. Many of them were filled with monks and friars, and others with females, called nuns. The splendid remains of many of these edifices are still to be found in England, France, Germany, and other parts of Europe. At first, the inhabitants of monasteries lived in a simple manner, and devoted themselves to religious contemplations. But in after times the abbeys and monasteries became seats of voluptuousness. None were permitted to enter them but the monks and nuns ; these, there- fore, while they pretended to be engaged in religious duties, screened from the eyes of the world, often gave themselves up to luxurious pleasures. • 16. These institutions were, however, greatly encouraged by the popes; and it was not until the corruptions of the Catholic religion brought on the Reformation, in the sixteenth century, that monastic institutions began to decline. They were abolished in England in 1539, and in France in 1790. In several other countries of Europe they have ceased, but still continue in Italy and Spain. 17. In the earlv ages, war was carried on without guns and cannon. The Greeks and Romans were armed with swords, spears, and bat- tle-axes, and they carried shields for defence. The troops of Egypt, Carthage, and Persia, were armed in a similar manner. In the year 1330, gunpowder was invented, and cannon be^an to be used about the same time. They were first employed by the English at the bat- tle of Cressy, in 1346. On that occasion, king Edward had four pieces of cannon, which greatly aided in gaining the victory. 18. From this time, fire-arms were rapidly introduced, and soon the 13. What appears to be the case in most countries? Mention some instances. 14. Who f)unded the first monastery ? When? Of what did it consist? When and by whom was a monastery established in r ranee ? What of monasteries from this time ? 15. Who inhab- ited them? How did the monks and nuns formerly live ? How in later times? 10. By whom were these institutions encouraged ? When did monastic Institutions bepin to de- cline ? When were they abolished in England? In France? Where do they si ill exist? 17. What of war in early times? Arms? When was gunpowder invented ? When wers cannon 6rst used by the English ? 200 SCHOOL HISTORY. whole art of war was changed. Bows and arrows, spears and shields, were thrown aside, and contending armies, instead of coming up close to each other, and righting face to face, learned to shoot each other down at a distance. 19. One of the greatest discoveries of modern times is that quality of the mariner's compass by which it always points to the north pole. This useful instrument, which enables the seaman to traverse the trackless deep, appears to have been in use as early as 1180.. 20. But a still more important invention was that of printing, in 1441. Previous to that time, all books were written with the pen. A copy of the Bible was worth as much in ancient times as a good house or a good farm is now. Of course, very few people could learn to read for the want of books. If Peter Parley had lived in those times, 1 am inclined to think he would have obtained a poor living. CHAPTER CLVIL— EUROPE CONTINUED. Chronology of Europe. B.C. Greece founded by Inachus 1856 Athens founded by Cecrops 1556 Corinth founded 1520 Sparta founded by Lelex 1516 Thebes founded by Cadmus 1500 Argonautic expedition 1263 Twelve States of Greece unite 1257 Siege of Troy 1193 Phoenicians trade to Spain, about 900 Homer born about 900 Lycurgus gives laws to Sparta 884 Building of Rome by Romulus 752 Numa Pompilius made king of Rome 715 Tullus Hostilius " " " 672 Solon lawgiver of Athens 643 Bias the Greek philosopher flourished 617 The Celts settled in Bohemia 600 Death of Tarquin, and his family expelled from Rome . . . 509 The Carthaginians make conquests in Spain, about .... 500 Tribunes chosen at Rome 490 Battle of Marathon 490 Decemviri chosen at Rome 451 Peloponnesian war begins 446 IS. What happened from this time? 19. What is a great discovery of modern times ? When was the mariner's compass first used ? .20. When was printing invented? How were hooks formerly made ? Ch. CL VII. — Let the teach er examine the pupil carefully in the Chronological table ; and let him direct the pupil to tell whut events trere taking place in Asia, and Africa, ivtiile the several events were occurring in Europe, CHRONOLOGY. 261 B.C. Censors established at Rome 437 Death of Pericles 429 General migration of Gauls to different parts of Europe . . 397 Italy ravaged by the Gauls and Rome taken 396 Battle of Leuctra 371 Death of Epaminondas 363 Theatres established in Rome 361 War between the Romans and Samnites '343 Battle of Cheronea - 338 Death of Philip, king of Macedon 336 Death of Alexander, king of Macedon 323 Greece subjected by Cassander 322 Sundial introduced into Rome 312 Aqueducts built in Rome 311 The Gauls make destructive incursions into Macedon and Greece 280 to 278 Greece invaded by the Gauls 278 All Italy submits to Rome 270 First Punic war begins 264 Second Punic war begins 218 Spain subjected to the Roman power 206 A colony of Belgae settled in Gaul 200 Greece becomes a Roman province ......... 146 Carthage destroyed 146 Spain becomes a province of Rome 134 The southern part of Gaul along the Mediterranean conquered by the Romans 128 to 122 Social war in Greece begins 91 War between Marius and Sylla S8 Pompey defeats Mithridates 63 Triumvirate formed in Rome 59 France invaded by Julius Caesar 58 Switzerland subdued by Caesar 57 Caesar invades Britain 55 Battle of Pharsalia and death of Pompey 48 Death of Caesar 44 All France finally conquered by the B,omans , 25 Hungary, anciently Pannonia, subject to the Romans «• . . 11 A.D. Death of Augustus Caesar, emperor of Rome 14 Tiberius emperor of Rome died 37 Caligula emperor of Rome died 41 England finally subdued by Claudius a Roman general ... 44 Claudius ascends the throne 54 Nero emperor of R.ome died 54 Christianity introduced into England 60 Hygenus, first bishop of Rome who took the title of pope . . 154 Scotland received the Christian faith 203 The Romans expelled from Germany ......... 290 / 262 SCH.OOL HISTORY. A.D. Constantine began to reign 306 Christianity adopted by the emperor of Rome . . . . . 311 Constantine removes the seat of the Roman Empire to Con- stantinople 329 Rome divided into the Eastern and Western empire by Theodo- sius 395 France invaded by the Goths and other Germanic tribes . . 400 Rome taken by Alaric 410 Pharamond a Frank becomes first king of France .... 418 Kingdom of the Visigoths founded in Spain 419 Venice founded 421 Germany conquered by the Huns 432 Hungary possessed by the Huns under Attila 433 Italy invaded by Attila 445 The Saxons conquer England 445 Rome taken by Odoacer 476 Kingdom of Sweden began 481 Monarchy of France established 486 Goths driven from Rome by Belisarius 537 Patrick visits Ireland 550 The pope's supremacy over the Christian church established . 607 Custom of kissing the pope's toe introduced , . . . . . 708 Pi,oderick, king of Spain, defeated by the Moors \ . . . . . 712 The first king reigns in Denmark 714 Gregory III., founder of the pope's temporal power, became pope 731 Pepin the Short, first of ihe Carlovingian race in France . . 751 The pope's temporal power established 755 Charlemagne began to reign in France 772 Charlemagne crowned at Rome 800 Charlemagne master of Germany 802 Venice becomes an independent republic 803 City of Venice built 809 Charlemagne died 814 Egbert I., king of England 827 Kenneth II., first king of Scotland 839 Iceland discovered by the Norwegians 860 Alfred ascends the English throne 872 The Danes conquer England 877 Emperors first chosen in Germany 912 Canute, king of Denmark, conquered England 1016 Danes driven out of England 1041 Leo IX., the first pope that kept an army 1054 Henry IV , emperor of Germany 1056 Harold became king of England 1066 William the Conqueror ascends the throne- of England . . . 1066 Henry IV., emperor of Germany, obliged to stand three days at the pope's gate 1077 Pope's authority introduced into England 1079 CHRONOLOGY. 263 A. D Peter the Hermit heads the first Crusade 1096 Godfrey of Boulocne takes Jerusalem 1099 Kingdom of Portugal founded 1139 Piichard ascends the throne of England 1189 Chivalry at its height .* 1200 Magna Charta granted by king John 1215 Last Crusade began 124S Oihman first emperor of Turkey 1268 Rodolph of Hapsburg governs Austria 1273 Wales annexed to the crown of England 1283 Oth man empire founded 1299 Residence of the pope removed to Avignon in France, where it remained seventy years 1308 Battle of Bannockburn 1313 Battle of Cressv 1346 William Tell died 1354 Battle of Poictiers 1356 Norway incorporated with Denmark 1397 Battle of Agincourt 1420 Joan of Arc raises the siege of Orleans 142S The Turks conquer the Eastern empire 1453 Wars of York and Lancaster began 1455 The Portuguese discover the Cape of Good Hope 14S1 The first court of the Inquisition in Spain 1481 Richard Crookback king of England died 1485 America discovered by Columbus 1492 The Moors of Granada driven out of Spain 1492 The Portuguese discover Brazil .... 1501 Reformation commenced by Martin Luther 1517 Gustavus Vasa expelled the Danes from Sweden .... 1525 Rome sacked and pope Clement imprisoned 1527 Gustavus Vasa ascended the throne of Sweden 1528 Pope's residence removed a second time to Avignon .... 1531 Henry VIII. of England died 1547 Bloody Mary, queen of England 1553 The first czar reigned in Russia 1553 Elizabeth ascended the throne of England 1558 Masr-r^-re of the Protestants in France 1572 The republic of Holland founded 15S1 Henry the IV. ascended the throne of France 15S9 James I. ascends the throne of England 1603 Portugal becomes independent of Spain 1004 Henry IV. of France, killed by Ravaillac, a Jesuit .... 161f Gustavus Adolphus king of Sweden 161j The Moors finally expelled from Spain 1620 Charles I. ascends the throne of England 1625 Battle of Luizen and death of Adolphus Gustavus .... 1633 Civil war began in England between the Cavaliers and Round- heads. 1642 264 SCHOOL HISTORY. A.D. Charles I. beheaded 1649 Cromwell made Lord Protector of England 1654 Charles II. king of England 1660 Great Plague in London 1665 Great Fire in London ..* 1666 The Turks lay siege to Vienna 16S8 William and Mary crowned in England 16S9 Peter the Great begins to reign 1696 Prussia became a kingdom 1701 Anne ascended the throne of England 1702 Peter the Great defeats Charles XII. at Pultowa 1709 Russia becomes an empire 1721 Peter the Great died 1725 Hungary annexed to Germany 1739 Lisbon destroyed by an earthquake 1755 War between Austria, Russia, France, and Prussia .... 1756 George III. king of England 1760 Partition of Poland 1772 Kissing the pope's toe abolished 1773 Political influence of the popes ceased in Europe 17S7 The Bastile at Paris destroyed 17S9 Execution of Louis XVI., king of France 1793 Catherine II. of Russia died 1796 Venice attached to Austria 179S Switzerland conquered by the French 1798 Napoleon took possession of E^ypt 1798 Napoleon gained the battle of Marengo ........ 1800 Napoleon created emperor of France 1S04 King of Portugal removes to Brazil 1807 Joachim Murat made king of Sardinia 1808 Napoleon removes Ferdinand from the throne of Spain . . . 1S03 Austria at war with France 1809 The city of Moscow burnt 1812 Norway transferred to Sweden 1814 Inquisition abolished in Portugal 1815 Revolution in Portugal 1S20 Inquisition abolished in Spain 1S20 George IV. made king of England 1820 Greece rises against the Turks 1821 Death of Lord Byron at Missilonghi 7 1824 Alexander emperor of Russia dies 1S25 Nicholas ascends the throne of Russia . . a . . . • • 1825 Massacre of the Janizaries in Turkey 1826 Battle of Navarino 1S27 Accession of Otho to the throne of Greece 1829 William IV. ascended the throne of England 1S30 Netherlands divided into Holland and Belgium 1830 Ferdinand VII., king of Spain, died 1833 Revolution in France, ... ..... February 22d, 18-18 AMERICA. 267 CHAPTER CLVIIL— AMERICA. About America.- 1. We have long been occupied with the three great divisions of Ae eastern continent, Asia, Africa, and Europe. Let us now leave these countries, cross the Atlantic, and come to our continent of Amtrica. 2. This continent, as you will see by the map, consists of two parts, North and South America. These are united by a narrow strip of land called the isthmus of Darien, about sixty miles in width; at the narrowest part it is but thirty-seven miles. This vast continent is about nine thousand miles in length, and is nearly equal in extent to Asia. The whole population is estimated at forty millions. 3. The northern part of America is excessively cold. Whether it is there bounded by the sea, or whether it extends to the north pole, we cannot tell. Greenland, the coldest inhabited country on the globe, was formerly considered a part of our continent, but is now thought to be an island. 4. The countries in North America, are the island of Iceland, Greenland, the Polar Regions, inhabited by the Esquimaux and other tribes of Indians, British America, Russian America, the United States, Mexico, and Guatimala. 5 Between North and South America are a number of beautiful islands, called the West Indies. South America is divided into Venezuela. New Grenada, Equator. Peru. Bolivia, Chili, the United Provinces, Uruguay, and Paraguay. These are republics. Brazil is Ch. CLVIII. — - 2. What does the continent of America consist of? What of the isthmui ofDarisn? Extent and population of America ? 3. What is known of the northern part of America? What of Greenland ? 4. Countries of North America? 5. What of Ih West Indies? Divisions of Smith America ? Brazil? 2G8 SCHOOL HISTORY. a province of Portugal ; and Patagonia, at the southern end of South America, is a land thinly settled by uncivilized tribes. Guiana belongs to Great Britain, France, and Holland. View in the Polar Regions. 6. I have said that it was extremely cold at the northern part of North America. In this dreary region, no trees are to be found, no plants flourish. For nine months in the year, the sea is frozen, and scarcely a living thing is able to dwell there. Even in summer, nothing is seen but now and then a lonely white bear, or a solitary rein-deer feeding upon moss. 7. As you proceed south, you meet with a few willow and birch trees, and some hardy plants. Still farther south, the vegetation im- proves, wild animals become abundant, and wild birds are seen swimming in the waters, or hovering in the air. 8. Here you meet with tribes of Esquimaux and Chippewa In- dians. When you get to Canada, you find a fruitful country. When you get as far south as the United States, the climate becomes pleas- ant. In the West Indies, around the Gulf of Mexico, and throughout all the northern parts of South America, the climate is that of perpet- ual spring or summer. 9. As you go farther south, it grows cold, and when you get to Cape Horn, you will find it a frozen country, where winter reigns three-fourths of the year. The wild animals of America are very numerous. The bison, wild goat, wild sheep, antelope, many kinds of deer, several kinds of bears, wolves, foxes, and many smaller quadrupeds, together with birds of many kinds, are natives of America. 6. What of the northern part of Norlh America ? 7. What of vegetation as you proceed louth ? 8. What of Indian tribes ? What of the climate as you proceed south to the north uf South America? 9. What of Cape Horn ? Animals of America ? Birds? AMERICA. 269 10. Most of our domestic animals were not found here when the country was first discovered. It is said that the Newfoundland dog, and one or two other species, are natives of this country. But our domestic cattle, all our breeds of sheep, our horses, asses, mules, goats, hens, and cats, were originally brought from Europe. The domestic turkey, goose, and duck, are native birds. 11. The people of America may be divided into two great classes. First, the Indians, who were found scattered throughout the American continent when it was first discovered. They consisted of many tribes, living seperately, and speaking different languages. And second, the descendants of the Europeans who have come to this country at various times, and settled here. To these we mi^ht add several millions of negroes, who have been brought from Africa as slaves, or their descendants. 12. America is remarkable for three things: it has the largest lakes, the longest rivers, and the longest chain of mountains to be found in the world. The largest lake is Lake Superior, the longest river is the Mississippi, the longest chain of mountains is that which extends nearly the whole length of the continent, being called the Andes in South America, the Cordilleras in Gfuatilmala and Mexico, and the Rocky Mountains in the United States. CHAPTER CLIX. -AMERICA CONTINUED. The first Inhabitants of America. 1. When we look around us, and see such fine cities as Boston, New- York, Philadelphia, Baltimore, New Orleans, Louisville, and Cincinnati ; when we see the whole country dotted all over with towns, cities, and villages, we can hardly believe that three hundreu and fifty years ago, our whole continent of America was unknown to the inhabitants of Europe, Asia, and Africa. 2. Such, however, was the fact. The country was indeed inhab- ited by many tribes of Indians, but these people had no books, and knew nothing of the rest of the world. Where they came from or when they first settled in America, no one can tell. 3. It appears that the northern portions of North America are in- habited by a race of people called Esquimaux. These differ from all the other Indians, and bear a close resemblance to the Laplanders. It seems likely, therefore, that these polar regions were settled by people who came from Europe in boats, many centuries since. 4. That such a thing is possible, appears from the fact that the Norwegians are known to have discovered Iceland, in the eighth century, and that they actually made settlements in Greenland in the 10. What animals were found here? What of cattle ? Native Birds? II. Describe the two clashes of people in America? 12. For what is America remarkable? In, CLIX.— 1. What of America three hundred and filly years ago? 2. What of the Indiaut? 3. The Eanuimaux ? What seems probable ? 23 * 270 SCHOOL HISTORY ninth century. It appears, then, that portions of America we*-} actually visited by these northern Europeans, who possessed no other than small vessels, and little knowledge in the arts of navigation. Esquimaux Indians. 5. But how did the other Indians get to this country? If you will look on a map of the Pacific Ocean, you will see, at the northern part, that America and Asia come very close together. They are separated only by Behring's Straits, which are 'but eighteen miles wide. 6. Across this narrow channel, the people of the present day, living in the neighborhood, are accustomed to pass in their little boats. There is reason to believe, then, that many ages since, some of the Asiatic tribes of Tartars wandered to Behring's Straits and crossed over to America. These may have been numerous, and con- sisting of different tribes; a foundation may thus have been laid for the peopling of the American continent. 7. That such was the fact, there is little reason to doubt. There is considerable resemblance between the American Indians and some Asiatic tribes, and they appear to possess some singular customs known in Asia. Thus it would seem that Asia, which furnished the first inhabitants of Africa and Europe, also supplied this continent with the first human beings that trod its shores. 4. What of the Norwegians? 6. What straits separate Asia and America? Thcif width ? G. What is there reason to believe ? 7. Whom do our Indians resemble ? How was America probably first peopled? AMERICA. 271 CHAPTER CLX.-AMERICA CONTINUED Discovery of America by Columbus. Picture of one of the Vessels of Columbus. 1. It has been conjectured that the ancient Carthaginians discovered South America, and made settlements there. But this is very un- likely; if it was the case, the event had been forgotten for two or three thousand years. It appears probable, that the first inhabitant of the Old World, who gave any information of what was called the New World, was Christopher Columbus. He may therefore fairly be called the discoverer of America. 2. This illustrious person was born at Genoa, in Italy, in 1442. As he grew up, he paid great attention to the study of geography. The idea entered his mind, that there must be vast tracts of undiscovered country, somewhere on the face of the broad ocean. 3. Columbus was poor, and had not the means of sailing in search of these unknown lands. He applied for assistance to the rulers of his native country; but they refused it. He next went to Portugal , but there he met with no better success. 4. At last, he came to the court of Spain. Ferdinand and Isabella were king and queen of that country. The king, like almost every- body else, treated Columbus with neglect and scorn. 5. But the queen thought so favorably of his project, that she sold her jewels to defray the expenses of the voyage. Three small vessels were equipped with ninety men, and with provisions for one year. Columbus took the command, and sailed from Spain on the 3rd of August, 1402. Ch CLX. — 1. What has been conjectured? What of Christophar Columbus? 2. When and where was he born? Tell the story of Columbus till the time wlieu he set sail f 272 SCHOOL HISTORY. 6. He first held his course southward, and touched at the Canary Islands. Thence he steered straight towards the west. After a few weeks, his men became alarmed. They feared they should never again behold their native country, nor any land whatever, but should perish in the trackless sea. 7. Columbus did his utmost to encourage them. He promised to turn back, if land were not discovered within three days. On the evening of the last day, at about ten o'clock, he looked from the deck of his vessel, and beheld a light gleaming over the sea. He knew that this light must be on land. ' In the morning an island was seen, to which Columbus gave the name of St. Salvador. S. This is one of the Bahama Islands. The natives thronged to the shore, and gazed with wonder at the three ships. Perhaps they mistook them for living monsters, and thought that their white sail's were wings. 9. Columbus clothed himself magnificently, and landed with a drawn sword in his hand. His first act was to knell down and kiss the shore. He then erected a cross, as a symbol that Christianity was now to take the place of paganism. He declared the island to be the property of queen Isabella. He then visited other islands, and returned to Spain, giving an account of the wonderful things he had seen. He made a second; but it was not till his third voyage that he discovered the continent of America. 10. No sooner had Columbus proved that there really was a new world beyond the sea, than several other navigators made voyages thitherward. Americus Vespucius, a native of Florence, came here and contrived to have the whole continent called by his name. 11. By degrees, discoveries were made along the whole coast of North and South America. People came from various nations of Europe, and formed settlements there. In relating the history of these settlements, I shall begin with the most northerly, although the earliest colonies were planted in the tropical regions. CHAPTER CLXI.-AMERICA CONTINUED. A feiv words about Iceland and Greenland. Settlements of the French in America. 1. I have already told you that the island of Iceland was discovered by a Norwegian pirate, in S60. After this, the Norwegians sent people to settle there. It is a cold, dreary country, and there is a terrible mountain in the island, called Hecla, which sometimes sends out fire, smoke, and ashes, and shakes the whole island with its frightful rumblings. 6. Which way did he first steer his course ? What of his men ? 7. How did Colunhus encourage them ? What laud was first discovered? S. What of the people ? 9. What did Columhus now do? 10. What of Americus Vespucius? U. What of other discoveries ? Cfl. CLXI— 1. Wheu was Iceland discovered ? What of it ? Mt. Hecla ? AMERICA 273 2. But still the inhabitants increased, and Christianity was intro- duced in 981. From that time to the present, they have continued a quiet, honest set of people. Their number is now fifty thousand, and they are under the government of Denmark. Greenland was dis- covered about the same time as Iceland, and settled soon after. Hecla, a volcanic mountain in Iceland. 3. The colony continued to flourish till the year 140S. At this time, the winter was so severe as to block up the sea, and since that time nothing has been known of the colony of settlers. It is proba- ble they all perished long since. This settlement was on the northern, part of Greenland. Another colony was settled in the southwestern part of Greenland ; this continues to the present day, but the inhab- itants are few in number. Most of them are native Esquimaux ; the rest are the descendants of the Norwegian settlers. 4. The portion of America which is now under the government of Great Britain, consists of Nova Scotia, New Brunswick, Newfound- land, Upper and Lower Canada, and New Britain. 5. All these provinces together compose a tract of country equal in extent to the United States. They are bounded north by the Arctic Sea and Baffin's Bay, east by the Atlantic, south by the United States, and west by Russian America and the Pacific Ocean. 6. The first people who formed settlements in America, to the northward jof the present limits of the United States, were the French. Nearly three hundred years ago, they were in the habit of sending fishing-vessels to this coast. 7. In 1524, a Frenchman, named James Cartier, sailed up the St. Lawrence and built a fort, in which he passed the winter. Settle- 2. When was Christianity introduced into Iceland? People? What of Greenland? Colony at Greenland? When was i( last heard of? Colony in the south ? The puopie ? 4. What does Briti>h America consist of ? 5. How large is it ? Boundaries? 6. What of the French? 7 Whal u ■•- done hi l-ril ? 274 SCHOOL HISTORY. ments were soon after formed in Canada and Nova Scotia. King Henry the Fourth of France appointed the Marquis de la Roche to be governor-general of Canada and the neighboring territories. 8. The city of Quebec was founded in the year 1608. It stands on the river St. Lawrence, about five hundred miles from the sea. Its foundation is on a rock of marble and slate. 9. The French settlers were on very friendly terms with the In- dians. They purchased the furs which the red men obtained in their hunting expeditions. These were sent to Europe, and sold at a great profit. Some of the French were married to Indian wives. 10. When the English began to form settlements to the southward of Canada, the French incited the savages to make war upon them. Parties of French and Indians would sometimes come from Quebec or Montreal, and burn the New England villages. The inhabitants were killed, or carried captive to Canada. 11. In 1629, Sir David Keith, a British officer, took Quebec ; but it was afterwards restored to the French. The people of New England made several attempts to get it back again. 12. In 1711, the British government sent a strong fleet up the St. Lawrence, under the command of Admiral Sir Hovender Walker. There was an army of seven thousand men on board the ships. 13. If they had landed in safety, they would probably have suc- ceeded in taking Quebec. But when they were entering the river, the vessels became involved in a fog. A strong wind began to blow, and drove eight or nine of them upon the rocky shore. 14. The next morning, the French found the dead bodies of a thou- sand men in scarlet coats, heaped among the rocks. These were the drowned English soldiers. This sad event caused the English to give up the design of conquering Canada. CHAPTER CLXII.-AMERICA CONTINUED. The French Colonies conquered by the English. 1. Whenever tnere was a war between France and Old England, taere was likewise a war between New England and the French pro- vinces in America. The French built strong fortresses, and the Eng- lish, or Americans made great efforts to take them. 2. The French had carefully fortified the city of Louisbourg, on the island of Cape Breton. In 1745, the New England people formed a project of taking it. They raised a strong army, and gave the com- mand to a Boston merchant, named William Pepperell. Who was appointed governor of Canada ? 8. When and where was Quebec founded? 9. What of the French and Indians ? 10. In what way were the English treated by them? 11. When and by whom was Quebec taken ? 12. 13. 14. What was done in 1711? Give an account of the expedition. What was the object of it? Ch. CLXII. — 1. What waf the consequence of a war between France and England ? 2. Where was Louisbourg What was done in 1745 ? AMERICA. 175 3. The army sailed under the escort of an English fleet and landed on the island of Cape Breton. General Pepperell's men were merely farmers and mechanics; and he himself knew but liule about taking fortresses. 4. But if the New Englanders bad no skill, they had plenty of cour- age. They erected batteries, and cannonaded the city for about a fort- night ; and then the French commander hauled down his flag. The conquest of Louisbourg was considered a very brillant exploit. 5. Louisbourg was restored to the French, at the close of the war But it was again taken by general Wolfe, in 1758. The same gen- eral soon afterwards led an army against Quebec. 6. This city was so strongly fortified, that it appeared almost im- possible to take it. It had a citadel, which was built upon a rock, several hundred feet high ; and there were strong walls all round the city. And besides the French garrison within the walls, there was a large French army on the outside. 7. But general Wolfe was determined to take Quebec, or lose his life in the attempt. After trying various other methods, he led his army from the shore of the river up a steep precipice. When they reached the top, they were on a level with the walls of Quebec. 8. This bold movement was performed in the night. As soon as the Marquis de Montcalm, who commanded the French army, heard of it, he marched to meet the British. A battle was begun imme- diately. 9. General Wolfe put himself at the head of his troops, and led them bravely onward. Though he had received two wounds, he re- fused to quit the field. At last, a ball struck him in the body, and stretched him on the ground. 10. A few of his soldiers carried him to the rear. But, though the hand of death was on him, general Wolfe thought only of the battle that was raging around. He heard a voice shouting, " They flee ! They flee !" and he asked who it was that fled. 11. " It is the French !" said one of his attendants. "They are beaten ! The victory is ours !" A glad smile appeared on the gen- eral's face. " Then I die happy !" he cried, and expired. 12. The victory was complete. The Marquis de Montcalm was mortally wounded. In a few days after the battle, Quebec was sur- rendered. The whole province, and all the French possessions in the nonh, soon fell into the hands of the British. 13. They have ever since continued under the British government. When the other American territories of Great Britain became inde- pendent, these old French colonies continued attached to the crown of Britain. De«cribe the capture of Louisbourg. 5. When was it restored to the French ? Wh«n taken by general Wolfe ? 6. Describe the capture of Quebec. 8. Who commanded tin French arrny ? 9. Describe general Wolfe's death. 12. Consequence of the victoiy ' French po«se9si4 a». 13. To what are the old French colonies attached ? 276 SCHOOL HISTORY. CHAPTER CLXIII.-AMERICA CONTINUED Description of the United States. 1. We have been travelling all about the world, but we have now got home again. We have been reading about countries where there are kings and emperors, but we have now come to a land where the people govern themselves in their own way, and get along very well without any king or emperor. 2. We have been listening to the story of nations who are governed by despots and tyrants ; let us now hear what can be said about a land of freedom. Let us, in the first place, go to a map; for the first step in studying the history of a country, should be to learn its situation, boundaries, shape, rivers, mountains, &c. 3. The United States, then, are bounded on the north by the British possessions, east by the Atlantic Ocean, south by the Gulf of Mexico and the states of Mexico, and west by the Pacific Ocean. The whole country is about two thirds as extensive as all Europe, and contains about fifteen millions of inhabitants. 4. Not more than half of this vast country is settled. The whole western portion is unoccupied, or thinly scattered over with Indian tribes. The United States are divided into thirty states, each having a governor, and a legislature to make laws. The whole are united under a national government, over which a president is placed as the chief ruler. 5. The United States are frequently spoken of under four sections. The Northern, Eastern, or New England states, are Maine, New Hampshire, Vermont, Massachusetts, Rhode Island, and Connecticut. The Middle states are New York, New Jersey, Pennsylvania, Dela- ware, and Maryland. The Southern states are Virginia North Car- olina, South Carolina.- Florida. Georgia, Alabama, Mississippi, Louisiana, and Texas. The Western states are Arkansas, Tennessee, Kentucky, Missouri, Illinois. Indiana, Ohio, Michigan, Iowa, and Wisconsin, to which we must now r add California. 6. The United States are favored by a great many fine rivers, flow- ing through fertile valleys. There are many mountains, but none are so lofty as the Andes of South America, the Alps of Europe, or the Himlaya mountains of Asia. The climate of the north is temperate, and the soil yields apples, pears, peaches, and other fruits. In the isouth it is warm, and oranges, figs, and lemons flourish. Ch. CLXIII.— 1. Whatof the people of the United States? 3. Boundaries of the Uni led States ? Extent? Population? How large a portion is settled? What of the go r> eminent? 5. Divisions of the United States? 6. Face of the country ? Climate? Soi * Productions ? rt 3 t, g i : h/ s Bj4 /W ^ s-Hf-f ^ -V'-ls '-4+r ■^-r" 77 24 078 SCHOOL HISTORY. CHAPTER CLXIV.— AMERICA CONTINUED. Settlement and Colonial History of New England. 1. Before speaking of the United States as one whole country, I must give a brief account of the settlements of the several colonies I shall begin with New England, because that section of the Union is the most northerly, though not first settled. 2. New England, as I have said, contains the states of Maine, New Hampshire, Vermont, Massachusetts, Rhode Island, and Connecticut. It is bounded north by Lower Canada, east by New Brunswick and the Atlantic Ocean, south by the Atlantic and Long Island Sound, and west by New York. 3. In the year 1620, a ship called the Mayflower arrived on the coast of New England. On board of this vessel were a number of ministers, and pious men and women. They had brought their chil- dren with them, for they never expected to return to their native land. 4. They had been driven from England by persecution, and they had come to this dreary wilderness, in order to worship God accor- ding to their own consciences. It was in the cold wintry month of December, when the Mayflower anchored in the harbour of Plymouth. The people went on shore, and the rock on which they landed has ever since been considered sacred. 5. They went to work and built themselves some poor huts. At first, they met with great difficulties and hardships. Many of them fell sick and died. The survivors were often in want of food, and were forced to dig for shellfish on the sea-shore. 6. In addition to their other troubles, the wild Indians sometimes threatened to attack them. But the Pilgrims were as brave and pa- tient as they were pious. They put their trust in God, and steadily pursued their design of making a permanent settlement in the country. 7. Soon after this settlement at Plymouth, other companies of reli- gious persons came to different parts of New England. ■ Some settled at Salem, and others at Boston. Thus a good many English people were established in the country. In the year 1 635, sixty men, women, and children, journeyed from Massachusetts to Connecticut, to make a settlement there. 8. They went through the woods on foot, and drove their cattle before them. At night, they lay down to sleep, with no shelter buv the boughs of the trees. When they reached the Connecticut river, they began to build Windsor, Hartford, and other towns. These were the first settlements in Connecticut. 9. In 1636, a pious minister, named Roger Williams, was banished from Massachusetts. He went to Rhode Island, and settled at Provi- dence. This good man was a great friend of the Indians, and they had a strong affection for him. Ch. CLXIV.— 2. What of New England? Boundaries? 3. What took place in 1G20! Describe the settlement of Plymouth ? 7. What of other settlements? What took plac« in 1G35 ? 9 When and by whom was Providence settled ? AMERICA. 279 10. By degrees, villages were built all along the sea-coast of New England, and settlements began to be formed on the inland rivers. But a thick and dreary forest still overshadowed the greater part of the country, and bears and wolves often prowled around the cottages. CHAPTER CLXV.-AMERICA CONTINUED. Affairs of New England continued. 1. The settlers of New England were good and pious people; but many of them seemed to have pretty much the same feelings towards the Indians that they had towards the bears and wolves. They con- sidered them a sort of wild animal, or if men, very wicked ones. 2. The best friend that ever the red men had, was John Eliot* He considered them his fellow-beings, and went about preaching to them; and so he was called the Apostle of the Indians. He spent a great many years in translating the Bible into their language, and in teach- ing the Indians to read it. 3. There were, however, very few white men that loved the In- dians; and the latter looked upon the settlers as their enemies. They were afraid that, in time, they would cut down all the trees of the forest, and change their hunting grounds into cultivated fields. 4. The settlers had, therefore, many wars with the Indians ; but the most terrible one broke out in the year 1675, and was called king Philip's war. King Philip, though an Indian, was a man of great sagacity, and it was his design to destroy all the settlers, and make New England a wilderness again. 5. King Philip first made an attack on the people of Swanzey, in Massachusetts, as they were coming out of the meetinghouse, on Fast day. Eight or nine persons were shot. Many others were killed and scalped in different parts of the country, and many houses were set on fire. 6. Almost every man in New England now shouldered his musket, and went out to fight king Philip. Even the ministers, instead of teaching the Indians to read the Bible, as John Eliot did, now took their guns and sent bullets at them, whenever they had a chance. 7. In the course of the next winter, the settlers formed themselves into an army of nearly two thousand men, and drove king Philip and the other Indians into a strong fort, in Rhode Island. It stood in the midst of a swamp, and contained six hundred wigwams. All the Indian women and children had taken refuge there. 8. Four thousand Indian warriors were in the fort. But the settlers boldly attacked them, broke into the fort, and set the wigwams on 10. What wa9 done by degree?? What of the greater part of New England? Ch. CLXV. — 1. How were the Indians considered by the settlers? 2. What of Joim P^li- ot? &, How did the Indians look upon the white men? When did king Philip's war be- gin? What of king Philip? 5. When did he first attack the Americans? 6. What did th« people do? 7. What did they do the next winter? What of the fort? 280 SCHOOL HISTORY. fire. Many of the old and infirm Indians, as well as the women and poor helpless children, were burnt alive. 9. A thousand Indian warriors were killed and wounded, and several hundred were taken prisoners. The remainder fled. The fort presented a horrible spectacle, with half-burnt bodies of men, women, and children, strewn among the ashes of the wigwams. 10. But still the war was not an end, for king Philip was alive. The next summer, it was known that he had taken refuge at Mount Hope, in Rhode Island. Captain Church pursued him thither with a small party of men. 11. King Philip happened to come towards a clump of bushes, where an Englishman and a friendly Indian lay concealed. The Englishman fired at him, but missed. The Indian then took aim and fired, and the valiant king Philip fell dead. 12. After this war, the Indians were never again able to do so much mischief to the New England people. But, for many years afteWvards, they would sometimes steal out of the woods by night, set the villages on fire, and slaughter the inhabitants. The New England colonies, however, increased rapidlv, and in time, the country had many pleasant towns and villages. CHAPTER CLXVI.-AMERICA CONTINUED. Early History of Virginia. 1. The colony of Virginia was settled some years before New Eng- land. Jamestown, on James river, was founded by captain Christo- pher Newport, in 1607. The first settlers of Virginia were not such pious people as those of New England. They had riot come to America for the sake of worshipping God, but were influenced by more worldly motives. 2. Many of them were wild young men, and it was difficult to keep them in order. Owing to this and other causes, the colony was sometimes on the brink of ruin. The Indians gave the settlers great trouble, and would probably have destroyed them, if it had not been for Captain John Smith. 3. Captain Smith was a gallant man, and had been a warrior all his lifetime. Before he came to Virginia, he had fought against the Turks, and had cut off the heads of three Turkish lords, in single combat. He showed himself equally valiant in his engagements with the Indians. 4. But one day, when captain Smith was retreating from a large party of savages, he sunk almost up to his neck in a swamp, so that he could neither fight nor flee. The Indians pulled him out of the swamp, and carried him to their king Powhatan. S. 9. Describe the destruction of the fort ? 10. 11. Describe the death of kiDg Philip 7 12. What of the Indians after this war ? Ch. CLX VI. — 1. When was Jamestow n settled •' What of the settlers of Virginia ? 2. What of the Indians ? UNITED STATES. 2S1 5. Powhatan was rejoiced to have captain Smith in his power, for he had been more afraid of him than of all the other Englishmen together. In order to preven^any further trouble, he determined im mediately to put him to death. Accordingly, captain Smith's hands were tied, and he was stretched on the ground, with his head on a large stone. 6. King Powhatan, who was a man of immense size and strength, then seized a great club, intending to kill captain Smith. He lifted the club on high for this purpose ; but just as the blow was falling, his daughter Pocahontas rushed forward. 7. This beautiful Indian maiden threw herself upon the body of captain Smith. If Powhatan's club had fallen, it would have killed her, instead of the prisoner. Pocahontas besought her father to have mercy ; aifd the fierce Indian could not resist her tears and en- treaties. S. Captain Smith was therefore released, and sent back to James- town. The name of Pocahontas will always be honored in Virginia. She was afterwards married to one of the English settlers, and her descendants are living in Virginia to this day. CHAPTER CLXVIL— AMERICA CONTINUED. Braddock' 1 s Defeat, and other Blatters. 1. I must pass over the remainder of the history of Virginia, till the time of the old French war. This hegan in 1755. Not king after war was declared, the British general Braddock marched with an army to attack the French at Fort du Quesne. This fort stood at the head of the Ohio river, where Pittsburgh is now situated. 2. Many Virginians and other colonists were in Braddock's army. Colonel George Washington, then a very young man. was one of his aids. Washington had already acquired much warlike skill; and if general Braddock had taken his advice, it would have saved his own life, and the lives of hundreds besides. 3. Braddock and his army marched onward, till they were within about seven miles of Fort du Quesne. Thick woods were all around them, and the settlements of Virginia were hundreds of miles behind. Suddenly, a terrible volley of musketry was fired at them from be- hind the trees. 4. General Braddock now knew that he had fallen into an ambus- cade of French and Indians. He galloped about, endeavoring to en- courage his men; but the bullets came so thick, that the bravest of them were appaled. 5. The general had five horses killed under him. At last, a bullet struck him in the breast. Nearly all the other officers were either 3.4.5.6.7. Relate the adventure of captain Smith with the Indians? 8. What of Pocahontas ? Ch. CLXVII. — 1. When did the old French war being ? Where was Fort Du Quesne .' 2. What of Washington ? 3. 4. 5. Describe the defeat and death of Braddock? 24J|C 282 SCHOOL HISTORY. killed or wounded ; but Washington remained unhurt. It seems as if he were preserved to be the savior of his country. 6. An Indian chief had taken aim and fired at him seventeen times, without once hitting him. It was Washington who rescued the army from total destruction. He and the Virginian troops kept off the Indians, and enabled the British to retreat. 7. I shall now proceed to speak of the other colonies. The first settlement in New York was made in 1613, on the shores of the Hudson river, where Albany now stands. The city of New York, founded about the same time, was at first called New Amsterdam ; it derived its name from the capital of Holland, for the early settlers were natives of that country. 8. In 1664, the province of New York was surrendered by the Dutch into the hands of the English. It grew and prospered very fast, and became one of the most powerful of the colonies. 9. Pennsylvania was settled in 1681. Its founder. was William Penn, a Quaker, and all the earliest settlers likewise belonged to the sect of Quakers. When William Perm arrived in the. country, he bought lands of the Indians, and made a treaty with them. 10. This treaty was always held sacred. The Indians saw that the Quakers were men of peace, and therefore they were careful never to do them any injury. There are no- stories of Indian warfare with the Quakers of Pennsylvania. 11. The province of Maryland was given by Charles the First to Lord Baltimore. Pie was a Roman Catholic, and in 1634, he brought over two hundred people of the same religion, and made the first settlement in Maryland. 12. Carolina first began to be permanently settled in 1680. In 1729, it was divided into v North and South Carolina. The first set- tlement in Georgia was made in 1733. The principal founder was general James Oglethorpe. He came from England with one hun- dred and sixteen settlers, and began to build the city of Savannah. CHAPTER CLXVIII.-AMERICA CONTINUED. Causes ivhich led to the Revolution. 1. The reader will have learned, by the preceding chapters, how the whole of the sea-coast, between New Brunswick and Florida, became covered with colonies, which were all under the government of Great Britain. The inhabitants were growing numerous. 6. What of Washington and his troops? 7. When and where was the first settlement in New York ? What was the city of New York first called ? 8. What of the province c; New York ? 9. When and by whom was Pennsylvania settled ? How did William Penn treat the Indians? 10. What was the consequence of his treaty with them ? 11. Who gave Maryland to Lord Baltimore ? What of Lord Baltimore ? When did he setll* Maryland? 12. When was Carolina settled? When divided? First settlement is Georgia? Who founded it : What city did he build ? UNITED STATES. 283 2. When the king of Great Britain and his ministers beheld the prosperous condition of the colonies, they determined to derive some profit from them. For this purpose, in 1765, the British parliament passed what was called the Stamp Act. 3. Their object was, to take money out of the pockets of the Ameri- cans for the use of the king and ministry. Eut the Americans were resolved that no king on earth should take their property, without their own consent. 4. They made so strong an opposition to the Stamp Act, that par- liament was forced to repeal it. But a tax was soon afterwards laid on tea ; so that no American lady could give a tea-party, without paying a tax to England. Soldiers were sent out to America to compel the people to obey these unjust laws. 5. In the year 1770, a quarrel took place between some of these soldiers and the inhabitants of Boston. A company of the British red-coats assembled in State street, and fired upon a crowd of un- armed people. Three of them fell dead in the street, and five mort were wounded. This affair was called the Boston Massacre. 6. But instead of being affrighted by this bloodshed, the people grew more determined in their resistance to the tyranny of England. In the year 1773, some ships were sent from London to the colonies, laden with cargoes of tea. 7. Three of the ships arrived in the harbor of Boston. One night, a number of persons went on board, in the disguise of Indians, and threw all the tea overboard. These Indian figures were never seen again; and, to this day, nobody can tell who they were. 8. When tidings of this event were carried to England, the king and ministry saw that they could never make slaves of the Ameri- cans, unless by force of arms. They therefore sent over large bodies of troops to keep the people in subjection. CHAPTER CLXIX.— AMERICA CONTINUED. Account of the Battle of Lexington. 1. In 1775, general Thomas Gage was the commander-in-chief of the British forces in America. His head-quarters were at Boston. 2. On the night of the 18th of April, general Gage sent a detach- ment of «ight hundred grenadiers to seize some cannon and ammuni- tion at Concord, about eighteen miles from Boston. The grenadiers marched all night, and reached the town of Lexington at sunrise. Ch. CLXVIII.— -2. What of Hie kin; and ministers of Great Britain? What did tlie parliament do? 3. Their object ? What did the Americans resolve ? 4. What did they do? What of a tax on tea ? What of soldiers ? 5. Describe the Boston massacre ? 6. What of the Americans? Wiiat happened in the year 1773? 7. Describe the destruction of the tea? 7. What did the king and ministers now do? Ch. CLXIX — 1. What ol general Gage ? 2. What did he do ? What of the grenadiers ? 284 SCHOOL HISTORY. 3. Lexington is a village about twelve miles from Boston. A meeting-house stood by the road-side, and near it there was a level tract of grass. On this green space, a company of militia were drawn up. 4. Major Pitcairn was the British commander. As soon as he saw the militia, he galloped forward, brandishing his sword, and drawing a pistol from his holster. "Disperse, you rebels !"' he shouted. " Throw down your arms and disperse !" 5. As he spoke, without giving the militia men time to run away, he discharged his pistol at them. The British soldiers followed the example of major Pitcairn, and fired a whole volley at the Ameri- cans. Several of them were killed and wounded. 6. The British troops then continued their march to Concord. But the Americans were now collecting on all sides. When the British reached Concord, they had a skirmish with a party of militia there. They now found it necessary to retreat as fast as possible. 7. As they marched along the road, the people fired at them from behind the fences and stone walls, and out of the windows of the houses. At every step, some of the British soldiers fell; but their comrades hurried on, without heeding them. 8. When general Gage heard what was going on, he sent Lord Percy out of Boston, with nine hundred men and two brass cannon. Lord Percy met major Pitcairn and the grenadiers scampering back to Boston as fast as they could go ; and, by firing his cannon, he kept the Americans off. 9. But the moment the troops resumed their march, the Americans shot at them again from behind the fences. Before the British arrived in sight of Boston, they had lost nearly three hundred men, in killed, wounded, and prisoners. The loss of the Americans was much less. 10. The news of this battle spread all over the country, and wher- ever the story was told, the people quitted their business and turned soldiers. For now the Revolution had broken out, and it was easy to foresee that there would be a bloody war. CHAPTER CLXX.-AMEItICA CONTINUED. The Battle of Bunker Hill. 1. In a short time after the battle of Lexington, a large American army was assembled round Boston. The British troops could not venture out of the town. They found it difficult to get provisions enough to live upon. 2. On the night of the sixtenth of June, colonel Prescott marched 3. 4. 5. 6. What took place at Lexington? What followed? 7. How v.'ere the British annoyed in their retreat to Boston ? 8. What did general Gage do ? 8. What of the Americans and British? 10. What effect had the news of this battle? Ch. CLXX. — 1. Where did an American army assemble ? What of the British troops ? UNITED STATES. 285 with a thousand Americans to Bunker hill, in Charlestown. On the summit of this hill, with their spades, they threw up a wall of earth and sods as high as their breasts. 3. They intended this as a fortification, from* which they might fire upon the British fleet which lay in Boston harbor. No sooner did the British admiral see the wall of earth and sods, than he began to batter it with cannon-shot and bombs. At the same time, general Gasre sent three thousand troops to take Bunker hill by storm. 4. The troops landed in Charlestown, and marched boldly up the hill. They made a formidable appearance, moving in a long red line, with their glittering muskets. As they advanced, the cannon-balls from the British fleet flew high over their heads, and struck among the Americans. 5. But when the British soldiers had come within twenty yards of the fortification, the Americans suddenly saluted them with a tre- menduous volley of musketry. The smoke cleared away, and there were the king's soldiers retreating in confusion to the water-side. 6. But many of them lay dead or wounded upon the hill. In the mean time, Charlestown had been set on fire, and was blazing like an immense furnace, and throwing clouds of smoke over the whole scene. 7. The officers encouraged the British troops and led them again into battle. But a second time they were driven back with terrible slaughter. It was not till the third trial that the British were able to reach the breast-work. 8. The Americans had now fired away all their powder and ball, and were forced to retreat. General Warren was among the last to leave the breast-work. A British officer snatched a musket from a soldier, and shot the gallant Warren dead. 9. But many a brave Englishman laid down his life that day, and blood enough had been shed to redden all the grass on Bunker hill. 10. In about a fortnight after this battle, general George Washing- ton arrived at Cambridge. The continental congress at Philadelphia had appointed him commander-in-chief of the American armies. He managed matters so skilfully, that the British were driven out of Boston, in March, 1776. CHAPTER CLXXI.— AMERICA CONTINUED. Progress of the War. Capture of Bur goyne. 1. It was on the fourth of July, 1770, that the continental congress declared the United States a free and independent nation. This declaration caused great rejoicings all over America. Yet our affairs were not in a very promising situation. 2. What did colonel Prcscott do? 2. What of the British admiral and general Gage ? 4. 5. 6. 7. S. 9. Describe the battle or Bunker hill? 10. What of general Washington? When were the British driven out of Boston? Ch. CLXXI.— 1. When were the United Starei declared free and independent? '24* 2SQ SCHOOL HISTORY. 2. After the enemy evacuated Boston, general Washington marched from that town to New York. Some important battles were fought between our troops and the British ; but Washington was finally com- pelled to retreat, by superior force. When winter came on, the American soldiers were almost naked. Wherever they marched, their bare feet left bloody tracks upon the frozen ground. 3. But, on a dark, December night, Washington crossed the Dela- ware river with his troops, and marched to Trenton, in New Jersey. A. large body of Hessian soldiers were encamped at this place. They Were suddenly startled by the shouts of the Americans, who had bro- ken into their camp, and they all laid down their arms. 4. Lord Cornwallis, the British general, was now in pursuit of the Americans ; but Washington marched to Princeton, and attacked a party of the enemy who had taken post in the college edifice. Sixty of them were killed, and three hundred taken prisoners. 5. The next year, 1777, the gallant marquis de La Fayette came from France to assist the Americans. He was then only nineteen years old ; but congress appointed him major-general, and he became one of the bravest and best in the army. 6. During this year, the British general Burgoyne marched with a large army from Canada. He sailed down Lake Champlain, and went from thence to Saratoga. But general Gates was wailing for him there, with ten thousand American troops. Many battles were fought between them and the British. 7. In one of these battles, colonel Cilley, an American officer, took a brass cannon from the enemy with his own hands. He imme- diately got astride of it, shouting and encouraging his men, and waving his sword, as if he were seated on a war-horse. 8. On the eighteenth of October, general Burgoyne was forced to sur- render, fie and his aids rode out of the camp to meet general Gates; and Burgoyne took his sword by the point, and offered the hilt to the American general. At this time all the British' army grounded their arms. 9. This great success of the Americans induced the French to make a treaty of alliance with them, and to declare war against Great Britain. France sent a fleet, and afterwards an army, to fight on our side. 2. What of Washington ? What of the American soldiers ? 3. Describe the attack upon Trenton. 4. Attack upon Princeton? 5. What of La Fayette ? 6. What of Bur- goyne ? General Gates ? 7. What of Colonel Cilley ? 3. Describe the surrender of gen-. eral Burgoyne. 9. What did the French do ? UNITED STATES. 287 CHAPTER CLXXII.-AMERICA CONTINUED. The Story of Major Arnold and Major Andre. 1. It -would fill a much larger book than mine, if I were to relate the particulars of all the battles, skirmishes, and other warlike events that occurred daring the Revolution. I must therefore, leave far the greater part of them untold. 2. One of the most interesting incidents in the whole war took place in 1780. General Arnold, who had shown himself a very brave officer, became discontented, and resolved to desert the cause of his country. 3. Pretending that his wounds rendered him unfit for active ser- vice, he requested that the command of West Point might be given him. This strong fortress was situated among the highlands, on the shore of the Hudson river. Its loss would have been a severe mis- fortune to the Americans. 4. No sooner had Arnold got possession of West Point, than he sent to Henry Clinton, the British general at New York, offering to surrender the fortress. Sir Henry Clinton sent a young officer, named Andre, to meet Arnold, and contrive the means of completing this treacherous business. 5. Major Andre had a meeting with Arnold, and they arranged the manner in which the fortress was to be given up to the British. Andre then wished to get on board the ship Vulture, which had brought him up the river from New York. 6. But the Vulture had now sailed further down the stream, and it was necessary for major Andre to return by land. He therefore took off his uniform and put on a common coat, in order that the Americans might not know that he was a British officer. 7. Then mounting a horse, he set out on the road to New York. He had to pass through a part of the country that was guarded by the American troops ; but he travelled most of the way without any trouble or hindrance. 8. But when major Andre reached a place called Tarrytown, he saw three young militia men by the road-side. They came up to him and seized his horse by the bridle. Now Andre had a passport from general Arnold in his pocket, and if he had shown it to the militia men, (hey would have let him go free. But instead of that, he asked them where they came from. 9. " From down the river," they replied. When Andre heard this, he mistook the three militia men for tories, or friends of the British. "lam a British officer," said he. " Let me pass on ; for I am in haste !" 10. But these words were fatal to poor Andre. The three men Ch. CLXXII.— 2. What of general Arnold? 3. What did he request? 4. To whom •ltd he send? What did Sir Henry Clinton do ? 5. What of Andre? 6. Describe :.u ourney and capture. 288 SCHOOL HISTORY. look him prisoner, and found some treasonable papers in his boots. General Arnold made his escape to New York; but poor major Andre remained in the hands of the Americans. 11. He was tried as a spy, and condemned to death. Washington and all the army were sorry for him, but nothing could save him from the gallows. He was therefore executed. CHAPTER CLXXIII.-AMERICA CONTINUED. War in the South. Surrender of Cornwallis. 1. In the latter part of the war, many important events were trans- acted in the Southern states. In 1780, general Gates, the conqueror of Burgoyne, was defeated by lord Cornwallis at Camden, in South Carolina. Congress then sent general Green to command the army of the South. 2. General Green had been a Quaker in his youth ; but when the revolution broke out, he became the best officer in the American army, except general Washington. This was proved by his good conduct in the Southern states. 3. He fought several baltles with the British, and though he was sometimes compelled lo retreat by the enemy's superior force, yet they never gained any real advantage over him. By his skill and valor the British troops were finally driven into the city of Charles- ton. After this event, there was no more trouble with the enemy in the South. 4. Lord Cornwallis, with a large army, was now in Virginia. The American and French troops proceeded thither to attack him. Gen- eral Washington had command of the whole; and, under Washing- ton, the count de Rochambeau was commander of the French. 5. They besieged the British at Yorktown ; for lord Cornwallis did not feel strong enough to meet them in the open field. The Ameri- cans built breastworks round about the intrenchments of the British, and cannonaded them night and day. 6. Finallv, on the nineteenth of October, 1781, lord Cornwallis agreed to surrender his army. But he was ashamed to go through the ceremony of delivering his sword lo the conqueror; and he there- fore sent general O'Hara to do it in his stead. 7. General O'Hara accordingly marched forth at the head of the vanquished army. When he came in the presence of general Wash- ington, he otfered him his sword. But Washington pointed to gen- eral Lincoln; for it was not proper that he himself should receive the sw, d of any but lord Cornwallis. 8. General Lincoln took general O'Hara's sword, and the whole Ch. CLXXIII— 1. What took place in 1780? 2. 3. What of general Greene? 4. What of Lord Cornwallis? Who headed the Americans and French ? 6. Describe tht ilege of Yorktown. 0. Surrender of Lord Cornwallis? UNITED STATES. £g<) Sntish army grounded their arms, and yielded their banners to the notorious Americans. 9. After the surrender of Cornwallis, no important battles were fought, although peace was not declared till 1783. In the summer and autumn of that year, all the British troops sailed homewards, and left America free and independent. 10. Thus you see that the revolutionary war, which began by the battle of Lexington, in 1775, was terminated, after having continued eight years. The sufferings of our countrymen were very great, but the reward of their patience and patriotism was also great. CHAPTER CLXXIV.— AMERICA CONTINUED. Affairs of the United States since the Revolution. 1. When the revolutionary war was over, the people of the United Stales found it'aecessary to adopt a constitution of government. The present Federal Constitution was prepared by some of the wisest men in the country. It went into operation in 1789. 2. The good and illustrious Washington was our first president. He came into office in 17S9, "mid was re-elected at the end of four years. In 1797, John Adams was chosen to succeed him, and be- came the second president of the United States. 3. The most mournful event that had ever befallen America, was the death of Washington. It took place in 1799, when he was sixty- eight years old. The whole country was overwhelmed with sorrow. But Washington had done h;9 work on earth, and it was fit that he should ascend to heaves. 4. The next president, alter John Adams, was Thomas Jefferson. He served during two terms of office, and was succeeded by James Madison, in 1S09. The most remarkable event of Jefferson's adminis- tration, was the purchase of Louisiana from France, in the vear 1S03. This immense territory included the country between the Mississippi and the B,ocky mountains. It was bought for fifteen milliors of dollars. During the administration of Madison, the United States were on ill terms with Great Britain, and there was great reason to fear that hostilities would ensue. 5. Accordingly, on the eighteenth of June, 1812, congress made a delaration of war. Troops were sent to invade Canada. There were several gallant conflicts on the Canadian frontier ; but the Americans did not succeed in conquering the province. 9. When was peace declared .' What of the Hrilish troops? 10. How long did the rev- olutionary war last.' What of the sufferings of the Americans? Their reward ? Ch. CLXXIV. — 1. When was the constitution of government formed ? 2. Who was the first president? When did he come into office ? When was John Adams chosen ? 3. When did Washington'* death take place ? Effect of his death? 4. What did Jefferson pur- chase of the French ? In what year? How large a country was it? What did it coal ? V lien was Madison made president ■ What of the United States during hit administration ■k When whs war declared '. What of w»r« in Canada? 25 290 SCHOOL HISTORY. 6. Many glorious victories were won by the American navy, both on the ocean and the lakes. Hitherto, the British navy had always been triumphant; but now, our brave sailors often compelled them lo haul down their flag. 7. The last and most brilliant event of the war, was the battle of New Orleans. On the morning of the eighth of January, 1815, a strong British army advanced to take the city. But they were driven back with immense slaughter by the Americans, under general Jackson. Peace took place in a very short time after this battle. The United States have not since had any wars, except with the Indian tribes. 8. In 1817, president Madison retired from office, and was suc- ceeded by James Monroe. During the eight years of his administra- tion, the country was quiet and prosperous. John Quincy Adams became president in 1825. He was the son of old John Adams, who had been the next president after Washington. Neither the first nor ; ihe second president Adams continued in. office longer than four vears. 9. The next president was general Andrew Jackson. He was in- augurated in 1829, and began his second term of office in 1S33. He was succeeded by Martin Van Buren, in 1837. William Henry Har- rison became president in 1841, and died in thirty days after, being succeeded by John Tyler, then vice-president. James K. Polk became president in 1845, and Zachary Taylor in 1849. Fillmore suc- ceeded in 1850, and Pierce in 1853. CHAPTER CLXXV.— AMERICA CONTINUED. General Remarks upon the History of the United States. 1. I have now told you a short story about our own country. You will notice that the first settlement made by the white people in the United States, was at Virginia, in 1607 ; the next in New York by the Dutch, in 1613; the next by the Puritans, or, as Ave often call them, the Pilgrims, at Plymouth, in Massachusetts, in 1620. 2. Other parts of the country were soon settled, chiefly by people from England; but colonies were established also by Swedes, Ger- mans, and French. Thus the whole country along the Atlantic border became inhabited. By degrees, the settlers went farther and farther into the wilderness, until towns and cities rose up throughout the whole interior of the land. 3. Thus you will observe that about two hundred and thirty years ago, there was not a white inhabitant throughout this vast country. The Indian tribes were numerous, and their Avhole number within the present boundary of the United States, might have been two hundred thousand. 6. What of naval battles? 7. Describe the battle of New Orleans ? When did it take place? What was done in 1817 ? In 1825? Whose son was John Quincy Adams? 9. When did Jackson become president? When was Martin Van Buren made president? What of Harrison? Ch. CLXXV. — 1. Where and when was the first settlement in the United States? The next? The next : 2. What of other parts of the country ? 3. What of this country two hundred and thirty years ago ? What of the Indians ? UNITED STATES. 291 4. But these lords of the forest gradually disappeared before th« white people. Many of them were slain in battle with the settlers; the others gradually retired, as the forests were cut down, and the lands cleared. 5. They lived by hunting wild deer, bears, buffaloes, and wild turkeys; and as these animals fled from towns and cities, and took refuge in the forests, so the Indians went with them. 6. In this way the red men vanished from the settled portions of the country, and at this day there are few of them to be seen, except in the far western wilderness. There herds of wild deer, vast flocks of bisons, bears, wild turkeys, and other wild animals are to be found, and there is now the home of the Indians. 7. Well, as the Indians retired, the white people increased, being all under the government of the king of England. At the time of the Revolution, they were three millions in number, and as the king treated, them ill, they threw off his authority and set up a govern- ment for themselves. 8. This government, or coustitution, was formed in 17S9, and we have lived under it very happily for nearly fifty years; and the little nation of three millions has how become twenty-five millions strong. CHAPTER CLXXVI.-AMERICA CONTINUED. General Remarks on the History of the United States continued. 1. In reviewing the history of our country, we shall notice that it has been involved in two wars since it became independent. Previous to that event, the colonists, had a great many battles with the Indian tribes, and they had a good deal of fighting to do in the old French war, which commenced about 1755. 2. The revolutionary war was a great affair. The people were fighting for independence, for liberty. America was poor, and Eng- land was rich and powerful. In this struggle, our country may be compared to a stout boy in the grasp of a strong man, who is trying to bind him in chains. But \he boy breaks the chains asunder, turns upon his oppressor, and drives him out of the country. 3. In looking back, then, we see that our forefathers toiled and suffered much to establish freedom in this country. We are now enjoying the fruits of their labors. Let us cherish their memory, for they were great and good men. Let us be thankful to Heaven, for it has sinilled upon their labors. 4. Having taken a backward glance at the history of our country, 4. What I volution States aim th# revolutionary war? 3. What of our forefathers? 2Q2 SCHOOL HISTORY. let us consider for a moment its present condition. Look at the towns and cities that are scattered over the country. Look at the hills and valleys, covered with fruit trees and gardens, and yielding their annual harvests. 5. Look at the rivers, ploughed with whizzing steamboats ; Jook at the canals, bearing along their burden of produce and merchandise. Look at the steam-cars, hurrying along like birds upon the wine ; look at our seaports, and see the forest of shipping that is crowded into their harbors. 6. Visit the city of New York, a busy, buzzing hive of men, con- taining nearly three hundred thousand people. Observe its beautiful streets, its fine houses, the banks, the churches, and other public edifices. 7. Enter the shops and notice the beautiful articles of merchandise brought from China, from Java, from Hindostan, from Arabia, from all the shores of the Mediterranean Sea, from England, France, Hol- land, and all the borders of the Baltic. S. Go to the top of the City Hall, where you can have a view of the surrounding waters ; notice the fringe of masts encircling the southern portion of the city. See there the flag of every commercial country under heaven. See there, too, ships, sloops, schooners, and steamboats, coming and going like bees in a summer morning, all bringing their burden to the hive. 9. What a beautiful sight is this, and in a country, too, which has been settled but little more than two hundred years! And, if you would know more of our country, get into a steamboat and sail up the Hudson, one of the finest streams on the face of the globe. 10. Visit Troy, Albany, Utica, Rochester, and Buffalo; all of them interesting and flourishing towns. Observe the numerous villages, the handsome houses, and the throngs of happy people that inhabit the state of New York. 11. If you are fond of travelling, cross Lake Erie in a steamboat, and proceed to Ohio. See there a country that has not been settled fifty years, now studded over with thriving towns and villages. Go to Cincinnati, Louisville, Nashville, St. Louis, and proceed on the bo- som of the great Mississippi to New Orleans. 12. If you are not satisfied with all this, cross to the Pacific; visit the gold mines of California; proceed to Oregon, and from this point of view consider the extent and resources of these United States. 13. When you have seen these interesting things, go home and re- flect upon them. Sit quietly down, review the past, consider the present, and look forward to the future. What a glorious prospect for our country, if our present government continues, if the people are true to their own interests, and maintain the liberty their fathers left them ! 4. 5. What shall we see in looking at our country ? 6. What shall we observe in the city of New York? 8. What shall we see on the waters around? 9. What of the Hud- eon? 10. Cities of New York? 11. State of Ohio? 13. What of the valley of the Mississippi ? ' AMERICA. 203 14. I say, if the people are true to their own interests. We live in a fine country, we have a good form of government, but these will not insure happiness. If the people become indolent, or if they be- come wicked, ruin and desolation will visit this land. Government may be compared to a house ; those who live in it must take good care of it. 15. They must keep their door3 and windows shut, to prevent storms from driving in. If any part decays, or is injured by a tempest, it must be repaired. The fires must be watched at night. In short, the whole establishment must betaken care of by people who are worthy of being trusted, people who are skilful, and who cannot be tempted to neglect their duty. 16. If the house is intrusted to careless, ignorant, or faithless people, it may take fire, and the inhabitants be burned up. Or it may decay and fall down upon the heads of those who dwell in it. Or it may become leaky, so as to admit the cold wind, or the driving rain or snow. It may thus become a miserable and comfortless habitation. 17. It is so with government. If careless, ignorant, or faithless ru- lers are chosen to take care of the country, wars and commotions may follow; poverty and vice may spread over the land; ignorance and misery may take the place of knowledge and prosperity. Thus the government, which, like a house, is designed to protect us, when ill managed, like a house on fire, or borne down by the tempest, may be the cause of our ruin. IS. Think of these things, my young readers, and when you be- come men, always use your influence to have no other rulers than those who are capable, honest, and sincere friends of the country. CHAPTER CLXXVIL— AMERICA CONTINUED. About South America. El Dorado, and the Fountain of Youth. 1. No sooner had Columbus discovered America, than the pope of Rome claimed it all as his own. None of the Catholic kings of Europe were supposed to hr»ve any right to plant colonies there, unless his holiness granted them permission. 2. Alexander the Sixth was pope at that time. He very generous- ly bestowed one half of the new world on the king of Spain, and the other half on the king of Portugal. These kings then sent out ships and men, who conquered immense territories, and reduced many of the inhabitants to slavery. 3. The Spaniards first took possession of the West Indies. They built the city of Havana, on the island of Cuba, and the Spanish gov- 14. To what may government be compared ? 17. What will happen to the land if faith- less rulers are chosen? Ch. CLXXVII.— 1. What of the pope of Rome? 2. What did pope Alexander do? What of loo kiuga of Spain and Portugal ' 25* 294 SCHOOL HISTORY ernor had his residence there. Other nations afterwards took pos* session of these islands. The great object of all who came to Ameri- ca, at this period, was to get gold and silver. The most wonderful stories were told about the abundance of these metals in some parts of the western continent. Natives of South America. 4. There was supposed to be a kingdom, called El Dorado, or the Gilded, which was thus described. The king was every day covered with powdered gold, so that he looked like a golden image. The palace of this glittering monarch was built of brilliant marble as white as snow. The pillars of the palace were porphyry and alabas- ter. Its entrance was guarded by two lions, who were fastened to a tall column by chains of massive gold. 5. After passing the lions, a fountain was seen, from which gushed a continual shower of liquid silver, through four large pipes of gold. The interior of the palace was too splendid to be described. 6. It contained an alter of solid silver, on which was an immense golden sun. Lamps were continually burning, and their dazzling ra- diance was reflected from innumerable objects of silver and gold. Such was the splendid fiction, invented by somebody, and believed in Europe. 7. Numbers of adventurers went in search of El Dorado, and some pretended that they had really visited this golden kingdom. Eut it has long since been ascertained that no such kingdom ever existed. S. Another thing which the Spaniards expected to find in America, was the fountain of youth. Far away beneath the shadows of the forest, they believed that there was a fountain, the bright waters of - which would wash away wrinkles, and turn gray hair dark again. 9. Oh, if there were any such fountain, old Peter Parley would 3. What of the Spaniards? What was the great object of all who came to America? What of gold and silver? 4. 5. 6. Describe the kingdom of El Dorado as it was supposed to exist. 8. 9. 10. Describe the fountain of youth I AMERICA. 295 iourney tbither, lame as he is, and plunge head foremost into its bo- som ! After a while, the children of America would ask, — "Where is that lame old gentleman who used to tell us stories ?" 10. And there would be a little rosy boy among them, a stranger, whom they had never seen before. He would cry out, "I was old Peter Parley; but 1 have been bathing in the fountain of youth, and now I am a boy again ! Come, let us see which will hop farthest !" CHAPTER CLXXVIIL— AMERICA CONTINUED. History of the Mexican Territories. Texas. Guatimala. 1. Though there was no El Dorado in America, there was gold enough to satisfy even the Spaniards, if such rapacious people ever could be satisfied. The empire of Mexico contained immense riches. 2. This country is in the southern part of North America. It ex- tends across from the Gulf of Mexico to the Pacific Ocean. Its capi- tal city, which is likewise called Mexico, is one of the most magnifi- cent in the world. 3. When America was first discovered, the city of Mexico was even more splendid than it is now. It had stately temples and houses, which were profusely ornamented with gold. Its inhabitants were more civilized than any other natives of America. 4. In the year 1519, Fernando Cortez, a Spaniard, invaded Mexico, with only about six hundred men. But, as his followers wore iron armor, and had muskets and cannon, they were able to fight whole armies of the Mexicans. 5. The emperor of Mexico was named Montezuma. He received Cortez and his men with great civility, for he was afraid to quarrel with them. But, after a short time, Cortez threw Montezuma into prison, and loaded him with chains. 6. Finding himself in so unhappy a situation, Montezuma consented to become a vassal of the king of Spain. But the Mexicans raised an insurrection, and when Montezuma endeavored to quiet them, they uttered shouts of scorn and anger. 7. So offended were they, that they discharged arrows and stones at him. One arrow struck poor Montezuma in the breast, and stretched him on the ground. He would not suffer the wound to be dressed, and, in a few days, this ill-fated emperor died. 8. The Mexicans elected Guatimozin, son-in-law of Montezuma, to succeed him. He made a vigorous attack on the Spaniards, and drove them from the city of Mexico. But Cortez soon came back with an army, and conquered the whole country. 9. The emperor Guatimozin was taken prisoner. He refused to Ch. CLXXVIIL— 1. Wliat of cold in Mexico ? What of Mexico ? Capital? 3. De »cribe I Lc city of Mexico ? 4. When did Cortez invade Mexico ? 5. What of Montezu- ma ? Cortez? 6. What did Montezuma in i What of the Mexicans ? 7. Fate of Mon- tezuma ? 8. What did QnatiinoziD do? Cortez? 0. What was doue to Guatimozin.' •296 SCHOOL H1STOR Y confess where his treasures were concealed. Some of the Spaniards then laid him at full length on a bed of burning coals. There Guati- mozin writhed in agony, till he was delivered by Cortez, who had borne no part in this horrible cruelty. But, about three years after- wards, Guatimozin was suspected of being engaged in a conspiracy, and Cortez sentenced him to be hanged. 10. It has been affirmed, that Cortez and his soldiers killed four millions of the Mexicans, in completing the conquest of the country. He pretended that his only object was to convert the people to the Christian religion. But he and his soldiers acted like fiends, rather than Christians. 11. From the time of its conquest by Cortez, the Mexican empire continued under the government of Spain, till the year 1S10. A re- volution then took place. 12. In 1813, the Mexican provinces declared themselves free and independent. But their independence was not established till several vears afierwards. They are now called the United Mexican States One of these provinces was Texas, which has lately become inde- pendent. 13. In 1845, Texas, which had belonged to Mexico, was admitted as a state into our Union. In 1846 a war began between Mexico and the United States, which lasted for two years. 14. Our armies, under -generals Taylor and Scott, defeated the 'Mexicans in many battles, and finally their chief towns, including the capital, were in our hands. Peace was made in 1848, by which we gained California, the gold mines of which have since produced a wonderful effect on the whole civilized world. Ills Site? 10. What, is said of Cortez? What excuse did he give for his cruelty? 11. TIow lona; was the Mexican empire under the government of Spain? What took place in 1810! 12. What in 1813? What are they now called ? 1^. What of Texas ? 14. War? 15. What of Guatimala? PERU. 297 15. The country called Guatimala, or the United States of Central America, is an independent republic ; the city of Guatimala is its capital. The several states, however, have been much shaken by agi- tations, and the general government is little regarded by them. 16. The late travels of Mr. Stevens, however, has given a new in- terest to Guatimala. He has described the ruins of several ancient cities there, which belonged to the native Indians', and which show that they had made great advances in architecture, sculpture, and oilier arts. CHAPTER CLXXIX.— AMERICA CONTINUED. Spanish Peruvian Territories. Spanish Inhabitants of Peru. 1. A few years after the conquest of Mexico by Cortez, the Span- iards also conquered the vast empire of Peru, in South America. At the present day, Peru is bounded north by the republic of Equator, east by Brazil, south by Bolivia and the Pacific Ocean, and west by the Pacific. But when the Spaniards first invaded it, the Peruvian empire included a much larger space. 2. The sovereigns of this empire were called Incas, and the Peru- vians believed that their first inca was a child of the sun. The in- habitants were worshippers of the sun. 3. Peru contained many magnificent cities, and gold was more abundant than even in Mexico. Of course, no sooner did the Span- iards hear of it, than they determined to make themselves masters of the country. 4. The first invader was Francis Pizarro. In 1531, he marched Ch. CLXXIX. — I. When was Peru conquered ? What of Peru at the present lime ? What of it when the Spaniards first invaded it ? 2. What of the native sovereigns of Peru r The people? 3. What did Peru contain? What did the Spaniards determine to do? 4 When did Pizarro go to Peru? 298 SCHOOL HISTORY. into Teru, and took the inca prisoner in his own palace. The iuc;i*s name was Atabalipa. To regain his freedom, he offered Pizarro as much gold as would fill a spacious hall of his palace, piled as high as he could reach. ' 5. But after the gold had been delivered, Pizarro refused to give Atabalipa his freedom. He was not satisfied with the inca's treasure, but was determined to have his blood. So he condemned him to death ; and Atabalipa was accordingly strangled and burnt. 6. When he had conquered tbe Peruvians, Pizarro quarrelled with one of his chief officers, named Almagro. They made war upon each other, and Pizarro caused Almagro to be beheaded. Soon afterwards he was himself murdered. 7. In the course of time, the Peruvian empire was divided into sev- eral provinces. All of them were under the government of Spain. The Spanish territories comprised nearly all the western part of Soutl America. S. But the kingdom of Spain became so weak that it lost i is au- thority over these colonies. The first resistance to the government was made Avhile Joseph Bonaparte was king of Spain ; and the people would not return to their allegiance, when the former king was again on the throne. 9. The different states in America, which were once Spanish prov- inces, are called the United Mexican States, the Republic of Central America, New Grenada, Venezuela, Equator, Pern, Bolivia, Chili, Buenos Ayres, Uruguay, and Paraguay. Most of them are in a very unsettled condition. CHAPTER CLXXX.-AMERICA CONTINUED. Account of the Brazilian Territories. 1. The vast country of Brazil is bounded north by New Grenada, Venezuela, and Guiana ; east by the Atlantic Ocean ; south by the At- lantic, Uruguay, and Paraguay; and west by Bolivia, Peru, and the republic of Equator. It is larger than the whole United States to- gether. 2. When the Spaniards were making conquests in other parts of America, the Portuguese came to Brazil. It is said that, near the river Amazon, they found a nation of women, whose lives were spent in war. 3. We do not read that the Portuguese committed such horrible cruelties as the Spaniards did. The reason was, that the natives of Brazil possessed but little gold; and the Portuguese hardly thought it worth their while to colonize the country. Who was the Inca ? What did he do ? 5. Fate of Atabalipa ? 6. What of Pizarro and Almagro? What became of Pizarro ? 7. What of the Peruvian empire ? What of the Spanish territories? S. What of the kingdom of Spain? The people ? 9. What of the states in America once Spanish provinces ? Ch. CLXXX.— 1. Boundaries of Erazil ? Ex- tent ? 2. What of the Portuguese ? Amazons ? 3. Why were the Portuguese uot aj cruel as the Spaniards. WEST INDIES. 299 4. During many years the guv.ernment of Portugal was accustomed to send nobody but criminals thither ; so that to be sent to Brazil was considered almost as bad as being sent out of the world. 5. In 154S, a multitude of Jews were banished to Brazil. They planted the sugar-cane there and successfully cultivated it. When the king of Portugal found that the country was rich and fruitful, he sent over a governor, in order that he might not lose his share of the wealth. 6. France, Spain, and Holland, likewise attempted to get posses- sion of Brazil. But the Portuguese resisted them, and finally became sole masters of the country. Perhaps, if the other nations had known of the hidden riches of Brazil, they would not have given up their claims so easily. 7. A long time after the settlement of the country, valuable mines of gold were discovered. Considerable quantities of this precious metal are also found in the beds of the rivers, mixed with sand and gravel. The topaz and the diamond are sometimes seen glittering among the gold. 8. The Bio Pardo, though it is a very small and shallow stream, produces a great number of diamonds. Other rivers are likewise en- riched with them. Negro slaves are employed in washing the sand and gravel of these rivers, and when one of them finds a very large diamond, he receives his freedom. 9. In 1S06, the king of Portugal removed to Brazil, and established his court in the city of Rio Janeiro. Fifteen years afterwards, he re- turned to Lisbon. His son Pedro was then proclaimed emperor of Brazil. 10. In 1831, the Brazilians became discontented with the govern- ment of Pedro. He therefore gave up the imperial crown to his son, who was then only five years old. This boy was styled the empe- ror of Brazil; but the government was carried on by a council of regency, till a few years since, when the emperor assumed the government. CHAPTER CLXXXI.— AMERICA CONTINUED. The West Indies. 1. I must not close my story about America, without giving you 6ome little account of the West India islands, lying in the Atlantic Ocean between North and South America. These consist of thrt-e clusters, called the Bahamas, the Antilles, and the Caribbees. The Bahamas are the most northerly of the three groups, and lie near to 4. Who were sent to lirazil ? 5. What happened in 15-18 ? What of the Jews ? 6. What of other countries ? 7. What were discovered in Brazil? 8. What of the Rio Pardo ? What of the negro slaves? 9. When did the king of Portugal remove to Brazil ? Where did he establish hit court ? When did he return to Lisbon ? What of his son Pedro ? 10. What of the Brazilians in the year 1S31 ? What did Pedro do? Plow is lirazil now gov- erned? Ch. CLXXXI.— 1. Where are the West India Islands situated? Of what three groups do the} consist? What of the Bahama islauds? 300 SCHOOL HISTORY. Florik. They are about six hundred in number. Most of them a?8 small, consisting of sand and rocks, and are uninhabited by man. 2. These however, are the resort of a great variety of sea-fowl. Many of the birds which visit the lakes and shores of the United States in summer, retire to these lonely islands in winter, where they find a secure and pleasant abode. The Bahama islands belong to Great Britain, and contain about seventeen thousand inhabitants. The principal are Turks island, Providence, and San Salvador, or Cat Island. This last was that which Columbus first discovered. 3. The Antilles, occupying the middle portion of the West Indies, consist of Cuba, which is the largest, and belongs to Spain ; Hayti, or St. Domingo, which is independent, and governed by blacks; Porto Rico, which belongs to Spain; Jamaica, which belongs to Great Bri- tain, and a few smaller islands. 4. The Caribbee islands are very numerous, and lie southeasterly of the others. They stretch from Porto Ptico in a semicircular group to the shores of South America. They belong to different European governments. The most celebrated of these islands are Martinique, .Barbadoes, St. Thomas, Tobago, St. Lucia, St. Vincent, Gaudaloupe, Antigua, St. Christophers, Dominica, Santa Cruz, and Trinidad. 5. The climate of the West Indies is that of perpetual summer. Frost and snow never come to visit them. The trees are ever cloth- ed with leaves, and many of the shrubs and plants continue at all times- to be adorned with blossoms. 6. The fruits which are common to us, such as apples, pears, cher- ries, and peaches, are unknown in these regions; but oranges, figs, lemons, pineapples, and many other nice things, are abundant. 7. The people do not cultivate Indian corn, wheat, rye, oats, and barley, as we do, but they raise sugar-cane, from which they extract sugar and molasses, and they cultivate coffee, cotton, indigo, tobacco, cocoa, allspice, and other things. S. The forests contain mahogany, lignum vhse, iron wood, and other woods useful in the arts. Among the birds are parrots of vari- ous kinds, some of which are not bigger than a bluebird. A friend of mine made me a present of one of these little fellows a few years since. Instead of silting upon his perch, J have known him to hang by his claws to the top wires' of the cage, with his head downwards, and thus remain during the whole night. 9. Among the quadrupeds of the West Indies are some curious little monkeys, and several kinds of lizards. The chameleon is the most interesting of these. He was formerly supposed to live on air, and to have the power of changing his color at will. But it is now ascer- tained that he often makes a sly meal upon insects that come in his way, and that his color does not vary more than that of several other animals of a similar kind. 10. Although the West Indies are never disturbed by winter, they 2. What of sea-fowl? To whom do the Bahamas belong ? Which are (he principal ones? 3. What can you say of the Antilles? 4. What of tlie^Carribbee islands? The prin- cipal ones? 5. What of the climate of the West Indies? G. Fruits? 7. Production* ' 8. Forests? Birds? 9. What of monkeys? The chameleon ? WEST INDIES. 301 are often visited by terrible hurricanes. These sometimes tome so suddenly as to tear the sails from the masts of vessels, and often over- turn the houses and trees upon the land. CHAPTER CLXXXIL— AMERICA CONTINUED. West Indies continued. 1. If you were to visit the West Indies at the present day, you would find them inhabited by Europeans and their descendants, to- gether with a great many negroes. But you would meet with none of the native Indians. These have long since disappeared. 2. You already know that Columbus first discovered one of the Ba- hamas, to which he gave the name of St. Salvador, and which is now called Cat Island. Here he found a great many people who appear to have been nearly the same as the Indians which formerly inhabit- ed our country. 3. After leaving S. Salvador, Columbus visited Cuba and St. Domin- go. Both of these were thronged with Indians. It is supposed that Cuba alone contained several millions. They appeared to live very happily, for the climate was mild, and the soil fruitful. They receiv- ed Columbus with kindness, and rendered him every service in their power. They little thought of the cruel consequences which were soon to follow. 4. Not many years after the discovery of the West India islands, the largest and finest of them were taken possession of by the Spanish government. The Indians were a gentle race, and were easily subju- gated. The Spaniards did seem to regard them as human beings, but rather as wild animals, who were to be exterminated. They shot them down by thousands, and even trained bloodhounds to pur- sue them. 5. In this way, the numerous islanders who once swarmed like bees upon every hill-side and in every valley of these beautiful regions, were reduced to a very small number. Most of these were treated like slaves, and many of them were compelled to work in mines, where they soon perished from hard labor, to which they were unaccustom- ed, and for want of that free ai^ which Heaven had sent them before the Europeans came to deprive them of it. 6. Thus, by degrees, the native West Indians vanished, and their fair lands came into the possession of various European governments. Spain held Cuba and Porto Rico in her firm grasp. England got pos- session of Jamaica, the Bermudas, and some other islands. France had St. Domingo, Martinique, Guadaloupe, and several others. Some of the smaller islands fell into the hands of the Dutch, Danes, &c. 10. What of hurricanes? Ch. CLXXXIL— 1. How are the West Indies inhabited? J. What of Cat island? What people did Columbus find there? 3. What islands did he nextvisit? Whatof the Indians ? 4. 5. What of (he Spanish government ? How did the Spaniards treat the Indians? 6. Which islands did Spain obtain possession of ? EngUud? France ? What of smaller islands ? 26 802 SCHOOL HISTORY. 7. The first object of the Europeans after the discovery of America, was to obtain gold and silver. They seemed to imagine that all the hills and mountains in this continent were filled with these precious metals. But this illusion soon vanished, and in the West Indies the people began to cultivate the soil, instead of digging into the bosom' of the earth for gold and silver. 8. They discovered that the land was peculiarly suited to the rais-! ing of sugar-cane, oranges, pineapples, and other productions of a tro-j pical climate. To these, then, they devoted their attention, and the lands soon became very productive. In order to till them, the people sent to Africa for negroes, who were brought by thousands and tens of thousands, and compelled to Avork as slaves. Nearly all the labor, at the present day, is performed by negro slaves. CHAPTER CLXXXIIL— AMERICA CONTINUED. West Indies continued. 1. I shall not undertake to tell you of all the interesting events which have occurred in the West Indies. Several of these islands have often changed hands, sometimes belonging to one government, and sometimes to another. They have frequently been shaken by earthquakes, and often desolated by whirlwinds. But of these events I cannot tell you now. 2. I must not, however, overlook the story of Hayti. This fine island was discovered by Columbus on his first voyage, and here he left a part of his men, who made the first European settlement on this side of the Atlantic. The island was called Hayti by the natives, and Hispaniola by the Spaniards. The settlement increased rapidly, and soon the whole island became subject to Spain. In after times, the French obtained possession of a portion of the country, and until about forty years ago, it was shared between the French and Spanish gov- ernments. 3. But the negro slaves had become much more numerous than the white inhabitants, and, in 1791, they rose against their masters. France, at this time, was in a state of revolution, and could afford no aid to put down the insurrection. The negroes therefore slaughtered the white people by thousands, pillaging their houses, and then set- ting them on fire. A few escaped, but a large proportion were killed. 4. The negroes now considered themselves independent, and began to form a government of their own. After various revolutions, the whole island was formed into a sort of republic, the officers of which 7. What did the Europeans expect to find abundant in America ? Result of these expect- ations? S. What did they discover? What of negro slaves ? Ch. CLXXXIIL— 1. What of some of the West India islands? 2. Who discovered Hayti' What settlement wa» made? Names of the island? To what country did it become subject? What of France ' 3. What was done in 1791 ? 4. What of the negroes ? Their government ? WEST INDIES. 303 were negroes or mulattoes, and so it continues to this day. The people are, on the whole, pretty well governed, and the state of so- ciety is improving. Nearly all the inhabitants are colored people, hut many of them are intelligent, and carry on the various concerns of agriculture and commerce with skill and success. o. Before I leave the West Indies, I must say a few words about the buccaneers, a famous set of sea-robbers, who infested these islands during the seventeenth century. These at first consisted of men from England and France, who settled on the western coast of St. Domingo and the neighboring island of Tortuga, about the year 1030. 6. For a while, they lived by hunting wild animals, but when they became numerous, they procured vessels, and went forth upon the sea to rob and plunder whomsoever they might meet. This business succeeded so well, that a great many desperate adventurers from all parts of Europe united themselves to the buccaneers. They therefore procured larger vessels, which were equipped in the best manner for attack. These were filled with daring seamen, and commanded by bold leaders. 7. In this manner the buccaneers became very formidable. Their vessels hovered in the track of the merchant ships, ready, like hawks in the neighborhood of a barnyard, to pounce down upon whatever might come in their way. They often captured ships laden with rich merchandise, and sometimes with gold and silver. S. In this way, they amassed great wealth ; and such was their power at one time, that they made successful attacks upon large cities, sometimes pillaging the inhabitants, and sometimes laying them under contribution. But, at length, the European governments were roused, by the violence and cruelty of these robbers, to measures of retaliation. They sent large vessels to cruise in the neighborhood of the West Indies, and after many struggles, the buccaneers were finally exterminated. 9. Jn later times, the West Indian seas have been infested by pi- rates, who have captured a good many trading vessels, but they are now seldom met with. State of society ? 5. What of the buccaneers? Where were they originally from? Where and in whet year did they settle ? 6. How did they live for a while ? What did Uiey afterwards do? By whom were they joined? 7. What of the ships of the buccaneers? 8. What of the power of these pirates ? How were they finally subdued ? 9. What of other pirates ? 304 SCHOOL HISTORY. CHAPTER CLXXXIV.— AMERICA CONTINUED. Chronology of America. A. D. Icerand and Greenland settled S60 Christianity introduced into Iceland 9S1 Severe winter in Greenland, which destroyed the colony . . 1408 Columbus born 1442 America discovered . 1492 Cortez invaded Mexico 1519 French settlements made in Canada 1524 Pizarro goes to Peru 1531 First settlement in Virginia at Jamestown 1G(W Quebec founded 1608 First settlement in New York 1613 Settlement at Plymouth 1620 Buccaneers first assemble at St. Domingo and Tortuga . . . 1630 Maryland settled 1634 First settlement in Connecticut 1635 Providence settled . . 1636 English got possession of New York 1664 King Philip's war begins 1675 Carolina settled 16S0 Pennsylvania settled 16S1 The Carolina's divided . . 1729 Georgia founded 1733 Capture of Louisbourg 1745 Old French war begins 1755 Capture of Louisbourg by Wolfe 175S Quebec taken by the English 1759 Stamp act passed 1765 Boston massacre 177C Destruction of tea 1773 Commencement of the Revolutionary war 1775 British troops driven out of Boston 1776 La Fayette came to America 1777 Andre taken as a spy 17S0 Gates beat by Cornwallis 17S0 Surrender of Cornwallis . 1780 Peace between Great Britain and the United States .... 1783 Constitution of the United States went into operation . . . 17S9 Washington made president 1789 John Adams made president 1797 Death of Washington 1799 Ch. CLXXXIV. — Let the pupil he examined in the Chronological table ; and let him tell what was happening in Europe, as events were occurring in America. MALAYSIA. 305 A. D. Jefferson made president . . . • 1801 Purchase of Louisiana 1803 King of Portugal goes to Brazil 1S06 Madison made president 1809 Ptevolution in Mexico 1S10 United States declare war against Great Britain 1812 Mexican provinces become free 1813 Battle of New Orleans 1815 James Monroe made president 1817 Jackson made president 1S29 Don Pedro gives up the crown of Portugal to his son . . . 1831 Van Buren made president 1S37 Harrison president , 1841 John Tyler president . 1841 Peace -with Mexico 1848 Z. Taylor president 1849 Fillmore president 1850 Pierce president 1853 CHAPTER CLXXXV.-OCEANIA. About Oceania- The Malaysian Islands. 1. Having now related the history of Asia, Europe, Africa, and America, the reader will probably think that my Universal History ought to close here. But, as an Irishman would say, there is a fifth quarter of the globe, on which I must now employ my pen. 2. America ought no longer to be called the New World ; for there is a newer one, composed of the islands which lie in the Pacific and Indian Oceans. The name of Oceania has been given to this region. If all the islands were put together, they would cover a space of at least four millions of square miles. 3. There are three divisions of Oceania. Those Islands which lie in the Indian Ocean, near the continent of Asia, are called Malaysia. The largest of them are Borneo, Sumatra, and Java. Scarcely any- thin? has been written about the history of Malaysia, for the islands are chiefly inhabited by the natives, who keep no record of passing events, and have no desire to know the deeds of their forefathers. 4. The history of Java is best known, but it is not very important or interesting. It was discovered by the Portuguese, in the year 1510. They found it an exceedingly fertile island, producing abun- dance of sugar, coffee, rice, pepper, spices, and delicious fruits. There were also mines of gold, silver, diamonds, rubies, and emaralds. 5. The island is six hundred and fifty miles in length. Soon afier its discovery, the Dutch got possession of a large portion of it. They built the city of Batavia, on the northwestern coast of the island. 6. The city is situated on a low, marshy plain, and canals of stagnant water are seen in many of the streets. But the edifices Ch. CLXXXV.— 2. What of Oceania? Extent of Oceania? 3. What of Malaysia I The natives? 4. What of Java? When was it discovered ? What are its production*. Minei? 5. Length of Java? WIkj built Batavia? Describe the city ? 26* 306 SCHOOL HISTORY. were so splendid, that Batavia was called the queen of the East. Its beauty was much increased by the trees that overshadowed the streets and canals. 7. In the year 1780, the "'^nulation amounted to a hundred and sixty thousand. People from all the different parts of the world were among them. But i .. Europeans were the fewest in number, although the government ,vas in their hands. 8. Of late years, Batata has been fast going to decay. The climate is so unhealthy, that strangers are very liable to be attacked by dreadful fevers. Sometimes a vessel loses her whole crew by death. 9. In the year 1811, the English took possession of the island of Java. They kept it till 1816, and then restored it to its former owners. The Dutch are said to exercise great tyranny over the natives. CHAPTER CLXXXVI.-OCEANIA CONTINUED. The Australian Division of Oceania. 1. The second division of Oceania is called Australia. This com- prises New Holland, New Guinea, Van Diemen's Land, and other islands in the vicinity. New Holland is an immense island, contain- ing three millions of square miles, and is about as large as Europe. 2. The natives of New Holland arc described as the most degraded people in the world. They are negroes, and have very lean arms and legs. Their features have a resemblance to the monkey tribe, and they are said to be not much handsomer or more intellgent than the orang-outangs found in the Malaysian islands. 3. This great island was discovered by the Dutch, in 1610, but the whole of it is now claimed as a territory of Great Britain. Captain James Cook, the celebrated navigator, took possession of it in 1770. 4. It contains several settlements. The eastern is called New South Wales, and the western the Swan-river colony. New South Wales is the oldest, and began to be settled in 1778. It was then called Botany Bay. 5. The first colonists were not a very respectable sort of people. The English government conceived the plan of sending criminals to New Holland, instead of keeping them in jail, or sending them to the gallows. Accordingly, ship-loads were transported every year. 6. This cannot be considered a severe punishment, for the soil of New Holland is fertile, and the climate is delightful. Perhaps the T. Population of Batavia in 1730? 8. What of this city oflate years? Its climate? 9. What happened- in 1811? In 1816? What of the Dutch? Ch. CLXXXVI 1. What is called Australia ? What is the size of New Holland? 2. What of the natives? 3. When and hy whom was New Holland discovered ? Who now hold it in possession ? When was it taken by captain Cook ? 4. What of the two colonies of New Holland ? When was New South Wales settled? What was the settlement called ? 5. Who wera the first colonists ? Who were sent every year to Botany Bay ? POLYNESIA. 307 English would have acted more equitably, if they had transported the honest poor people, who were starving at home. 7. But, during many years, there were hardly any honest men in the new colony. Few of the inhabitants felt any reluctance to commit crimes, or were ashamed to be found out; for they knew that their neighbors were as bad as themselves. S. In later years, however, the people began to improve. The children of the convicts were now growing up, and their parents had taught them to be more virtuous than they themselves had been. 9. A young girl, who was born in New Holland, was once asked whether she would like to go to England. " Oh, no !" said she ; " I should be afraid to go there, for the people are all thieves !" The child knew that a gang of thieves arrived in every ship which came from England, and she naturally supposed that the English were all thieves alike. 10. Criminals still continue to be transported from England ; and they are so numerous, that it has been found necessary to plant new colonies of them. Since the year 1S04, VanDiemen's Land has been appropriated to that purpose. 11. In 1850, rich gold mines were found in New Holland, which is now generally called Australia. These have caused a sudden and extraordinary prosperity in these colonies. CHAPTER CLXXXVII.-OCEANIA CONTINUED. Polynesia. The Sandwich Islands. 1. The third division of Oceania is called Polynesia. It consists of many groups of small islands, which are scattered over a large ex- tent of the Pacific Ocean. None of them are inhabited by civilized people. 2. The Sandwich islands are among the most important in Poly- nesia. They consist of ten islands, of which Owhyhee, or Hawaii, is the largest. These islands were discovered by Captain James Cook, in 1778. 3. He found them inhabited by a race of people whose forms were very beautiful, although their complexions were darker than our own. They appeared to be of a gay, friendly, and sociable disposition. 4. But there were some shocking customs among them. They were in the habit of feasting on human flesh, and offering human sacrifices to their idols. They were also great thieves, and had many other vices. 7. What can be said of the colonies for some years? 8. What of them in later years? 9. Relate the anecdote of the young New Holland girl? 10. What has it been found necessary to do on account of the number of criminals sent to Now Holland ? What was done in 1804? 11. What of gold mines? Cn. CI,XXXVII.— 1. What of Polynesia? Its inhabitants ? 2. Which are the most important islands of the group ? Which is the largest of the Sandwich islands ? Who discovered these islands In 1778 ? 3. What people did cap- ain Cook find inhabiting the Sandwich islands ? 4. What were some of their customs? 303 308 SCHOOL HISTORY 5. The natives at first behaved in a very friendly manner to captain Cook. But, after some time, a part of them stole one of the boats belonging to his vessel. The captain went on shore, intending to take the king of Hawaii prisoner, and keep him till the boat should be returned. 6. But when he had landed, the natives mustered in great numbers. Captain Cook found it necessary to retreat towards bis own men, who were waiting for him in a boat near the shore. The natives followed him, shouting, throwing stones, and brandishing their weapons. 7. Captain Cook pointed his musket -at them, but it only made them more tumultuous and violent. He then took aim and shot the foremost native dead. In a moment, before the smoke of his musket had blown away, the natives rushed upon him. One of them beat him down with a club, and then stabbed him with a dagger. His men fired their muskets at the natives, but could not rescue him. 8. The Sandwich islands soon after became the resort of whale- ships, and of all other vessels that voyaged in that part of the Pacific Ocean. But the inhabitants did not derive any advantage from their intercourse with civilized people. 9. On the contrary, they became a great deal more viscious than ever they were before. They contracted so many diseases, that their numbers were reduced from four hundred thousand to less than a hundred and fifty thousand. There was reason to fear that the islands would be depopulated. 10. Some American missionaries crossed the ocean, in hopes to save these poor islanders from destruction. They preached the Gos- pel to them, and established schools, in which the natives were taught to read the Bible. 11. Kaahumana, the queen-regent of the Sandwich islands, adopted the Christian religion. By her assistance, the missionaries met with great success. A number of schools were established. It appeared probable that the whole people would be civilized and christianized. 12. But Kaahumana died a few years since, and her death was a great misfortune to the Sandwich islands. Many of the natives re- lapsed into their former vices. But the missionaries are still laboring earnestly for their good ; and such has been their success, that the people are, in a great degree, brought within the pale of Christianity and civilization. These islands are now in a very promising condition. 6. What took place between the natives and captain Cook? 6. "What did Cook find it necessary to do ? Relate what then happened f 8. What ships soon resorted to tho Sandwich islands ? What was the consequence of the intercourse ofthe natives with the whites? What of American missionaries? 11. What of Kaahumana ? 12. Consequence cf her death ? What ofthe missionaries? THE SOCIETY ISLANDS. 309 CHAPTER CLXXXVIII.— OCEANIA CONTINUED. Polynesia continued. The Society Islands. 1. The Society islands likewise belong to Polynesia. They are situated about a thousand miles south of the equator, which is nearly the same distance that the Sandwich islands are north of it. 2. The largest of the Society islands is called Tahiti, or Otaheite. It is a hundred miles in circumference, and is inhabited by about ten thousand, people. Like the natives of the Sandwich islands, they are generally handsome, and of agreeable manners. 3. A very interesting event took place among these islands, many years ago. The brig Bounty, belonging to the British navy, was sent to the Society islands in order to carry bread-fruit trees from thence to the West Indies. Her commander was lieutenant William Bligh. 4. He arrived at Otaheite in 17S8. His crew were delighted with the island. The air was balmy and full of sunshine. Fruits grew abundantly on every tree. There was no need of toiiug for bread, since there were trees enough which produced it ready made, and almost as good as if it had been baked. 5. The natives of Otaheite received the Englishmen with kindness. The women behaved with great affection towards the poor storm- beaten sailors. In short, the crew spent their time so pleasantly, that they were very reluctant to depart. 6. They desired to spend their whole lives in these sunny islands, instead of wandering any moreover the wide and dreary sea. When the Bounty sailed, they cast many a sad glance at the pleasant shores which they were leaving. They had not sailed many days, before they formed a resolution to return. 7. A young man by the name of Christian was an officer on board the Bounty. He was not on good terms with lieutenant Bligh, and he incited the crew to mutiny against their commander, and take possession of the vessel. 8. One morning, before sunrise, Christian and his associates entered lieutenant Bligh's cabin, while he was asleep. They bound his hands behind his back, threatening him with death if he made the least resistance. He was then put into a leaky boat, with eighteen oilier persons, who refused- to join in the mutiny. 0. I can only say of lieutenant Bligh and his companions, that they arrived safe in England, afier severe hardships. The British frigate Pandora was then sent to Otaheite in search of the mutineers, that they might be brought to justice. Ch. CLXXXVIII.— 1. Where are the Society islands ? To what group do they belong .' 2. What is the size and population of Tahiti or Otaheite ? What of the natives ? 3. What of the brig Bounty? Who was tier commander? 4. When did he arrive at Ota- heite ? How did his men like the island? 5. How ilid the natives treat the Englishmen ? 6. What of the crew of the Bounty? What resolution did liny form? 7. What did Christian do? S. How did he treat lieutenant Bligh and eighteen others? 8. Did they brrive in England ? What ship was sent to Otaheite ? 310 SCHOOL HISTORY. 10. The frigate arrived at Otaheite and found fourteen of the mutineers. She took them on board and sailed for England, but was wrecked on her passage. Four of the mutineers were drowned. The other ten were carried to England, where three of them were hanged. 11. Christian, the ringleader of the mutiny, had not been taken prisoner by the Pandora ; for he and several companions had sailed from Otheite in the Bounty. They had taken with them a plentiful supply of hogs, dogs, cats, and fowls, and also a number of Otaheitan men and women. 12. For a great many years, nobody could tell what had become of Christian and his friends, and of the brig Bounty, in which they had sailed away. As no news were heard of them, people universally believed that the vessel had gone to the bottom, with all her crew. CHAPTER CLXXXIX.-OCEANIA CONTINUED. Story of the Bounty concluded. 1. But, after twenty years, when people had long ajjo done talking about the Bounty, it was found out what had become of her. In the year 1813, a British ship of war was sailing from the Marquesas islands to the port of Valparaiso, in South America. The captain of the vessel was Sir Thomas Staines. In the course of his voyage, he happened to cast anchor off Pitcaim's island. 2. This small island lies many leagues to the southwest of Ota- heite. It was first discovered by captain Carteret, in 1767 ; but ver^* few people had since visited it, for it produced no valuable commodi- ties, and it was supposed to be uninhabited. 3. But, as Sir Thomas Staines looked from the deck of his vessel to tbe shore, he was amazed to perceive that the island was culti- vated, and that there were small houses on it. These houses were better built than those of the savages generally are, and they looked something like the dwellings of poor people in England. 4. While Sir Thomas Staines and his sailors were wondering at these circumstances, a small boat put off from the shore. The waves rolled very high, but the boat skimmed like a sea-bird over the tops of them, and soon came along side of the vessel. 5. The boat was rowed by two young men. They were hand- some, though of rather a dark complexion. When they came near the vessel, one of them called out, in good English, — " Won't you throw us a rope, friends ?" 10. What happened to the Pandora ? What became of the mutineers ? 11. What had Christian and his companions done ? 12. What was supposed to have become of them ? Ch. CLXXXIX.— 1 What happened in the year 1813? 2. Where is Pitcairn's island 1 When was it discovered ? 3 What was seen from the deck of the ship ? How did the houses appear? 4. What of a boat from shore ? 5. Describe the young men who rowed it ? What did they call out i CHRONOLOGY 311 6. A rope was thrown to them, and they took hold of it and clam- bered on board of the vessel. Sir Thomas Staines asked them who they were, and how they came to be living on that lonely island. The mystery was soon explained. 7. When Christian and his companions left Otaheite, they had steered for Pitcairn's island, and had run the Bounty on the rocks and set her on fire. They had then built houses on the island, and had married the Otaheitan women whom they brought with them. S. Christian and all his associates were now dead, except one old man, whose name was John Adams. But they had left children and grandchildren, so that there was now quite a flourishing colony on the island. 9. Old John Adams had taught the young people to read the Bible, to tell the truth, and to be honest and upright in their be- havior. They seemed to be the happiest set of creatures that ever lived ; for they hardly knew that there was any sin and sorrow in the world. 10. Oh, it is a pity that Sir Thomas Staines ever anchored off Pit- cairn's island ! It is a pity that those poor people could not have lived and died in their little sea-girt home, without ever beholding a human creature but themselves ! 11. The more they learned about mankind, the worse it was for them. Their own island, though a little one, was large enough to be their world. I have only to add, that old John Adams is dead, fiecent accounts assure us that the people remain, about one hundred and ninety in number, very innocent and happy. ., CHAPTER CXC— OCEANIA CONTINUED. Chronology of Oceania. A.D. Java discovered by the Portuguese 1510 New Holland discovered by the Dutch 1610 Batavia, the capital of Java, built by the Dutch 1619 Captain Cook took possession of New Holland 1770 Botany Bay, in New South Wales, settled 1778 Sandwich Islands discovered by Captain Cook 1778 Death of Captain Cook 1779 Ship Bounty arrives at Otaheite 17S8 Convicts sent to Van Dieman's Land 1S04 The English take Java from the Dutch 1S11 Sir Thomas Staines reaches Pitcairn's island 1S13 The Dutch take Java again from the English 1816 Missionaries established at the Sandwich Islands 1S20 7. Where had Christian and his companions steered on leaving Otaheite ? What did they then do ? 8. Who alone remained of the mutineers ? How was the colony peopled ? 9. What had John Adams done for the young people ? 10. What reflections cau you inaku upon this incident. 312 SCHOOL HISTORY. CHAPTER CXCI. General Vieivs. 1. I will now give you some account of the origin of government, architecture, and other things. At the present day, some nations are governed in one way and some in another. In this country, the people are governed by rulers of their own choice, and according to a constitution of their own formation. This nation is therefore called a Republic. 2. Some nations are governed by kings or emperors, who rule ac- cording to their own will. These are called despotic monarchies. Other nations are ruled by kings or emperors, whose power is re- strained by legislative assemblies, who make laws for the country. These are called limited monarchies. 3. In very early ages, there were no kings or emperors. A father would rule over his family, or a grandfather would rule over all his descendants. This kind of government was called patriarchal. It existed before the flood, and continued in some parts of Asia long after that event. 4. But when the people became divided into nations, they went tc war with each other. The boldest and strongest man would become the leader. Having the soldiers at his command he would acquire great power, and become a king or chief. As the people became rich, he would build palaces and live in great pomp. 5. When a king conquered several nations he would be styled em- peror. Thus you perceive that the rulers went on acquiring power, until they made slaves of the people. In Europe and Asia, nearly all the nations are governed by kings or emperors. 6. At various times, the people have become tired of being gov- erned by selfish monarchs, and have established eovernments for themselves. In ancient Greece and Rome, the people threw off the yoke of their tyrant kings, and for a time enjoyed freedom. But it always happened that ambitious men have led the people astray and enslaved them. It is to be hoped that the Americans will not thus part with their liberty. . 7. In looking round upon the world, and observing the multitude of^ cities filled with beautiful buildings, you would hardly imagine that mankind once dwelt in huts, grottos, caverns, and tents; yet such was the case in early ages. 8. But as people grew more civilized, they made themselves more comfortable houses. At first they were of stone or wood, rudely put together ; but after a time they learned to make them more neatly. 9. Having pretty good houses for themselves, they began to erect temples for their gods. Thus architecture was improved and became a great art. The ancient Egyptians, Babylonians, Assyrians, Persians, and Phcpnicians filled their cities with splendid edifices. But of al the ancients, the Greeks built the most pleasing and elegant striae GENERAL VIEWS. 313 tures. The Romans carrying their conquests over the civilized world, copied and combined the architecture of different countries. Many of their edifices were exceedingly splendid, but not so chaste and beautiful as those of the Greeks. 10. Agriculture was one of the first arts of man. The Bible tells us, that Cain was a tiller of the ground, and that Noah was a hu» bandman, and planted a vineyard. For many ages, agriculture was almost the only art practised by mankind. 11. The Chinese, Japanese, Chaldeans, Egyptians, and Phoenicians, held husbandry in high estimation, in the earliest ages. The Greeks had but few farming tools; but the Romans used a great variety. They particularly venerated the plough. 12. The first mention made of nations trading together appears in the book of Genesis, chapter 3S: 25, when Joseph's brethren sold him to a band of Ishmaelites, who were conveying spices, balm, and myrrh into Egypt. The balm was from Gilead, and the myrrh was the pro- duce of Arabia. They were going through the land of Canaan into Egypt, which was then a highly cultivated kingdom. 13. The central situation of Egypt made it the ancient emporium of commerce. By caravans, the treasures of Asia and Africa were brought thither. Trade was always held in esteem, because of the wealth it brought. Tyre and Sidon, cities of Phoenicia, were early devoted to commerce; and Solomon carried on an extensive trade with them. 14. The Greeks had great commerce along the borders of the Mediterranean Sea. The Carthaginians were also a highly commer- cial people. The Romans preferred acquiring wealth by conquest and plunder, rather than by trade. Of all modern nations, Great Britain is the most commercial. 15. I have not space to tell you the history of music, painting and sculpture. Egypt was the birth-place of the arts and sciences, but most of the great nations of antiquity made some progress in them. Ine most beautiful specimens of sculpture in existence are those pro- duced by Greek artists, at least two thousand years ago. In painting the modern Italians have excelled all other nations. THE END. 27 PARLEY'S COMMON SCHOOL HISTORY. This work has run through nine editions in this country, and several in England, in & brief space of time, and is now established in the best Schools in Boston, New-York, Phi- ladelphia, Baltimore, and other places throughout the United States. The following among a multitude of notices, will give some idea of the character of the work. From Mrs. Sigourncy, Hartford. " I consider it one of the best works of its talented and indefatigable author. I am sub- mitting it to the practical test of daily lessons with my children, and find them both insti uct- ive and pleasing." Mr. J. Bailey, an eminent Teacher of New-York says, "I have carefully examined Peter Parley's History, and am delighted with the work. The most prominent and important features of the history of all nations and ages, from the creation of man to the present time, are presented in a manner striking, familiar, and pleas- ing, — in a style, pure, neat, and even elegant, and admirably adapted to youth, — and, at the same time, interesting to mature age. The geographical drawings, interspersed as the ba- sis of this work, are such, in fact, as should be the basis of all history. The engravings are good: the figures numerous, and pleasingly illustrative of the manners and customs of differ- ent ages and nations. The chronological and other tables greatly enhance the merit of the work." Mr. Alden, a distinguished Teacher of Philadelphia, says, " I am greatly pleased with Parley's History, and shall introduce it into my school. Ju- dicious in its arrangements, attractive in style, and striking in selection, it commends itself to teachers and parents as particularly appropriate to the juvenile mind. When known to school committees and others concerned with our common schools, it cannot fail of being introduced into general use." From the Boston Times. " The publishers have just sent us a copy of the ninth edition of this admirable school book, and we take pleasure in calling to it the attention of teachers, as one of the best his- torical works that has ever been published for academies and schools. History ought to be taught in every school, and this work from its clearness, its liveliness, and its simplicity, if precisely adapted to the purpose." From the American Traveller. "This work was written for the purpose of bringing the study of general history within the scope of high schools, academies, boarding schools, and even common schools. The task was a difficult one, for it involved the necessity of abridging a vast amount of matter, 60 as to bring it within a small compass, and at the same time to make this interesting acd attractive. This, however, has been most happily accomplished, and the Common School History is undoubtedly one of the most valuable contributions to the cause of educa- tion. We cannot do belter than to commend it to all teachers and others, who believe with us, that history should form a part of even the humblest education. The subjects are ar- ranged in easy chapters, and the whole may be mastered in a few months. We cannot conceive of a book more agreeable to pupil and teacher than this. We take pleasure in stating that the publishers uniformly prodnc*. ii in an excellent style." JCf* The publishers have the pleasure to say, that they have several hundred recommend- ations of the same general tenor as the above ; they feel therefore great confidence in com mending the work as calculated, in an eminent degree, to make history interesting to the voung. and also to render it easy to introduce fhe study of it into all our schools, through- uut the country. PHILADELPHIA- No. 67 South Fourth Stbbht. STANDARD BOOKS PUBLISHED BY & H. BUTLER & CO., PHILADELPHIA. 0/ the following xHU be forwarded by maU, post-paid, for a remittance of Cite price against the work or works ordered. GOODKICH'S SCHOOL HISTORIES. Goodrich's Pictorial History of the United States. A Pictorial History of the United States, with Notices of other Portions of America. For the use of Schools. By Samuel G. Goodrich. 1 voL 12mo. 360 pages. Goodrich's Pictorial History of England. A Pictorial History of England, Scotland, and Ireland. For the UBe of Schools. By Samuel G. Goodrich. 1 vol. 12mo. 444 pages. Goodrich's Pictorial History of Rome. A. Pictorial History of Ancient Rome, with a Sketch of the History of Modern Italy. For the use of Schools. By Samuel G. Goodrich. 1 vol. 12mo. 333 pages. Goodrich's Pictorial History of Greece. A Pictorial History of Greece, Ancient and Modern. For the use of Schools. By Samuel G. Goodrich. 1 vol. 12mo. 371 pages. Goodrich's Pictorial History of France. A PirUorial History of France. For the use of Schools. By Samubl ft. Goodrich. 1 vol. 12mo. 347 pages. Parley's (Goodrich's) Common School History. A. Brief Compend of Universal History. For the use of Schools. By Samuel G. Goodrich. 1 vol. 12mo. 309 pages. Price, 75 cents. J9S* These -works are written in a lively and pleasing style, abounding in illucxaa- tiie anecdotes, incidents, and descriptions, the histories, in all cases, being based ra Geography, illustrated by maps. The manners and customs of each country and age] •re constantly kept in view. The -works are freely supplied with engravings, giving eorrect ideas of manners and customs, views of cities, monuments, battles, &c. They cave been got up with great care and expense, and are published In a superior style. It is believed that therp is no series of familiar histories, in America or Europe, thai may challenge comparison with these, either in interest, accuracy, or beauty of me- ehanical execution. The publishers are able to add that they have received the appro- bation of leading men, and are introduced into the principal seminaries throughout the United States. They are uniform in size and price. MANN & CHASE'S NEW ARITHMETICAL SERIES. IN THREE PARTS. Mann & Chase's Primary Arithmetic, Part 1, The Primary School Arithmetic : designed for Beginners. Containing copious Mental Exercises, together with a large number of Examples for the Slate. By Horace Mann, LL. D., and Pliny E. Chase, A. M., Authors of "Arithmetic Practically Applied." 1 vol. 18mo. Price, 25 cents. Mann & Chase's Arithmetic, Part 2. The Grammar-School Arithmetic : containing much valuable Commercial Information; together with a system of Integral, Decimal, and Prac- tical Arithmetic, so arranged as to dispense with many of the ordinary rules. By Horace Mann, and Pliny E. Chase, Authors of " Primary Arithmetic." 1 vol. duodecimo. Price, 63 cents. Mann & Chase's Arithmetic, Part 3. Arithmetic Practically Applied : for Advanced Pupils, and for Private Jteferenee, designed as a Sequel to any of the ordinary Text Books on the subject. By Horace Mann, LL.D., the First Secretary of the Massachusetts BoarQ of Education, and Pliny E. Chase, A.M. 1 toL duodecimo. Price, $1.00 ANGELL'S READING BOOKS. This is a series of Spelling and Keadmg Boobs, in Six Numbers; comjile^ by Oliver Angell, A. M., Principal of the Franklin High School, Providence. Tha Numbers composing the series may be briefly de- scribed as follows : Angell's Reader, No. 1. 72 pages ISmo. Price, 8 cents. The arrangement of the lessons in this book is such, that the child commences reading as soon as he commences putting the letters together into syllables, the exor- cise of spelling and reading being simultaneous. The same syllables and words which form the Spelling Lessons, are arranged as Reading Lessons directly opposite, or im- mediately under the Spelling columns. Angell's Reader, No. 2. 136 pages ISmo. Price, 14 cents. This is a continuation of the First Number, containing Easy Beading Lessons, most af whioh are pleasing stories, designed to interest the mind of the learner, and afford instruction. Spelling Lessons, consisting of words from the Keading Lessons, presedi every Reading Lesson. Angell's Reader, No. 3. 206 pages 18mo. Price, 17 cents. This is a gradual advance from the Second Number, having the Reading and Spell tog Lessons arranged on the same plan. The Lessons, in each of the Numbers, are followed by a set of Questions, to exercise the reader on what he has read. Angell's Reader, No. 4. 252 pages 12mo. Price, 30 cents. Also designed as a Reading and Spelling Book, and containing a variety of othei useful matter. Angell's Reader, No. 5. 296 pages 12mo. Price, 50 cents. * A ReadiDg Book for the higher classes in Common Schools, with Spelling Lessons wid definitions adapted to each reading section; with Tables, Mental Arithmetic, &o. Angell's Reader, No. 6. 504 pages 12mo. Price, 75 cents. Being a selection of pieces in prose and verse ; designed as a Reading Bock for Uia highest classes in Academies and Schools. These six volumes, compiled by Outer Anqell, comprise a series which is nr» 3 Angell's Reading Books — continued. doubtedly more suitable for the purpose for which they are designed, than any jw« lious publications; and they are more popular among those who have the direct*-* of education than any ever prepared in this country. There is a decided advantage in possessing sots of elementary books by the same author, who has pursued a similar plan with each, rising step by step, and who, it is presumed, would be better able to preserve the proper gradation of style and matter, than several individuals would. Ihis will be found to be the case in the present 6eriea. Richardson's English Dictionary. A New Dictionary of the English Language, by Charles Richardsom. 2 volumes quarto, 2295 pages. Price, $22.50. RICHARDSON'S ENGLISH DICTIONARY is acknowledged to be the great The- saurus of English Philology and Lexicography. Its character as a work of standard authority is so well established, that few scholars or professional men will deem their libraries complete without it. Fleming & Tibbins' French Dictionary. An entirely New and Complete French and English, and English and French Dictionary, adapted to the present state of the two Languages. By Prof. Fleming, Prof, of English in the College of Louis-le-Grand, and Prof. Tibbins, author of several lexicographical works : with im- portant additions, by Charles Picot, Esq., Professor of French in the University of Pennsylvania, and Jtjdah Dobson, Esq., Member of the American Philosophical Society, of the Academy of Natural Sciences, &c,